JP2020146497A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing an excessive increase in a storage area of storage means.SOLUTION: Variation means is varied by first opening for varying the variation means from a second state to a first state in satisfaction of a first condition, and by second opening for varying the variation means from the second state to the first state so as to be more advantageous to a player than the first opening in satisfaction of a second condition. A lottery of satisfaction of the first condition and the second condition is held, and the result is variably displayed for a predetermined display time. After satisfaction of the second condition, a long display time is determined.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, a lottery is performed when a game ball is won at the starting port, and a variable effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal screen. Then, in order to increase the winning of the game ball to the starting port, an ordinary electric accessory is provided at the starting port. When a through gate is provided to trigger a lottery to determine whether or not to operate the ordinary electric accessory, a lottery is performed as the game ball passes through the through gate, and the lottery is successful. A pachinko machine is known that operates an electric accessory for a certain period of time to facilitate the entry of a game ball into a starting port.

In such pachinko machines, a plurality of opening patterns for ordinary electric accessories are set, and there are two opening patterns, a long opening in which the opening time is longer than the normal time and a normal opening in which the opening time is set shorter than that. Some are set.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-13528

In this type of pachinko machine, if the long opening is established in a short period of time after the long opening is executed, a large number of reserved balls are generated, and the reserved storage area becomes excessively large.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and provides a gaming machine capable of suppressing an excessively large storage area of a storage means.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 executes a game lottery based on an entry port where a game ball can enter and a game ball entering the entry port. A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information necessary for A storage means for storing the lottery information, a display means for displaying an identification symbol capable of identifying the number of lottery information stored by the storage means, and a game ball at the entrance. A variable means that can be changed to a first state in which the ball is easy to enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first state, and when the first condition is satisfied, the variable means is used as the first state. When the first opening and the second condition, which are variable from the second state to the first state, are satisfied, the variable means is changed from the second state to the first state so as to be more advantageous to the player than the first opening. A variable control means that is at least variable to a second opening that is variable to one state, a determination means that determines the establishment of the first condition and the second condition based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery opportunity, and a determination means thereof. The display time determining means includes a determination information display means for dynamically displaying determination information indicating a determination result by the determination means and a display time determining means for determining a display time for dynamically displaying the determination information. Based on the determination information indicating the second condition being displayed on the determination information display means, the display time longer than the normal time is determined until the lottery opportunity is established a predetermined number of times.

According to the game machine according to claim 1, the lottery information necessary for executing the lottery of the game is obtained by the lottery information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball enters the entrance where the game ball can enter. Obtained by. Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, the winning / failing determination is executed by the winning / failing determination means when the lottery condition is satisfied. The lottery information is stored by the storage means at least until the lottery conditions are satisfied. An identification symbol capable of identifying the number of lottery information stored by the storage means is displayed by the display means.

It is variable by the variable means to a first state in which the game ball is easy to enter the ball entry port and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. When the first condition is satisfied, the variable means is changed from the second state to the first state. When the first opening and the second condition are satisfied, it is more advantageous to the player than the first opening. The variable means is varied by at least the variable control means to the second open, which is variable from the second state to the first state.

Based on the establishment of the predetermined lottery opportunity, the establishment of the first condition and the second condition is determined by the determination means. Judgment information indicating the determination result by the determination means is displayed by the determination information display means. The display time for dynamically displaying the determination information is determined by the display time determining means. Based on the determination information indicating the second condition being displayed on the determination information display means, the display time determination means determines a display time longer than the normal time until the lottery opportunity is established a predetermined number of times.

As a result, even if the second condition is continuously satisfied, the display time longer than the normal time is determined after the second opening, so that the identification symbol based on the lottery information stored in the storage means during that time is determined. Is dynamically displayed, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the number of lottery information stored in the storage means becomes too large.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) to (b) are schematic views schematically showing a notice display mode per long time. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a notice display for a long time, and (b) is an example of a change notice display for a reserved ball that has won a prize at the second starting port during a long time. It is a figure shown as a target. (A) to (b) are diagrams schematically showing an example of a notice display of fluctuations for a reserved ball that has won a prize at the second starting port during a long period of time. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the notice display of the fluctuation with respect to the holding ball which won a prize in the 2nd start port during a long time hit. (A) is an upper perspective view showing the positional relationship between the frame button and the touch switch of the pachinko machine, and (b) shows the display mode when the total number of fluctuations of the pachinko machine in a day is displayed. It is the figure which showed an example, (c) is the enlarged view which showed the changeover switch of a pachinko machine in an enlarged manner. (A) is a timing chart showing the period setting from the power-on of the pachinko machine, (b) is an example showing the background image displayed in the preparation period of the pachinko machine, and (c) is an example. This is an example showing a background image displayed during the time production period of a pachinko machine. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of the advance notice effect display mode of the touch sensor displayed on the third symbol display device of the pachinko machine, and (c) is the third symbol display device of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which showed an example of the notice effect display mode displayed by. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a variation display mode of a variation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device when the background mode A is selected, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the variation display mode of the variation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device when the background mode A is selected. It is a figure which showed an example of the variation display mode of the display variation pattern. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a variation display mode of a variation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device when the background mode A is selected, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the variation display mode of the variation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device when the background mode A is selected. It is a figure which showed an example of the variation display mode of the display variation pattern. It is a figure which showed the timing chart for each background mode when the fluctuation pattern which set the addition time is selected. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a normal hit random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of ROM in the main control device, and (c) is a schematic diagram. , Is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM in the main control device. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 variation pattern selection table which is a part of the variation pattern selection table. It is the figure which showed the list of the fluctuation pattern command and addition command output from the main control device of a pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variation pattern selection table B, which is a part of the variation pattern selection table, and (b) is a part of the variation pattern selection table. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern selection table B. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variation pattern selection table A, which is a part of the variation pattern selection table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variation pattern selection table B, which is a part of the variation pattern selection table, and (b) is a part of the variation pattern selection table. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern selection table C. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hold effect selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the look-ahead effect lottery table, (c) to (d). ) Is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the look-ahead effect selection table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the advance notice selection table A, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the advance notice selection table C. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the touch notice selection table, and (b) is a diagram listing the settings of the changeover switch. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table for notice schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the electric accessory opening process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the time setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern reception process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the hold effect selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control process. It is a flowchart which showed the hold quantity transfer process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the holding ball number command reception process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command reception process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the look-ahead effect selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the synchronous effect management process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the effect change process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the hold quantity display update process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the sensor input process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing the advance notice effect display process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the mode switching process executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. It is a flowchart which showed the addition command processing executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) to (b) are schematic views schematically showing the opening display mode of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. (A) is a case where the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment is won for a long time of the normal symbol, and the game ball wins the second starting port with the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 being 0. It is a timing chart which showed an example until the special symbol 2 becomes the fluctuation start when the special symbol 1 is changing (the remaining fluctuation time is 3 seconds or more), and (b) is the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. This is a timing chart of a display mode showing an example of a state in which the special symbol 1 does not fluctuate when a game ball wins a prize at the second starting port by winning a normal symbol for a long time. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table of the general drawing opening effect of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command reception process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device of the pachinko machine in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the general drawing opening process executed by MPU in the display control device of a pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM in the main control device of the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment, and (b) is the main control device of the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 5C is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM in the above, and FIG. 3C is a normal variation pattern selection table A (mode 1) which is a part of the variation pattern selection table of the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example schematically, (d) is a schematic example of a normal variation pattern selection table B (mode 2) which is a part of the variation pattern selection table of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation start processing 2 executed by MPU in the main control device of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a timing timing chart showing an example in which the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol notified by the rainbow-colored reserved symbol of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment is the preparation period, and (b) is a timing timing chart. It is a timing chart which showed an example of the case where the variation period of the special symbol notified by the rainbow-colored reserved symbol of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment extends from the preparation period to the time production period. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the advance notice selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command receiving process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the opening process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the synchronous effect management process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the effect change process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the special symbol 1 variation pattern selection table which is a part of the variation pattern selection table of the pachinko machine in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the list of the fluctuation pattern command and addition command output from the main control device of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment as an example. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine according to the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the display control device of the pachinko machine according to the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern command processing 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the addition command processing 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of an RTC connected to a voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine according to a sixth embodiment. (B) is a conceptual diagram of a structure in which the setting switch of the pachinko machine according to the sixth embodiment is operated by a changeover motor. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the time setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 7th Embodiment. (A) to (c) are schematic views schematically showing a display mode of a notice of fish school charge using the touch sensor of the pachinko machine and the touch sensor on the board side in the seventh embodiment. (A) to (b) are schematic views schematically showing a display mode of a card notice, which is a notice effect using the frame-side touch sensor 290 and the board-side touch sensor of the pachinko machine according to the seventh embodiment. is there. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of the contents of RAM in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 7th Embodiment schematically. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the sensor input process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the sensor effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the sensor selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special operation process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 15) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 and a touch sensor 290 are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17.

The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the background mode of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or changing the content of the advance notice effect. To. Further, in the touch sensor 290, for example, the display content of the dedicated effect using the touch sensor 290 displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later is based on the operation of the player's touch sensor 290. Be changed. Further, the frame button 22 and the touch sensor 290 may be configured to be used as a switch for driving a driving accessory or the like provided in the game machine, for example. The frame button 22 and the touch sensor 290 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 9A. However, the touch switch 290 is arranged closer to the front side of the game machine than the frame button 22. Normally, when the player presses (operates) the frame button 22, the touch switches are arranged at positions where the player's hand can react.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and the inside of the operation handle 51 permits the driving of the ball launch unit 112a. A touch sensor 51a for this purpose, a push-button type stop switch 51b that stops the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. The starting port 64a, the second starting port 64b, the electric accessory 64c, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the through hole of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with wood screws or the like. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 15) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery for special symbol 1 (first symbol) is performed when the ball enters the first starting port 64a, and special symbol 2 (when the ball enters the second starting port 64b). A lottery for the first symbol) is performed, and when the ball passes through the through gate 67, a lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 (hereinafter, the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is referred to as a special symbol) performed for entering the ball into the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, it is special. Whether or not the symbol is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the jackpot type is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls are won. ) It is released, and the opening is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal case. There are two types of jackpots for special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B". After the end of the special game state, as added value after the end of the jackpot, the game according to these jackpot types Value (game value) is given to the player.

Further, when the special symbol 1 (first symbol) or the special symbol 2 (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable display of the special symbol for a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds). After a lapse of ~ 30 seconds, etc.), a special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first starting port 64a while the special symbol is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is entered is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is the first. It is shown by the symbol display device 37 and also shown by the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, when a ball enters the second starting port 64b while the special symbol is changing, the number of times the ball enters is held up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is shown on the first symbol display device 37. Both are also shown for the third symbol display device 81. The number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is shown on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in an identifiable display mode, respectively. As will be described in detail later, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to make it easier for the player to identify the number of reserved balls, the variation display mode of the special symbol, the determination result, etc. than the first symbol display device 37. Usually, the player is configured to play the game by looking at the display mode of the third symbol display device 81.

When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the lottery is performed. The variable display according to is started. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 64b is prioritized over the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 64a, and the lottery for the special symbol 2 is performed. , The variable display according to the lottery is started. Therefore, the lottery for the reserved ball of the first starting port 64a is executed when the reserved ball does not exist in the second starting port 64b. While the change of the special symbol 2 is being executed, the change of the special symbol 1 is not executed. That is, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are configured so that there is no period during which they fluctuate at the same time.

In the present embodiment, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 do not change at the same time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may be configured to change at the same time. With this configuration, a lottery for more games can be executed in a short time, and the determination result can be displayed, so that the games can be played more time-efficiently.

Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the second starting port 64b is in an open state in which the game ball can be guided to the ball entry port on both sides of the ball entry port into which the game ball enters, and the ball entry into the ball entry port. It has an electric accessory 64c provided with a blade member that can rotate in a closed state that regulates. The electric accessory 64c is operated from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time based on the winning (winning) of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) described later. In addition, normally, the game ball is held in an upright state so as to prevent the game ball from entering from both sides of the ball entry port, and the game ball is prevented from entering between the blade members. , The first starting port 64a is arranged. Therefore, the second starting port 64b is normally configured to be able to enter the ball only when the electric accessory 64c is operated in the open state. Therefore, normally, the game ball is easily inserted into the first starting port 64a, and the player launches the game ball to enter the game ball into the first starting port 64a to play the game. It will be a thing.

The special winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, is provided immediately below the second starting opening 64b. Therefore, during the special gaming state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win a prize in the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls also enter the first starting opening 64a. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first starting port 64a becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the through gate 67, whether or not the ordinary symbol is a hit is determined. There are two types of hits for normal symbols: normal hits and long-time hits in which the opening time and the number of times of opening are increased, respectively, as compared with the normal hits. When the normal symbol hits normally or for a long time, the electric accessory attached to the second starting port 64b is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 2 seconds), and the second starting port 64b is opened. It becomes easy for the ball to enter the ball. That is, when it hits a normal symbol, the ball easily enters the second starting port 64b, and as a result, a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the through gate 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. At the same time, it is also shown in the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the through gate 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display according to the lottery is started. To.

As described above, there are two types of jackpots of the special symbol, "big hit A" and "big hit B". In both cases of "big hit A" and "big hit B", the number of rounds is 16 rounds in a special gaming state (16R big hit). After that, in the case of "big hit A", as an added value after the big hit ends, the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the special symbol from the end of the big hit to the start of the big hit game of the next special symbol ( Move to (during probabilistic change of special design). On the other hand, in "Big hit B", the winning probability of the normal symbol increases from the end of the big hit to the end of the lottery of the special symbol 100 times. Even in the high probability state, the hit probability of the normal symbol is similarly increased and set.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, the probability state of the so-called special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol), in other words, the special game state (16R jackpot). ) Is a state of the game that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, the case where it is not the "high probability state of the special symbol" is called the "low probability state of the special symbol", which means that the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is the normal state. (Normal state or low probability game state of special symbol). In addition, the "normal symbol time saving state" (normal symbol time saving medium or time saving game state) is a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and the ball can easily enter the second starting port 64b. To say. On the other hand, the time when it is not "the time saving state of the normal symbol" is called "the normal state of the normal symbol" (normal game state), and this is the state where the hit probability of the normal symbol is the normal state, that is, the hit probability is lower than during the time saving. Indicates that. Hereinafter, the period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot of the special symbol is referred to as the probability variation period of the special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot type is "big hit A", the period from the end of the "big hit A" to the start of the next jackpot is set as the probability variation period, but the number of times (for example, 20) is not limited to this. The period during which the lottery of special symbols (such as times or 100 times) is executed may be set as the probability variation period. Further, both "big hit A" and "big hit B" may be set so as to have a predetermined number of times and a probability variation period. Further, the probability variation period may be a probability variation period for a predetermined time (2 minutes, 5 minutes, etc.).

In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the "low probability state of the special symbol". After that, when the special symbol becomes a big hit, it shifts to the "high probability state of the special symbol" and also shifts to the "time saving state of the normal symbol".

In addition, while the "high probability state of the special symbol" is continued, if the special symbol becomes a big hit and the jackpot type is "big hit A", the "high probability state of the special symbol" is further changed. It will continue from the end of the big hit of the new special symbol to the start of the next big hit game.

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a determine whether or not the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 performed in association with the entry into the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (starting prize) is being executed, depending on the lighting state. The variation is displayed by showing, or the special symbol 1 (first symbol) or the special symbol 2 (first symbol) according to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by the lighting state as the stop symbol after the fluctuation ends. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the balls that have entered the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, is indicated by the lighting state.

The sphere enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b while the special symbol 1 (first symbol) or the special symbol 2 (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37. When a ball is hit, the number of times the ball is entered is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the balls entering the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of holding times is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot). A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to B) is shown.

The special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are assigned separate dedicated LEDs 37a for displaying the symbol and displaying the number of reserved balls, respectively. With this configuration, the player can more easily distinguish between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (starting prize), a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the entering opening in the first symbol display device 37 is triggered by the ball. The variable display of the symbol) is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle, and right are used. The column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of the main symbols of the numbers "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 15) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A", the variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the odd numbers "1, 3, 4, 7, 9" are aligned and stopped. Further, in the case of "big hit B", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are aligned.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the upper two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The lower 1/3 is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The substantially center of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the jackpot symbols are aligned on the effective line L1 (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols), the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed among the balls entered in the first starting port 64a, and the small area Ds2 is. The small area Ds3 is an area for displaying the advance notice effect image, and the small area Ds3 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed among the balls that have entered the second starting port 64b. Is.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. In the case of variable display, in addition to the main symbols displayed in the center, the main symbols arranged before and after the main symbols are visibly displayed, so that a total of nine main symbols are displayed at the maximum. In some cases. In the sub-display area Ds, doors, characters, characters, etc. are displayed in the small area Ds2 in the center, and it is suggested to the player that the transition to a big hit is easier than usual, and that a normal symbol hit, etc. .. By lowering the transparency of the main symbol displayed on the effective line L1 and increasing the transparency of the other main symbols displayed, the player can easily recognize the effective line. it can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, in the sub-display area Ds, the display mode of the reserved ball based on entering the first starting port 64a displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3. It is displayed in a different display mode from the display mode of the holding ball of the second starting port 64b displayed on the above. Specifically, one "○" is displayed for one holding ball of the first starting port 64a, and when there are two holding balls, two "○" are displayed side by side. To Similarly, "○" is displayed side by side according to the number of reserved balls. On the other hand, for the reserved ball of the second starting port 64b, "Δ" is displayed for one reserved ball, except for the reserved ball that has been entered for a long time with a normal symbol. When a ball enters the second starting port 64b during a long period of time with a normal symbol, one "★" is displayed for each reserved ball, as shown in FIG. 6A.

As a result, the reserved balls of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, that is, the reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, can be displayed in an easy-to-identify manner. In addition, since the display mode of the reserved ball that has entered the second starting port 64b is displayed differently depending on the hit type of the normal symbol, the player can easily determine that the reserved ball has occurred in a long time. be able to.

In the present embodiment, in the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the above-mentioned main symbol, reserved symbol, etc., character display, advance notice display of characters, etc., and total The display of the number of fluctuations is displayed as appropriate. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small areas Ds1 and Ds3, it means that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first starting port 64a is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1 or the small area Ds3, the number of reserved balls is displayed as a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the amount. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8, the second starting port 64b is entered in the notification display mode of the normal symbol per long time performed in the third symbol display device 81 and the long time hit of the normal symbol. A notice display mode executed for the reserved ball that has been balled will be described. First, FIG. 5A is a diagram showing a display mode foretelling that the electric accessory 64c will be released by hitting a normal symbol for a long time. Here, the lottery result of the changing ordinary symbol is determined, and when the lottery result is a long-time hit, it is displayed in the small display area Ds2 in FIG. 5 (b) 3 seconds before the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed. The door of the door design is slid in the opening direction (horizontal direction of the display area), and as shown in FIG. 5A, the design of the winning opening imitating the shape of the second starting port 64b is displayed.

After that, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the electric accessory of the winning opening displayed in the small area Ds2 is activated at the timing when the electric accessory 64c is released, as shown in FIG. 5 (b). The symbol in the open state is displayed, and the player is notified that the electric accessory 64c is in the open state. Further, as shown in FIG. 5A, when the door symbol of the small area Ds2 is displayed to be opened, the dolphin symbol is displayed in the upper left of the small area Ds3.

The dolphin symbol displays the characters "opening" in a balloon in accordance with the opening timing of the electric accessory 64c (the stop display timing of the normal symbol) to notify that the electric accessory 64c is in the open state. Will be done. In this way, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a long time different from the normal hit, the third symbol display device 81 is notified in advance before the stop display is displayed, so that the normal symbol is notified in advance for a long time. , It is possible to prevent the player from missing the opportunity to open the electric accessory 64c.
Here, if the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 is four, which is the maximum number, and the special symbol has a long fluctuation display such as reach on the third symbol display device 81, the player can display it. Even if the game ball is launched and the ball enters the first starting port 64a, it becomes an invalid ball that does not become a reserved ball. Therefore, the launch of the game ball is stopped and the reserved ball is digested. There are many cases where the game is played after waiting for. In such a case, even if the ball is started to be launched based on the fact that the electric accessory 64c is in the open state for a long time by winning the normal symbol for a long time, the game is played to the second starting port 64b. It is difficult to put the ball in, and it is not possible to put the ball in the second starting port 64b by effectively using the opening time of the electric accessory 64c.

However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, it is notified in advance that the electric accessory 64c will be in the open state before a predetermined time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) when the electric accessory 64c is opened due to a long hit. The player can play the game by preventing the player from missing the opportunity to put the ball into the second starting port 64b.

Next, FIG. 6A shows a special case in which a ball enters the second starting port 64b when the electric accessory 64c is operated in the open state based on a long-time hit of a normal symbol. This is a display mode showing a state in which four holding balls are set in the symbol 2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the holding symbol of the holding ball established by entering the second starting port 64b in the open state of the electric accessory 64c per long time is "a holding symbol of the holding ball". ★ ”is displayed. When there are four holding balls, four "★" s are displayed side by side as shown in FIG. 6A.

Next, in FIG. 6B, the electric accessory 64c shifts from the open state to the closed state, a lottery is executed for one reserved ball for the special symbol 2, and the variable display of the special symbol 2 starts. It is a figure which showed the state which was done. For the reserved ball that is established by entering the electric accessory 64c due to a long hit of the normal symbol, the dolphin displayed in the small area Ds3 executes a notice display by a balloon at each start of fluctuation. In FIG. 6A, when one of the four reserved balls starts to fluctuate, a “?” Is displayed by a balloon. This "?" Is not included (all are out of order) than when the lottery that starts to fluctuate and the reserved balls of the special symbol 2 include those for which the winning / failing judgment result is a hit. , It is set so that it can be easily selected (see FIG. 24 (a) for details later), and informs the player that the probability of hitting is low.

Next, FIG. 7 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode when the reserved ball is further digested from the state of FIG. 6 (b) and the variable display of the special symbol 2 is started. In FIG. 7A, when the change of the special symbol 2 starts, the character “chance?” Is displayed to notify the player of the notice display related to the winning / failing determination result. The notice display of "chance?" Is set so that it is easier to select than the case where the hit / fail judgment result (including the one whose fluctuation has started and the hit / miss judgment result of the reserved ball of the special symbol 2) is out of order. As a result, the player can predict the result of the winning / failing determination in advance.

Next, FIG. 7 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which one reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is further digested from the reserved number of FIG. 7 (a) and the variable display of the special symbol 2 is started. FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a case where the dolphin displays a notice of "chance !!" with a balloon at the start of the variable display of the special symbol 2. The notice display of "chance !!" is set so that it is easier to select when the hit / fail judgment result (including the one whose fluctuation has started and the hit / fail judgment result of the reserved ball of the special symbol 2) is a hit, than in the case of a miss. (See FIG. 24 (a)). As a result, the player can predict the result of the winning / failing determination in advance.

Next, FIG. 8 shows a case where one reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is further digested from the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 shown in FIG. 7 (b) and the variable display of the special symbol 2 is started. It is a figure which showed the display mode of. In FIG. 8, when the change of the special symbol 2 starts, the characters “Great chance !!” are displayed to notify the player of the notice display related to the result of the hit / fail determination of the changing special symbol 2. This "great chance !!" notice display is set so that it is easier to select when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the changing special symbol 2 is a hit than when it is a miss (see FIG. 24 (a)). .. As a result, the player can play the game with the expectation that the winning / failing determination result of the changing special symbol 2 will be a big hit.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern selected in the variation display of the special symbol 2 in the normal game state always reaches when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 0. The fluctuation pattern is configured to be selected regardless of the result of the hit / fail judgment. That is, when the electric accessory 64c is opened, a plurality of balls enter the second starting port 64b, and then the fluctuation starts in order based on the long-time hit of the normal symbol, all the balls enter. Even if the lottery result of the drawn ball is wrong, the fluctuation pattern to be the reach is always selected in the fluctuation display of the last reserved ball.

Further, in the case of fluctuation of the reserved ball due to the operation of the electric accessory 64c due to the operation of the electric accessory 64c for a long time, the notice display related to the hit / fail judgment result is continuously displayed every time when the fluctuation starts. Configured. Further, as the number of consecutive times increases, it is easy to select a notice display that makes it expected that the winning / failing judgment result is a big hit. Therefore, the player usually hits the symbol for a long time. 2 The lottery executed when the ball is entered into the starting port 64b can be made to feel easier to win than the lottery executed by winning the first starting opening 64a at normal times. Furthermore, in the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 that occurs per long time, the variation pattern that becomes the reach is always selected in the final fluctuation (lottery executed when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is 0). Therefore, even if the lottery result is out of order, the player's expectation for a big hit can be increased. Therefore, the player can expect the variable display of the special symbol 2 triggered by a long-time hit as a special variable display, and can play the game with a higher expectation that the normal symbol will be a long-time hit. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5B, at the timing when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed with the stop symbol indicating a long-term hit, the dolphin's notice display displayed in the small area Ds3 is " It is configured to display the characters "Opening", but it is not limited to this, and the normal symbol stops about the time it takes for the player to launch the game ball and reach the second starting port 64b. It may be configured to be displayed before it is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to make the second starting port 64b win a prize by effectively utilizing the long-time hit.

In addition, the notification may be made about 2 seconds earlier than the arrival time of the game ball. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect that is advantageous to the player while protecting the interests of the game store.

Next, the positional relationship between the touch sensor 290 and the frame button 22 will be described with reference to FIG. 9A. As shown in FIG. 9A, the touch sensors 290 are provided side by side in front of the frame button 22. The touch sensor 290 has a built-in reflective photo sensor, and a cover member whose output portion from which the LED of the photo sensor is output is made of a transparent black resin member is attached. It is arranged on the surface of the pachinko machine 10. In this touch sensor 290, when a player brings his / her hand or the like close to the output unit of the photo sensor to a predetermined interval and blocks the light of the LED, the light of the LED is reflected and input to the input unit of the photo sensor. By doing so, it is configured to detect. The photo sensor 290 is electrically connected to the input / output port of the voice lamp control device 113, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can determine whether the touch sensor 290 is on. There is. The touch sensor 290 is an operation means that can be operated by the player in order to change the effect content displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the frame button 22.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11A to 11B, the player continuously detects the touch sensor 290 and changes (stores) the indicator. The more the indicator can be changed to a larger scale, the more likely it is that a jackpot will be given to the player.

Further, since the touch sensor 290 is provided on the player side of the frame button 22, the touch sensor 290 is configured to easily detect and turn on even when the player presses the frame button 22. .. Therefore, the touch sensor 290 can be turned on even when the frame button 22 is pressed.

Next, FIG. 9B shows the total number of fluctuations since the power was turned on when the player displays the standby screen (demo screen) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a display example when it is displayed on 81. In this way, the player can check how much the game is being played.

Next, FIG. 9C is a diagram showing a setting switch 291 provided on the back side (see FIG. 3) of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 3, the setting switch 291 is provided below the RAM erasing switch 122 so as to be exposed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9C, the setting switch 291 is composed of a dip type changeover switch. It is configured so that the input can be switched by rotating it, and it is possible to switch from setting "1" to setting "4". A display window for confirming the setting is provided on the outer cover so that the set value can be confirmed, and the set value can be visually recognized from the display window by rotating the setting switch 291. As shown in FIG. 15, the setting switch 291 is electrically connected so that a setting signal is input to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, each setting is arranged so that it switches when it is rotated every 90 degrees, and a lock mechanism is provided which locks lightly so that it is harder to rotate than other regions when it is rotated to each set value. ..

Note that FIG. 26B shows the control contents set by each setting of the changeover switch 291. If the setting is 1, the effect using the RTC292 is effectively set, and the display of the total number of fluctuations shown in FIG. 9B is effectively set. Similarly, setting 2 is set so that RTC292 is invalid and the display of the total number of fluctuations is displayed, setting 3 is set so that RTC292 is valid and the total number of fluctuations is hidden, and setting 4 is set so that RTC292 is invalid. , The display of the total number of fluctuations is set to non-display.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10, the time effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 10A is a timing chart showing a period during which the time effect is executed from the power-on of the pachinko machine 10 to the power-off in the second embodiment. In the present embodiment, an RTC (real-time clock) 292 for time measurement, which will be described later, is provided in the voice lamp control device 113, and it is possible to measure the time after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. Has been done.

When 54 minutes (period A in FIG. 10A) elapses from the power-on, a preparation period (period B in FIG. 10A) for executing the time effect of 1 minute thereafter is set. After that, the time effect period (the period C in FIG. 10A) in which the time effect is executed is set. Here, when the preparation period is set, as shown in FIG. 10B, a background image in which the characters "Soon, super fish school time starts" is set, and the time production is started soon for the player. Notification indicating that is executed. Further, the variation time of the special symbol selected in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state) is 30 seconds at the longest, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 22, and the variation pattern executed before the preparation period ends. It is configured to do.

Further, although the details will be described later, as shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 22 (a), "super reach" is not set for the fluctuation pattern that starts to fluctuate during the preparation period, and a notice is given. The display mode is also not displayed. In the time production period, when the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit, a special school of fish that notifies that the big hit is confirmed is more easily displayed than in the normal time, and a super reach or a notice display is displayed during the preparation period. By configuring so that it is not displayed, it is possible to enhance the freshness of the notice display during the time production period.

After one minute, which is the preparation period, has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 10 (c), a background image displaying the characters "during super fish school time" indicating that the time production period is in progress is displayed as the third symbol. It is displayed on the device 81. In the background image of this time production period, an image of a plurality of small fish swimming is displayed so that the player can be given an impression different from the normal time. Then, when the time production period of 5 minutes elapses, the background image is changed to the normal background image (background image corresponding to the mode selected before the preparation period), and a lottery of special symbols is continuously executed. Will be done. After that, when 54 minutes have passed, the preparation period is set again, and then the time production period is set. In this way, it is repeatedly executed at the same time interval.

If the jackpot game is started before the preparation period, or if the jackpot game is started during the preparation period, the period corresponding to the time after the jackpot game is completed (periods A to C). Is set. In that period, for example, if the jackpot game is started during the preparation period and the jackpot game ends for the remaining 1 minute of the time production period, the time production for 1 minute is executed.

With this configuration, the power cable is connected to the power supply outlet in the hall while the power switch (not shown) of the pachinko machine 10 is kept on. The other pachinko machine 10 of the same type is also connected to the power supply outlet in the same manner. Then, by providing a switch such as a breaker capable of switching whether or not to supply electricity to the power supply outlet, the power can be turned on to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 at the same time.

Therefore, by simultaneously turning on the power to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the present embodiment, the timing at which the time effect is executed can be matched by the plurality of pachinko machines 10. Further, in the present embodiment, before the time production period is set, the preparation period composed of a time longer than the longest fluctuation time of the special symbol is set, so that the start of the time production period can be started. Can be matched.

In the present embodiment, the timing at which the preparation period and the time production period are executed is set as described above, but the timing is not limited to this and may be set as appropriate. In addition, a lottery for whether or not to execute the time effect on each pachinko machine 10 is executed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and only the pachinko machine 10 that wins the lottery executes the time effect. You may. Further, it may be configured so that the player can select whether or not to execute the time effect by operating the frame button 22 or the like at the timing when the time effect is executed, during standby, or the like.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11, a notice effect display using the touch sensor 290 will be described. FIG. 11A is a diagram showing a state in which a notice effect display using the touch sensor 290 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the special symbol is fluctuating. When this notice effect display is determined and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is reduced to the upper right side of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the notice effect display using the touch sensor 290 displays an indicator as shown in FIG. 11A. Before reacting (detecting) the touch sensor 290, the indicator is displayed with a scale "0", and "charging with the touch sensor" indicating to the player that the touch sensor 290 reacts and raises (charges) the scale of the indicator. The characters "!!" are displayed. Then, when the player holds his / her hand over the touch sensor 290 (touches the touch sensor 290) and turns the touch sensor 290 on (reacted state), the scale of the indicator is raised. There is. FIG. 11A shows a state in which the indicator is raised to the scale “1”. FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a state in which the indicator is raised to the scale “2”.

In this embodiment, although the details will be described later, the change of the indicator that operates based on the touch sensor 290 being turned on is determined in advance by lottery. The lottery of the indicator is executed based on the result of determining whether or not the special symbol that starts to fluctuate, the fluctuation pattern, and the value of the effect count 223k. It is configured so that a larger scale is more easily set when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a hit than when the result is a hit. Further, when the selected fluctuation pattern is a “super reach” fluctuation pattern, a scale larger than that in the case of “normal reach” is easily selected. In the present embodiment, the notice effect display using the touch sensor 290 is not selected for "short-time disconnection" and "long-term disconnection" in which the fluctuation pattern does not reach.

With this configuration, when the notice effect display using the touch sensor 290 is displayed at the start of the change of the special symbol, the player identifies that the change that has started the change display is the reach display mode. Next, the photo sensor 290 can be activated, and the game can be enjoyed to see how far the scale of the indicator goes up. When the scale of the indicator is raised to the large scale, the player can increase the expectation for the big hit and can enjoy the game more.

FIG. 11 (c) shows the lower right (small area Ds3) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated a predetermined number of times (10 times in this embodiment) during the variable display of the special symbol. A notice effect display (special notice display) that imitates a placard is displayed. In this way, by displaying the advance notice effect based on the specific operation of the player, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored during the game. This notice display is a notice display set in the process of S1913 of the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 59, S1307) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

An example of the variable display mode of the background mode A and the background mode B displayed by the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 13. FIG. 12A is a diagram showing a state in which the reach display mode is set when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is selected and the background mode A is selected. FIG. 12B shows a display mode on the third symbol display device 81 when the same fluctuation pattern as in FIG. 12A is selected and the background mode B is selected at the same timing. It is a figure. In this way, even when the same fluctuation pattern is selected, the displayed contents differ due to the different selected background modes, and the timing of display in the reach display mode also differs. .. In the background mode B shown in FIG. 12B, the pseudo symbol configured in the same manner as the main symbol is stopped and displayed, and the actual main symbol is reduced to the lower right of the third symbol display device 81. It is displayed in a variable manner. With this configuration, in the background mode B, it is possible to recognize that the display is stopped in a display mode indicating the deviation. After that, as shown in FIG. 13A, in the background mode A, an effect display as to whether or not to develop into a special reach is executed. On the other hand, in the background mode B, as shown in FIG. 13 (b), the pseudo symbol imitating the main symbol starts to fluctuate again and is displayed in a fluctuating manner, and the actual main symbol is on the right as shown in FIG. It is reduced to the bottom and displayed in a variable manner.

Next, FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a timing chart of the variation display mode in each background mode shown in FIGS. 12 to 13 described above. According to the background mode selected by the player with the frame button 22, the variation display of the special symbol is started based on the variation start timing. The timing of the start of fluctuation is the same regardless of whether the background mode A is selected or the background mode B is selected.

In this embodiment, although details will be described later, when the variation pattern (variation time) is determined from the variation pattern selection table, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection table. In addition to the type, a fluctuation pattern command indicating a fixed time and an addition command indicating an addition time in which the time specified in the fluctuation pattern is added are output to the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the command output from the main control device 110 for determining the fluctuation pattern is composed of two commands, a fluctuation pattern command and an addition command indicating the addition time. It should be noted that the total of the fixed time and the addition time indicated by the fluctuation pattern is configured to be the fluctuation time determined by the lottery. The MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can select an effect with a high degree of freedom by this addition command.

As shown in FIG. 14, after the fluctuation starts, the fluctuation display set at a fixed time is executed. In the case of this example, the fixed time is set to 8000 ms, and is composed of the same time as the fluctuation time of a short time deviation. Therefore, based on this fixed time, the voice lamp control device 113 fluctuates with respect to the display control device 114 in the background mode A in the same manner as the short-time deviation, and then the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row. Stop display is performed in a reach display mode in which Z3 is stopped and displayed with the same symbol (see FIG. 12A). On the other hand, in the background mode B, after displaying the same fluctuation as the short-time off, a pseudo symbol similar to the main symbol is displayed, and the stop symbol indicating the deviation in the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed, and the actual main symbol is displayed. The design is reduced and displayed in the small area Ds3 (see FIG. 12B). The SW valid period, which is the period during which the background mode can be changed, is also set to 4000 ms in the same manner as the short-time deviation.

The MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is indicated by an addition command received from the main control device 110 when the SW valid period has elapsed and the background mode cannot be changed by the player. Based on the addition time, the effect after the lapse of the fixed time is determined based on the selected background mode, and the display command is output to the display control device 114. In the example shown in FIG. 79, in the background mode A, an effect for notifying the player whether or not to develop into the super reach shown in FIG. 13A is displayed after the lapse of the fixed time.

On the other hand, when the background mode B is selected, after the fixed time elapses, the pseudo symbol starts to fluctuate, and the fluctuation display similar to the short-time deviation is executed. It should be noted that the actual main symbol continues to be variablely displayed at high speed in a state of being reduced to the small area Ds3. After that, while the fluctuation display (fluctuation time) similar to the short-time deviation is displayed again, specifically, while the fluctuation is at high speed, the pseudo symbol is replaced with the actual main symbol, and the main symbol is replaced. Is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating reach display. After that, the background mode A and the background mode B execute the same super reach display mode at the same timing.

In this way, in a configuration in which a player can enjoy different variable displays by selecting a plurality of background modes in one variable display of a special symbol, a plurality of effects are reproduced and used as a background. In a configuration in which playback processing is executed from that timing based on switching by changing the mode or switching the background mode, a problem occurs in which the control load of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 increases. .. However, as in the present embodiment, by configuring the command for selecting the fluctuation pattern with a command indicating a fixed time and a command indicating an addition time, a similar special symbol is obtained based on the command indicating the fixed time. By controlling to execute the variable display (only the variable display over time and the background are different) and determining the effect based on the command indicating the addition time when the period during which the background mode can be changed has elapsed, The control process for determining only one effect is sufficient, and the control load can be reduced. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 does not need to calculate the remaining fluctuation time and determine the effect, etc., and can reduce the load required for control.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 fluctuates by indicating whether or not the lottery of ordinary symbols performed as the ball passes through the through gate 67 is being executed by the lighting state, and stops after the fluctuation ends. As a symbol, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, a variable display that alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the second symbol is displayed. Will be done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 64c attached to the second starting port 64b operates for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in a state (opened), and as a result, a ball can easily enter the second starting port 64b. The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 described above and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol holding lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, as in the case of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and the ball passes through the through gate 67 three times or less, or five times or more. The number of times (for example, 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first starting port 64a and a second starting port 64b through which a ball can enter are arranged. When a ball enters the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b, the first ball entry switch and the second ball entry switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 are turned on. Due to the turning on of the first ball entry switch and the second ball entry switch, the main control device 110 draws a lottery for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, and the display according to the lottery result is the first symbol display device 37. It is indicated by LED37a of. Further, the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls when the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b are entered is the same, but the number of prize balls may be different. For example, when the ball enters the first starting port 64a, the number of prize balls for the second starting port 64b is set as three prize balls, and when the ball enters the second starting port 64b, the number of prize balls is set as four prize balls. It may be set more than the number of prize balls for one starting port 64a. With this configuration, more prize balls can be given to the player when the normal symbol is hit for a long time, and the value of the normal symbol for a long time can be further increased. Therefore, the player can play the game with expectation other than the big hit of the special symbol, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game. In addition, the player can obtain more prize balls during the time reduction and the probability change period, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player's balls are extremely reduced during the time reduction and the probability change period.

On the other hand, when the prize balls of the second start port 64b are set smaller than those of the first start port 64a, it is possible to design so that more game balls are won in the second start port 64b during the probability variation period and the time reduction. Therefore, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 can be maintained at a larger number, and an efficient game can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the game time during the probabilistic change period during the time reduction, and it is possible to increase the sales on the game store side.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the second starting opening 64b, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (16 rounds of jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are temporarily formed. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening port provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 15) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 15). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 16, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like can be used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, in order to select the special hit random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol. The special hit type counter C2 to be used, the initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the fluctuation pattern are used. Further, the ordinary hit random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 42). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a composed of four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas) for storing the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 and a reserved ball of the special symbol 2. The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of the four reserved areas (holding 1st to 4th areas) is provided, and the special symbol holding ball execution area common to the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is provided. It is provided. In each area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the values of the special hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the first starting port 64a. Similarly, in each area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, similar values are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the second starting port 64b.

Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and the balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The special hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), reaches the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return. In particular, when the special hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1.

Further, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the special hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 42).

The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the RAM 203 reaches the timing when the ball wins the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b. It is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the special symbol jackpot random number counter C1 is the special symbol. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special symbol) with a higher probability of becoming a jackpot of a special symbol than the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (the period during which it is in a high probability state), and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the high probability of the special symbol and the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the low probability of the special symbol are in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided in.

The special hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). , The maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99) is reached and then returns to 0. The value of the special hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol 1 hold ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first start port 64a. It is stored in the storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the display corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. The mode is that of a big hit with a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In the present embodiment, two types of jackpots, "big hit A" and "big hit B", are set, and one of "big hit A" and "big hit B" is set by the special hit type counter C2. It is determined. Then, the display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

The special hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this special hit random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that serve as jackpots for special symbols when the probability of special symbols is low, and the random number values "7,107,282" are special symbol jackpots for low probability. It is stored in the random number table. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 3 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/100".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a special symbol, there are 30 random numbers that are big hits for the special symbol, and the values are "4,11,28,38,45,52,64,78,83,99,106, 112,122,134,140,151,168,176,183,197,207,218,222,231,249,256,263,270,285,299 "is a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. It is stored in. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that become the jackpot is 30 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol becoming the jackpot is "1/10".

In this embodiment, a random number value that is a jackpot stored in a special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability and a random number value that is a jackpot stored in a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. So, the random number values that are the jackpots for each are set so that the values do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random value for the jackpot regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random number value may be input from the outside and the jackpot may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random value that becomes the jackpot is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in the special hit type counter C2 set in the jackpot type selection table (not shown), when the random number value is "0 to 59", the jackpot type is "big hit A". Further, when the value is "60 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B".

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special hit type counter C2. From the value (random number value) of the special hit type counter C2, the random number value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot type table (not shown), and this table is mainly used. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the control device 110.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 17B), which stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, is the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided inside.

In the variation pattern selection table 202b, variation pattern selection tables for selecting a variation pattern dedicated to the special symbol 1 are set for each game state (normal game state, time-saving game state, probability variation game state). Although the selection of the fluctuation pattern in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described in more detail later, the main control device 110 is based on the hit / fail determination result, the number of reserved balls, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Then, the content of the rough fluctuation pattern (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and the fluctuation time are determined, and the fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined content is set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 18 to 22, the main controller 110 selects a variation pattern, and in the voice lamp control device 113, a detailed variation pattern is generated based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110. The mechanism to be decided will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 18 to 22, a variation pattern selection table for determining the variation pattern between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is set in the variation pattern selection table 222a of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, respectively. Has been done. In the present embodiment, the variable pattern selection table selected in the normal gaming state is shown, but it is also set in the time-saving gaming state and the probabilistic gaming state, respectively.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the time after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 is measured by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the timekeeping data measured by the RTC 292, and is normally 54 minutes. When the production period (mode A) is set and the normal production period elapses, a 1-minute preparation period (mode B) is set, and after the preparation period, a 5-minute time production period (mode C) is set. To. Details of each of these periods will be described later, but depending on the set period, even if the variation pattern command from the main controller 110 is the same, the variation pattern selected will differ depending on the period. Set. Here, even if different effects are set, the effect is composed of the variation time indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the variation time of each effect, the result of determining whether the result is correct, or the rough variation. The contents (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) are configured to be the same. With this configuration, the main control device 110 does not need to determine individual fluctuation patterns, and control addition can be reduced. Further, the amount of data in the variation pattern selection table stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 can also be suppressed.

A special figure 1 variation pattern selection table, which is a part of the variation pattern selection table 202b, will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, each fluctuation pattern is set based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 according to the hit / fail determination result of the special symbol 1 at the start of fluctuation and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 at the start of fluctuation. It is configured to be selected. Here, as the fluctuation pattern to be determined, the rough type and fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern are determined. Various types of "normal reach" and "super reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns selected when the hit / fail judgment result common to "big hit A" and "big hit B" is a big hit. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is assigned to each fluctuation pattern, and if the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. If the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 regardless of the value of the number of reserved pieces. Here, when the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the fluctuation pattern that becomes "super reach" is set to be easier to select than "normal reach". Therefore, when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, the fluctuation pattern of "super reach" is executed and the frequency of becoming a big hit increases, and the player hits the jackpot when the fluctuation pattern of "super reach" is selected. Easy to have expectations.

In the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern A, which is the jackpot fluctuation pattern of the "normal reach", the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed for a predetermined time through the reach display mode in which the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed with the same symbol. After the variable display, the variable display mode is stopped and displayed with the same symbol as the main symbol of the reach display mode. The fluctuation pattern of the jackpot of "normal reach" is composed of a relatively short fluctuation time as compared with the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot of "super reach" described later.

The super reach jackpot fluctuation patterns A to C, which are the jackpot fluctuation patterns of the "super reach", are displayed in the reach display mode as in the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern A, and then the characters and the like are displayed to display the reach display mode. The effect of whether or not the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed is executed with the same symbol as the symbol displayed in. The "super reach" fluctuation pattern is composed of a relatively longer fluctuation time than the "normal reach" fluctuation pattern.

Next, as the fluctuation pattern selected when the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol 1 is wrong, the fluctuation pattern for the miss is "short-time off (for short-time)" and "long-time off (for short-time)". ) ”,“ Normal reach off ”, and“ Super reach off ”are stipulated. The short-time deviation fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern of "short-time deviation", is composed of a fluctuation time (800 ms) shorter than other fluctuation patterns, and is not displayed in the reach display mode, but is a main symbol for a predetermined time. After the variable display, the display mode in which the main symbol is stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2 is executed. The long-term deviation fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern of "long-time deviation", is composed of a fluctuation time (12000 ms) longer than that of the short-time deviation fluctuation pattern. The normal reach deviation variation pattern, which is a variation pattern of "normal reach deviation", has a different display mode in which the middle symbol row Z2 is finally stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the symbol of the reach display mode with respect to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern. It is a display mode which shows that the constructed lottery result is out of order. This normal reach deviation variation pattern is configured to be easier to select than the super reach deviation variation pattern, which will be described later, when the hit / fail determination result is incorrect. Further, the super reach deviation variation pattern, which is “super reach deviation”, is a different display mode in that it is finally displayed in a display mode indicating the deviation with respect to various super reach jackpot fluctuation patterns.

If the result of determining whether the special symbol 1 is correct or not is incorrect, the variation pattern selected depending on whether the number of reserved special symbols 1 at the start of the variation is 0 to 2 or 3 to 4. The fluctuation type counter CS1 is assigned to each fluctuation pattern so that the ratio of

When the number of holdings is 0 to 2, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is not assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "short-time deviation" and is not selected. As a result, when the number of holdings is 0 to 2, the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern becomes relatively long, and during that time, it becomes easy to insert the game ball into the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a period in which the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (a period in which the lottery for the game is not executed) occurs.

Further, when the number of reserved items is 3 to 4, a large proportion of the variation pattern of "short-time deviation" is set. As a result, when the number of reserved balls is close to the upper limit of 3 to 4, a short fluctuation pattern is easily selected, so that even if the ball enters the first starting port 64a, the number of invalid balls is equal to or greater than the number of reserved balls. It is possible to suppress the problem of becoming.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12B, the special figure 2 variation pattern selection table A selected when the variation of the special symbol 2 is started in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state) will be described. When the hit / fail determination result is a big hit, it is configured in the same manner as the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table (see FIG. 18).

On the other hand, when the hit / fail judgment result is incorrect, each fluctuation pattern is divided into a case where the number of holdings of the special symbol 2 is 0 and a case where the number of holdings is 1 to 4, and each fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation type counter. It is allocated and set according to the value of CS1. When the number of holdings is 0, only the variation pattern that becomes the reach is set. Therefore, when the number of holdings of the special symbol 2 is 0, when the special symbol 2 starts to change, the reach is always set. The fluctuation pattern is configured to be selected. As a result, when the ball wins the second starting port 64b in a long-time hit or a normal hit, a variation pattern that reaches even if the number of holdings is 0 is selected. Therefore, the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 is likely to result in reach, and the player can play the game with the expectation of a big hit rather than the fluctuation of the special symbol 1.

Further, in a long time hit, a plurality of balls are likely to win a prize, and a reserved ball is likely to be generated, and a special notice display effect is executed for each change of the reserved ball. Then, in the final fluctuation of the reserved ball, the fluctuation pattern that becomes the reach is always selected, so that it is possible to provide the player with a more fresh effect.

On the other hand, when the number of pending items is 1 to 4, if the hit / fail judgment result is incorrect, only the variation pattern of short-time deviation and long-term deviation is set, and the variation pattern to reach is set. It has not been. With this configuration, the effect of whether or not the fluctuation when the number of reserved pieces becomes 0 is a big hit is performed during the display of the fluctuation pattern which starts to fluctuate when the number of reserved pieces is 1 to 4. It is possible to make multiple fluctuations appear to the player as related effects. In addition, despite the fact that the fluctuation is out of the ordinary, it is possible to have expectations for a big hit against the previous fluctuation.

FIG. 12C shows a special figure 2 variation pattern selection table B for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol 2 during the time saving or high probability gaming state (during probability variation).

The normal hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239), the counter returns to 0. Further, when the normal hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. At that time, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 17 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is set. If it matches the value of the random number to be the hit set by the normal hit random number table 202c, it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol. Further, the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 17A) has a probability of hitting a normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability (a period during which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and when the probability is low. It is divided into two types, one for high probability time (the period during which the time is shortened for a normal symbol), and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. Further, the hit type of the normal symbol is set to normal hit and long-time hit, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is set for each.

Here, in the normal game state (low probability game state) for the normal hit of the normal symbol, and in the big hit game state, the operation in which the electric accessory 64c is operated in the open state with an open time of 0.2 seconds is executed once. It is a hit to be done. Further, during the time saving and the probability variation period, the operation of operating the electric accessory 64c in the open state with the opening time of 2 seconds is repeated twice. On the other hand, the long-time hit is a hit in which the operation of operating the electric accessory 64c in the open state with an open time of 2 seconds is repeated twice regardless of the gaming state.

In the present embodiment, the opening operation of the electric accessory 64c, which is executed in the probabilistic period during the short time in the normal hit, and the opening operation in the long-time hit are set to be the same, but the opening operation is not limited to this, and the long-time hit is different. It may be an opening operation of. Specifically, for example, the operation of being in the open state may be performed once for 3 seconds. With this configuration, it is possible to allow the ball to enter the second starting port 64b more when hit for a long time, and it is possible to facilitate the execution of the variable display with the special symbol 2 during the normal game. It is possible to entertain the player with the change of the game production by the variable display of the special symbol 2 in which the fresh notice display and the like are displayed.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17A, if the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is any of 5 to 20 at the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the normal hit of the normal symbol is achieved. Is determined to be. Further, if it is any of 21 to 28, it is determined that it is a long-time hit of a normal symbol. On the other hand, when the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is any of 5 to 204 at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, it is determined that the normal symbol is a normal hit. In addition, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the long-time hit of the normal symbol is not set, but when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the opening operation of the electric accessory 64c is the same as the long-time hit. The hit is virtually the same as the long hit.

By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol. Therefore, when the probability is low, the frequency with which the electric accessory 64c is operated can be reduced, and the frequency with which the ball enters the second starting port 64b can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the profit of the game store side by increasing the consumption of the game ball of the player by mainly entering the ball into the first starting port 64a. On the other hand, during the time reduction and the probability variation period, which have a high probability, the opportunity for the electric accessory 64c to operate can be given with a probability of "1 / 1.2", which increases the chance of entering the second starting port 64b. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the game ball of the player and set the game state advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can play the game aiming at the game with a high probability, and can play the game for a longer time.

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. It runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the winning symbol is won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) The symbol "○" is lit and displayed. Then, if the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is "5 to 20", the second starting port 64b is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" as a normal hit. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the second starting port 64b is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times". Further, if the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is "21 to 28", the second starting port 64b is opened only "2 seconds x 2 times" as a long-time hit.

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 17A) for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Run for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning symbol is won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second starting port 64b is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and the release period of the second starting port 64b is further reduced. Is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", so that the ball can easily enter the second starting port 64b. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second starting port 64b is opened only "2 seconds x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but the opening time And the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32). , It is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 42).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 15, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 16, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 42) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 41) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 27) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 17C, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number. It has a counter 203d, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, an opening number counter 203h, a long-time opening flag 203i, a time-saving / medium-time counter 203j, and another memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the special symbol 1 and four hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area), and each of these areas is special. Each value of the hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64a (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. Judgment such as lottery of special symbols is performed based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 which is shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having the smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored. Further, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the special symbol 2.

The ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A random number counter C4 is normally stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through either the left or right through gate 67, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ) Is vacant, and the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes vacant. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a, the winning prizes stored in the other hold areas The shift process is performed to pack the data into the holding area that is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d displays fluctuations (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry of balls into the first starting port 64a (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to 4 times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first starting port 64a and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 It is added (see S404 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 33).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (holding number N of the variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 33 and S405 in FIG. 35). .. The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts the reserved balls based on winning the second starting port 64b, and the other configurations are the same as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. A detailed description will be omitted.

The voice lamp control device 113 holds the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the balls in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 ( See S704 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 38).

When the sphere passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings M of the fluctuation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4. Is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (Fig.). 39 S703: No).

The opening number counter 203g is a counter for counting the opening times of the electric punctuation marks 64c.

The opening time counter 203h is a counter for counting the opening time of the electric punctuation mark 64c.

The long-time open flag 203i is a flag indicating that the product is hit for a long time. This long-time open flag 203i is set to ON in the process of S629 executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Although not shown, it is usually set to off based on the end of long-term hitting of the symbol. Specifically, in the process of S1105 of the electric accessory opening process (FIG. 43, S1005) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the release number counter 203 g is set to off when it is determined to be 0. ..

The time saving medium counter 203j is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving counter 203j is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110 and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Will be done. That is, when a special symbol becomes a big hit, a new value is set according to the big hit type regardless of the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including switch groups and sensor groups (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 27) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content of the above, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 23A, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a variation pattern selection table 222a, a hold effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 24A), and a look-ahead effect lottery table 222c (FIG. 24 (c)). ), Look-ahead effect selection table 222d (see FIGS. 24 (c) to (d)), notice selection table 222e (see FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (b)), touch notice selection table (see FIG. 26 (a)). ) Is stored. Further, as shown in FIG. 23 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and a variable start. Flag 223d, Stop type selection flag 223e, Winning information storage area 223f, Normal winning information storage area 223g, Sub long-time open flag 223h, Opening effect flag 223i, Hold effect counter 223j, Effect counter 223k, Time effect execution flag 223m, Setting Time storage area 223n, preparation period flag 223o, start period flag 223p, SW effective time counter 223q, sensor effective time counter 223r, touch counter 223s, background mode storage area 223t, fluctuation number counter 223u, SW number counter 223v, effect mode storage At least an area 223w, an addition command storage area 223x, an addition command reception flag 223y, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 47) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. It controls the production). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 27).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by 1. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged consecutively on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the interest of the player.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation for.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting it, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be enabled in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 61) executed after the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 61) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the NAND flash memory 234a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 31) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 63 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for reading the data can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, since it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to the 235e and the error message image area 235f, at least the variable image area 235b and the third symbol area 235d when the power is turned on are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first starting port 64a is detected. In this case, it is an area for storing image data corresponding to the fluctuating image at power-on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the fluctuating effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see FIG. 61).

Here, the fluctuation image when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (not shown). 3 Display on the symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position when facing the screen and the fluctuation image of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. Medium, alternate and repeat display. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image showing it is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image showing it is stopped. It will be displayed for a certain period later.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, if the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the fluctuating image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images showing "○" and "×" are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If an entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Returning to FIG. 27, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b, the change effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, but the change is caused in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the production is not started immediately.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first framebuffer 236b and the second framebuffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table and display data in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

Further, since the first starting port 64a is a winning port in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is opened as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball becomes the second starting port. The easier it is to enter 64b, the more prize balls. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 plays a game, the number of balls held is difficult to decrease, or the number of balls held is not reduced. Therefore, the player is in a state where the number of balls held is difficult to decrease, or the number of balls held is reduced. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a big hit of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a boy image and a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Information on effects and characters is defined as one or more according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table.

When it is specified that the MPU 231 displays one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (underwater, beach, background of preparation period, background dedicated to time production) depending on this back type, the player of the background The back image corresponding to the specified stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. During that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 28). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 31) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 30). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data meaning (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 30).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

In addition, in "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 30, in the example of FIG. 30). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 31) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 30, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Null data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is displayed. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before being used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display an image at power-on (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) on the third symbol display device 81 (not shown). The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 61) (see S2005 in FIG. 61). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S3505 in FIG. 71 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. 63 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 63 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 63B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 63 (b), see S2309). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command is determined so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 37 to 41) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 69 to 70 (b)) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3401 in FIG. 71 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 71 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 72) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 31), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of instructions for drawing an image are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 31), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 31) described later that describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 63 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S3105 in FIG. 70B) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 31) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 31, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and various image controllers 237 are used. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing by the method specified by that information according to filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image and the warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 creates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 63 (b). ) Is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3107 in FIG. 69). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S2002 in FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 72) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3517 in FIG. 72). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3518 in FIG. 72). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 73).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, displays the image on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 63 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see S3602 in FIG. 73).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 32 to 43. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated to RAM203. Store in the corresponding buffer area of.

Further, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values become the maximum values (299, 99, 239, respectively in this embodiment). When it reaches, it clears to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C2 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then a special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with the winning of the first starting port 64a (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 33 to 36.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the sphere at the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through-gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 37 and 39. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (S201: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e (the number of hold counts N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 ( S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation is set. (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After the process of S207 is executed, the process of S213 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203d is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is acquired. (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d acquired in the process of S208 is 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is set to 1. Subtract (S210), and set the hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation (S211). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After the hold ball number command is set by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S213). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time is determined. If (S214: No) has not elapsed, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 34. When this special symbol change start process is executed, it is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area commonly provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , A lottery of special symbols will be held. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the special hit random number counter C1, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it is a big hit according to the value of the special hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be A or jackpot B.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The LED display is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S216). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S216: Yes), it is determined what type of jackpot is among the two types of jackpots of special symbols (big hit A, jackpot B) (S217), and the jackpot type. If is a jackpot B, 100 is set in the time reduction / medium counter 203j of the RAM 203 (S218). After that, the process of S220 is executed. If the jackpot type is jackpot A, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability of the probability variation period (S219). Then, the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S220), and this process ends.

In the process of S216, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 1 or more (S221), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 1. If the above is the case (S221: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S222), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is 0 (S221: No), the processing of S222 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

Next, a special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 33) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), and includes the special symbol retention 1 retaining ball storage area 203a. Special symbol 2 Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common with the reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (win / fail judgment) for "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing (S213), first, each of the special hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Get the value (S301).

Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is currently in the probability variation period (high probability gaming state) (S302). It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not it is the probability variation period is executed by determining whether or not the probability variation flag (not shown) is on. This probability variation flag is set to on based on the end of the jackpot game based on jackpot A. On the other hand, it is set to off based on the start of the jackpot game.

If it is determined that the probabilistic change is in progress (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol, so the process proceeds to the process of S303. In the processing of S303, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability (S303). ). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 30 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. As described above, as the random number value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol, "4,11,28,38,45,52,64,78,83,99,106,112,122,134,140,151,168" , 176,183,197,207,218,222,231,249,256,263,270,285,299 "are set, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and these hits are set. If it matches the random number value, it is determined that it is a big hit of a special symbol. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (S302: No), the process of S304 is executed. In the processing of S304, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability (S304). ). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random number value of 3 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. Three random numbers "7,107,282" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and when the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number values to be hits match, Judged as a big hit of a special symbol. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In the processing of S305, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes), based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and the jackpots of the two types of special symbols (big hit A, jackpot). Among B), it is determined what kind of jackpot is. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 59", it is determined that the jackpot is A (16R jackpot, the probability variation period until the next jackpot after the jackpot game), and "60 to 99". If it is within the range of ", it is determined that the jackpot is B (16R jackpot, 100 times in a short time period of a normal symbol).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

In the fluctuation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the fluctuation time of the third symbol for notifying the hit / fail determination result, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the fluctuation time. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content (fluctuation pattern) of the variation display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the fluctuation time and the result of the hit / fail determination. The main control device 110 is configured so that even if the display mode is the off-reach, the voice lamp control device 113 can switch between the reach display mode and the non-reach display mode within the same fluctuation time. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and the production can be diversified.

For example, as the fluctuation pattern for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", and "disengagement special reach" are defined. ing. As the fluctuation pattern shared by jackpot A and jackpot B, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off-symbol, and is stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. The fluctuation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S308, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is confirmed based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. To determine.

Next, the addition command set in the variation pattern selection table 202b is set corresponding to the selected variation pattern (S310). As shown in FIG. 82, this addition command is determined based on the hit / fail determination result, the number of reserved balls, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As shown in FIG. 19, the addition command comprises a variable time composed of a fixed time and an addition time, and indicates the addition time. In the present embodiment, for the fluctuation pattern that becomes super reach, the fixed time is configured by the fluctuation time similar to the short-time deviation, and the addition time is configured by the time other than the fixed time. With this configuration, in the fixed time, the fluctuation time until the reach display mode is reached can be set with the same fluctuation time as the short-time deviation, and the addition command can be used for the display of characters, etc. that become the super reach from the reach display mode. Can be set based on. Therefore, since the display can be set separately for the fluctuation display mode having a long fluctuation time, the control load at the start of the fluctuation can be reduced.

Next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S311). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S312). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 42). To. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S312 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 64a, and if there is a starting winning, This is a process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and for executing the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the various held random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first starting port 64a (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first starting port 64a is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the sphere has won the first starting port 64a (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d (the number of reserved variability displays N1 in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first starting port 64a (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first starting port 64a, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first starting port 64a (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N) of the number counter 203d is added by 1 (S404). Then, the reserved ball number command of the special symbol 1 indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the special symbol of the RAM 203. 1 The reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, with respect to S407 to S413, for each of the processes S401 to S406 described above, the process for winning the first start port 64a is only changed to the process for winning the second start port 64b. Since the same processing is executed, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. When a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 64b, even if it is stored as a reserved ball, the values of the special hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 are acquired, and the corresponding special symbol 2 is obtained. It is stored in the empty hold area of the hold ball storage area 203b.

In this way, by acquiring each value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 similar to the special symbol 1 for the special symbol 2 based on the entry into the second starting port 64b, it is special. Since the lottery can be executed using a common random number for the symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, the winning probability can be made constant for both the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

After executing the process of S413, the look-ahead process is executed (S414). The details of the look-ahead process (S414) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 36, but are based on the values of various counters acquired for entering the ball into the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. Then, a process of determining in advance the result of each lottery executed at the start of fluctuation is executed.

In the present embodiment, the value of each counter is configured to be selected based on the incoming ball, but it may be configured to be selected at the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, the storage area for storing the value of each counter is not required until the start of fluctuation, and the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 can be suppressed. Further, among the counters, some counters (for example, only the fluctuation type counter CS1) may be configured to be acquired at the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, the counter related to the hit / miss judgment can be acquired at the time of entering the ball, and the counter not related to the hit / miss judgment can be obtained later, and the amount of data to be stored can be stored while maintaining the fairness of the game. It can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a look-ahead process (S414), which is one process in the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S414).

In the look-ahead processing (FIG. 36, S414), first, the hit / fail determination at the start of fluctuation is determined based on the acquired value of the special hit random number counter C1 (S421). The hit / fail judgment at the start of fluctuation indicates whether the gaming state at the start of fluctuation is the normal gaming state (low probability) or the probabilistic gaming state (high probability gaming state). 203a, special symbol 2 The value of each counter stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is variable and displayed, and the value is determined by the hit / fail judgment and the hit type.

In the process of S422, it is determined whether or not the determination result executed in the process of S421 is a hit (S422). When it is determined that the determination result is a hit (S422: Yes), it is determined whether the hit type is the jackpot A or based on the special hit type counter C2 (S423). When it is determined that the hit type is jackpot A (S423: Yes), a winning command indicating jackpot A is set (S424). On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot B (S423: No), a winning command indicating that the jackpot is B is set (S425). Further, in the process of S422, when it is determined that the result of the determined hit / fail determination is incorrect (S422: No), the incorrect winning command is set (S426).

In this way, the result of the hit / fail determination in advance before the start of fluctuation is output as a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the reserved ball is established, so that the voice lamp control device 113 can be used. The hit / fail judgment result and the hit type can be recognized in advance. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 may change the color of the reserved symbol to a color that notifies the winning / failing judgment result in advance based on the winning command to notify the player of the winning / failing judgment result for the reserved ball. , An effect such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the hit / fail determination result in the reserved ball) can be executed. Further, since one winning command is output for the reserved ball each time the reserved ball is established, the voice lamp control device 113 can also recognize the establishment of the reserved ball.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the electric motor attached to the second starting port 64b. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory 64c.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c attached to the second starting port 64b is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. Includes monaka. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, the normal symbol variation start process is executed (S608), and this process is terminated. The normal symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S609). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S637 or the process of S638 of FIG. 38 before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S609, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S609: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S609, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S609: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S610). In the processing of S610, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of S627 or S631 of FIG. 38, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is displayed as the second symbol. It is set so that the stop display (lighting display) is displayed in the device 83. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S635 of FIG. 38, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). When the stop display is set by the process of S610, the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 42) is executed next. After completion, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S627, the process of S631 or the process of S635 of FIG. 38.

Next, when the variable display being executed by the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result of the normal symbol (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process a hit of the normal symbol? Is determined (S611). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S611: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64c attached to the second starting port 64b is set (S612), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64c is set by the process of S612, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 42) is executed, the electric accessory 64c The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S630 or the process of S634 of FIG. 38 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S611, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S611: No), the process of S612 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol variation start processing (S608) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation start processing (S608). This normal symbol variation start process (S608) sets the setting at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol executed in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 37) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32). It is a process to be executed.

It is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit (S621). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (S621: Yes), the process proceeds to S624.

In the process of S621, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S621: No), it is determined whether or not it is in the probability change or the time reduction (S622). If there is neither a probability change nor a time saving (S622: No), the process proceeds to S624.

If the probability change or the time reduction is in progress (S622: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time reduction state of the normal symbol. Based on the value of the random number counter C4 and the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 17 (a)) for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S623). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 17A) for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 17 (a)).

In the processing of S624, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 of FIG. Based on the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 17 (a)) for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S624). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 17A) for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 20", it is determined that it is a normal hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "21 to 28", it is the normal symbol. It is determined that the hit is for a long time, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 17 (a)).

In the present embodiment, the lottery of ordinary symbols is less likely to be won during the jackpot of special symbols. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory 64c attached to the second starting opening 64b is opened. This is to prevent the ball trying to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the second starting opening 64b as much as possible. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the second starting opening 64b, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the second starting opening 64b during the jackpot of the special symbol, the second starting opening Many balls enter 64b. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the second starting port 64b becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S623 or S624 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S625), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S625: Yes). , It is determined whether the type of hit of the normal symbol is a long-time hit (S626). When it is determined that the hit type of the normal symbol is a long-time hit (S626: Yes), the display mode for the long-time hit is set (S627). In the process of S627, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). Next, a long-time hit start command is set (S627), and the long-time release flag 203i is turned on (S629). Then, the process proceeds to S630.

When it is determined in the process of S626 that the type of hit of the normal symbol is normal hit (S626: No), the display mode at the time of normal hit is set (S631). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability change or the time is shortened (S632).

Then, if the probability change or the time is shortened (S632: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit of the special symbol (S633). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S633: Yes), the process proceeds to S634. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the second starting port 64b as much as possible, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is off. , The number of times the electric accessory 64c is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S633, unless the special symbol is a big hit (S633: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 64c attached to the second starting port 64b is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 2. Then (S630), the process proceeds to S636. In the process of S630, 2 is set in the opening number counter 203g, and a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the opening time counter 203h.

In the process of S632, if there is neither a probability change nor a time saving (S632: No), the process proceeds to the process of S634. In the processing of S632, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 64c attached to the second starting port 64b is set to 0. . Set to 2 seconds, set the number of times of opening to 1 (S634), and shift to the process of S636. In the process of S634, 1 is set in the opening number counter 203g, and a value corresponding to 0.2 seconds is set in the opening time counter 203h.

In the process of S625, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S625: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S635). In the process of S635, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S636.

In the process of S636, it is determined whether or not the probability change is in progress (S636), and if the probability change is in progress (S636: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S637). , End this process. On the other hand, if the process of S636 is not in the process of probabilistic change (S636: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S638), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the release period of the second starting port 64b is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", the ball can easily enter the second starting port 64b.

In the present embodiment, the opening time and the number of times of opening in a long time are set to the same operation as in the case of hitting a normal symbol in the probabilistic state and the short time state, but the operation is not limited to this, and different opening times and the number of times of opening It may be configured to be set.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and if the ball has passed, a random number per normal hit. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the counter C4.

In the through-gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the through-gate 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the sphere at the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

If the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S701: No), or if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S703). : No), the process proceeds to S706. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f The value (M) is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area (S705), and the process proceeds to S706. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

In the processing of S706, based on the acquired value of the random number counter C4, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is correct or not at the start of fluctuation (S706), and the process proceeds to S707. In the process of S707, it is determined whether or not the hit / fail determination result of the normal symbol is a hit (S707).

When it is determined in the process of S707 that the hit / fail determination result of the normal symbol is a hit (S707: Yes), it is determined whether the hit type of the hit / fail determination result of the normal symbol is a long-time hit (S708). When it is determined that the hit type of the hit / fail judgment result of the normal symbol is a long-time hit (S708: Yes), a long-time hit general figure winning command is set (S709), and this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S708 that the hit type of the hit / fail determination result of the normal symbol is a normal hit (S708: No), the hit normal figure winning command is set (S710).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S707 that the result of the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol is out of order (S707: No), the out-of-order general figure winning command is set (S711), and this process is terminated.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S913. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is shifted to S913 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S913 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 42, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 are correctly saved.

In the process of S913, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S913). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S914, S915) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S914, S915) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S914, S915) is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S914, S915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S915). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S911.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), a status command is transmitted based on the long-time open flag 203i (S908). Next, the power outage occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S909). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of shutting off the drive power is transmitted (S910), and the process proceeds to S911. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S911, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S912), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command to do. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 33) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 35) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the starting winning processing and the look-ahead processing (see FIG. 36) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 64c attached to the second starting port 64b is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64c is set by the process of S612 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 37), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S630 or the processing of S634 in FIG. 38 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed. The details of the electric accessory opening / closing process (S1005) will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 34), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed on the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 34) ends, the first symbol display device The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 34) after ending the variation display executed in 37. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S637 or the process of S638 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 38), the variation display is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the “◯” symbol and the “x” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S610 of the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 37), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S627 or the process of S631 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 38) after ending the variable display. (Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001, and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009: No), the initial time is reached within the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process. The value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special hit random number counter C1). (Initial value of, initial value of random number counter C4 per ordinary) can be updated randomly, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

Further, in the process of S1008, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 40 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1014), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process (S1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this electric accessory opening process (S1005). This electric accessory opening process (S1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42), and the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64c is set by the process of S612 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 37). In this case, it is a process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 64c.

In the electric accessory opening process, first, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 64c is being opened (S1101). When it is determined that the electric accessory 64c is being opened (S1101: Yes), it is determined whether or not the closing timing of the electric accessory 64c is based on whether or not the opening time counter 203h is 0 (S1102). When it is determined that the closing timing of the electric accessory 64c is determined (S1102: Yes), the closing of the electric accessory 64c is set (S1103), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S1102 that the closing timing of the electric accessory 64c is not (S1102: No), the opening time counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S1104), and this process is terminated. As a result, 1 can be deducted at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), so that the time can be accurately measured from the value set in the process of S1109.

When it is determined in the process of S1101 that the electric accessory 64c is not being opened (S1101: No), it is determined whether the opening count counter 203g is larger than 1 (S1105). When the number of times of opening counter 203g is 0 (S1105: No), this process ends. When the opening count counter 203g is larger than 1 (S1105: Yes), it is determined whether or not the opening timing of the electric accessory 64c is set (S1106). When it is determined that the opening timing of the electric accessory 64c is not reached (S1106: No), this process ends.

When it is determined in the process of S1106 that it is the opening timing of the electric accessory 64c (S1106: Yes), the opening number counter 203 g is subtracted by 1 (S1107), and the release of the electric accessory 64c is set (S1108). A value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the open time counter 203h (S1109), and this process ends.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 60, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1318 (see FIG. 46) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 46, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power off command from the main control device 110 (see S1315 in FIG. 46), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power off process of S1318. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1318 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1202: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1318. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1318 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the data shifts to S1208.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1202: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process in S1318, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1206). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

In the process of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1318 is executed (see S1317 in FIG. 46). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1318 is executed, the process of S1208 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1318 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1211) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the process of S1208 is reached with the power off flag turned off because the start-up process of this time was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off, so that the process of S1208 via the processes of S1204 to S1206 was started. This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1209, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1211), the process proceeds to the main process. After that, it is determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1212). In addition, this state command indicates whether or not the normal symbol is hit for a long time based on the long-time open flag 203i in the process of S908 of the start-up process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. It is a command. If it is determined in the process of S1212 that the status command has been received (S1212: Yes), the sub-long-time release flag 223h is set based on the received status command (S1213). Here, when the received state command indicates that it is hit for a long time, the sub long-time open flag 223h is turned on, and when it is shown that it is not a long-time hit, the sub long-time open flag Set 223h to off.

In this way, when the power is turned on, the main control device 110 outputs a command that can determine whether or not the normal symbol has been hit for a long time, so that the voice lamp control device 113 also determines the state. Can be done.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1209 is that when the processing of S1208 is reached via the processing of S1204 to S1206, the processing of S1204 has already cleared all the storage areas of the RAM 223. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

In the process of S1214, the time setting process is executed (S1214). The time setting process (S1214) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 45.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a time setting process (S1214), which is one of the start-up processes (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this time setting process (S1214). In the time setting process (FIG. 45, S1214), the setting of the setting switch 291 is determined to determine whether or not to execute the time effect, and if the setting is to execute the time effect, the time information is acquired from the RTC292. Then, based on the time information, the process of setting the preparation period and the time production period in the set time storage area 223n is executed.

In the time setting process (FIG. 45, S1214), first, it is determined whether the setting of the setting switch 291 is the setting "1" or the setting "3" (S1221). When it is determined that the setting of the setting switch 291 is not the setting "1" or the setting "3" (S1221: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting of the setting switch 291 is the setting "1" or the setting "3" (S1221: Yes), the time information is acquired from the RTC292 (S1222).
As the time information acquired here, the values of "hours and minutes" are acquired. The RTC292 is a timekeeping means having a battery inside, and when the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the same current time is initially set in the pachinko machine 10 by a predetermined jig. The capacity of the internal battery is about three and a half years of operating time. In addition, the RTC292 also has a calendar function, and has a configuration in which the "date" can be determined. Therefore, for example, on Christmas day, it is possible to change the background image for Christmas and to control the display of a special character such as Santa.

It is determined whether the acquired time information is within the deadline data (S1223). Here, the deadline data is set to 3 years within 3 and a half years, which is the capacity of the internal battery of the RTC292 in the present embodiment. A date three years after the date set in advance at the time of manufacturing is set as the deadline data, and when it is determined that the date is after that date, the time effect setting is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a problem that the start timing of the time production cannot be synchronized between the pachinko machines 10 due to a time delay or the like due to insufficient battery capacity or the like.

In the present embodiment, it is determined whether the date is three years after the date set in advance at the time of manufacture, and the time effect execution flag 223 m, which will be described later, is set to be turned on. The voltage value of the battery supplying power to the RTC292 is determined, and when the voltage value is equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage (for example, 3.3V or higher), the time effect execution flag 223m is set to ON. May be good. Here, it is desirable to set the RTC292 to a voltage value or higher that allows normal operation.

In the process of S1223, when it is determined that the acquired time information is out of the deadline data, that is, three years or more have passed (S1223: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired time information is within the deadline data, that is, within 3 years (S1223: Yes), the time effect execution flag 223m is set to ON (S1224). Based on the acquired time information, the preparation period and the time production period are calculated and set in the set time storage area 223n (S1225).

In the present embodiment, the preparation period and the time production period for 24 hours are calculated based on the acquired time information and set in the set time storage area 223n, but the present invention is not limited to this, and first, the normal 54 minutes for executing the game may be set in, the period may be measured by countdown or countup, and the preparation period may be set based on the elapse of 54 minutes. In addition to that, the time after 54 minutes may be set, and the time for the next period may be set when the time is reached. With this configuration, the required capacity of the storage area can be reduced. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be configured at a lower cost.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1301 this time was executed (S1301), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1310. In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1302 to S1310 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1311, the variation display setting process of S1312, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1311 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1312 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1314 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process shifts to the process of S1305 without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. The details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307) will be described later with reference to FIG. 59.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to the process of S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1311, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1311). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47. After the process of this command determination process (FIG. 47, S1311) is executed, the variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 54.

When the process of S1312 is completed, the look-ahead effect selection process is executed (S1313). The details of this look-ahead effect selection process (S1313) will be described later with reference to FIG. 55. After executing the look-ahead effect processing (S1313), the process of the synchronous effect management process (S1314) is executed. The details of this synchronous effect management process (S1314) will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

When the processing of S1314 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1315). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1315 (S1315: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1317), and the power-off process is executed (S1318). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1319), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. It also erases the memory of information on the occurrence of power failure.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1315: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1316), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1316: No), the process returns to the process of S1301 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1316: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1311). This command determination process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. ..

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S1401). When the variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the variation pattern reception process is executed (S1402). After that, this process ends.

Here, the details of this variation pattern reception process (S1402) will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation pattern reception process.

In the variation pattern reception process (S1402), first, the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1421), and the variation pattern selection process is executed (S1422). In this variation pattern selection process (S1422), a process of selecting a variation pattern or a notice effect is executed based on the set effect mode.

Here, the fluctuation pattern selection process (S1422) will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process (S1422). In the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 49, S1422), first, the value of the effect counter 223k is acquired (S1431). It is determined whether or not the effect mode set in the effect mode storage area 223w is the effect mode A (S1432). When it is determined that the effect mode A is set (S1432: Yes), the hit / fail determination result, the number of pending items, and the variation type counter CS1 are displayed from the variation pattern selection table A (FIG. 18 or 21) of the corresponding special symbol. A variation pattern is selected and set based on the value (S1433). After that, the advance notice effect display is selected and set from the advance notice selection table A (see FIG. 25 (a)) based on the result of the hit / miss determination result and the value of the effect counter 223k (S1434). It is selected and set from the touch notice selection table 222f (see FIG. 26A) (S1435).

On the other hand, in the process of S1432, when it is determined that the effect mode A is not set (S1432: No), it is determined whether the effect mode B is set (S1436). When it is determined that the effect mode B is set (S1436: Yes), the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table B (see FIG. 20A or FIG. 22A) of the corresponding special symbol. And set (S1437).

On the other hand, in the process of S1436, when it is determined that the effect mode B is not set, that is, the effect mode C is set (S1436: No), the variation pattern selection table C of the corresponding special symbol (FIG. 20 (b) or FIG. 22 (b)) to select and set a fluctuation pattern (S1438). The notice effect display is selected and set from the notice selection table C (S1439). The notice effect display is selected and set from the touch notice selection table 222f (see FIG. 26A) (S1440).

In this way, it is possible to switch and configure the selected fluctuation pattern based on the set effect mode. Further, the selected variation pattern is the same as the variation time specified by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 by the variation pattern command and the hit / fail determination result, and the content of the effect display and the reach display mode displayed in the variation time. (Normal reach, super reach, or a type thereof) is changed and selected by the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the hit / fail judgment result related to the profit of the player and the fluctuation time related to the gambling are not changed according to those determined by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and therefore, according to the predetermined design value of the pachinko machine 10. You can play pachinko games.

In addition, the advance notice effect is also determined based on the result of the hit / fail judgment at the start of the change, the content of the change pattern (normal reach, super reach, etc.), and the value of the effect counter 223k, so the timing of the display start is determined and selected. There is no need for processing, and the control load can be reduced. Further, in the present embodiment, the timing for displaying the notice is predetermined according to the fluctuation pattern, and by setting the display notice display command indicating the timing, the display control device 114 displays at that timing. Is set to be done.

Here, the description will be continued by returning to FIG. 48. After the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 49, S1422) is executed, the hold effect selection process is executed (S1423). In the hold effect selection process (S1423), a process of setting a notice effect to be displayed for the start of fluctuation of the hold ball that has won the second start port 64b for a long time is executed.

Here, the hold effect selection process (S1423) will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this hold effect selection process (S1423).

In the hold effect lottery process (FIG. 50, S1423), first, it is determined whether the value of the hold effect counter 223j is larger than 0 (S1451). When it is determined that the value of the hold effect counter 223j is 0 or less (S1451: No), is the hold ball that starts to fluctuate the change start of the hold ball for which the release effect flag 223i is set to ON? Determine (S1452). When it is determined that the holding ball with the opening effect flag 223i set to on has started to fluctuate (S1452: Yes), the holding ball corresponding to the number of holding balls with the opening effect flag 223i set to on is held. The value of the effect counter 223j is set (S1453). Here, the opening effect flag 223i is set so that the reserved ball established by opening the electric accessory 64c and entering the second starting port 64b can be discriminated based on the long-time hit of the normal symbol. It is a flag to be set to on corresponding to the reserved ball. In the process of S1453, for example, if the number of reserved balls for which the open effect flag 223i is set to be ON is 3, the value of the hold effect counter 223j is set to 3. On the other hand, in the process of S1452, when it is determined that the opening effect flag 223i is the start of fluctuation of the reserved ball set to off (S1452: No), this process is terminated.

When it is determined in the process of S1451 that the value of the hold effect counter 223j is larger than 0 (S1451: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223k is acquired (S1454). Based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223k, the advance notice effect display mode corresponding to the value of the hold effect counter 223j is selected and set from the hold effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 24A) (S1455).

Here, as shown in FIG. 24A, the hold effect selection table 222b shows the hold effect according to the result of the hit / fail determination of the start of fluctuation or the result of the hit / miss determination of the hold ball in which the open effect flag 223i is set to ON. Corresponding to the value of the counter 223j, each notice effect display is set by the value of the effect counter 223k. Therefore, each advance notice effect display mode is determined based on the result of the hit / fail determination, the value of the effect counter 223k, and the value of the hold effect counter 223j.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 21), even when the hit / fail judgment result is wrong, when the number of reserved balls is 0, it is always necessary. Since the fluctuation pattern of "out of reach" is set to be selected, if the hold effect counter 223j is "1" indicating the case where there are 0 hold balls, a notice display mode such as "great chance" is displayed. Is configured to be easier to select than when the value of the hold effect counter 223j is "2-4", and is configured to give the player more expectations for a big hit.

Therefore, when the player enters the second starting port 64b due to a long hit, a continuous effect is executed between the reserved balls, and the reach display mode is always set in the final fluctuation. The game can be played with a higher expectation of a big hit than the lottery for entering the first starting port 64a (lottery for entering the first starting port 64a in the normal gaming state). Therefore, the player can play the game with a higher expectation of the occurrence of a long time hit, and can prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

When the process of S1455 is executed, a display notice display command instructing the third symbol display device 81 to display the notice effect display set in the process of S1455 is set (generated) (S1456). After that, the value of the hold effect counter 223j is subtracted by 1 (S1457), and this process ends.

Here, the description will be continued by returning to FIG. 48. After the hold effect selection process (FIG. 50, S1423) is executed, the hold quantity transfer process is executed (S1424). In the hold quantity transfer process (S1424), if the special symbol 2 is displayed in a variable manner, it is indicated that the hold ball is established based on the opening of the electric accessory 64c based on the long-time hit of the normal symbol. For the reserved ball for which the open effect flag 223i is set to on, the process of shifting the open effect flag 223i to the area indicating the number of the previous hold is executed.

Next, the reserved quantity transfer process (S1424) will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the hold quantity transfer process (S1424). In the hold quantity transfer process (FIG. 51, S1424), first, it is determined whether or not it is the trigger for the start of fluctuation of the special symbol 2 (special diagram 2) (S1461). When it is determined that it is the trigger for the start of fluctuation of the special symbol 2 (S1461: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a reserved ball in which the open effect flag 223i is set to ON (S1462). When it is determined that there is no reserved ball for which the open effect flag 223i is set to ON (S1462: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reserved balls for which the open effect flag 223i is set to be turned on are stored (S1462: Yes), the open effect flag 223i corresponding to each number of reserved balls is held one before each. The area corresponding to the number of balls is shifted and stored (S1463). On the other hand, in the process of S1461 when it is determined that it is the trigger for the start of fluctuation of the special symbol 1 (S1461: No), this process is terminated.

The open effect flag 223i is individually set corresponding to each of the reserved balls 1 to 4 of the special symbol 2 and the execution area, and is set to ON for the reserved balls established during a long period of time. The flag. Then, when the advance notice effect display corresponding to the digestion of the reserved ball is set along with the digestion of the reserved ball, the open effect flag 223i is also shifted to the area corresponding to the previous reserved ball. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the ball is a reserved ball that has been established during a long period of time.

Here, the description will be continued by returning to FIG. 48. After executing the hold quantity transfer process (S1424), the fluctuation count counter 223u is added by 1 (S1425), and this process ends. The fluctuation count counter 223u is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol since the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, and is reset to 0, which is an initial value, when the power is turned off.

In the present embodiment, the number of fluctuations since the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 is counted, but the number of fluctuations is not limited to this and is maintained by providing a dedicated backup power supply even if the power is turned off. It may be configured so that the timekeeping data can be acquired by RTC292 and the number of fluctuations on a daily basis can be identified. When the timekeeping data is periodically acquired from RTC292 and the date is updated, the value of the fluctuation count counter 223u is saved in the storage area corresponding to the date, and then the value of the fluctuation counter 223u is the initial value. A configuration that resets to 0 can be considered.

Here, the description will be continued by returning to FIG. 47. In the process of S1401, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1403). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1403: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1404), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1405), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 54) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1403: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1406). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1406: Yes), the hold ball number command reception process is executed (S1407). In this hold ball number command reception process (S1407), based on the received hold ball number command, the hold ball number is stored in the corresponding special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b, respectively. Is executed to determine whether the normal symbol is hit for a long time, and if it is hit for a long time, the open effect flag 223i is turned on for the newly stored reserved ball of the special symbol 2. Execute the process set to. Further, in the process of S1407, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1407 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the reserved ball number command reception process (S1407) will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the hold ball number command reception process (S1407).

In the hold ball number command reception process (FIG. 52, S1407), first, each hold ball number is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b are used, respectively. The number of reserved balls is set (S1471). Next, it is determined whether the sub-long-time open flag 223h is on (S1472). When it is determined that the sub-long-time open flag 223h is on (S1472: Yes), it is determined whether or not the reserved ball number command of the special symbol 2 has been received (S1473). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command of the special symbol 2 has been received (S1473: Yes), the release effect flag 223i of the corresponding reserved ball number is set to ON (S1474). On the other hand, in the processing of S1472, when it is determined that the sub-long-time open flag 223h is off (S1472: No), or when it is determined in the processing of S1473 that the reserved ball number command of the special symbol 2 is not received. (S1473: No) ends this process.

Here, the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Therefore, every time a start winning prize is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 are processed by S1407. Can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110, respectively. Therefore, due to the influence of noise and the like, the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 are the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol of the main control device 110. Even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of detecting the start winning or drawing the special symbol. Can be modified to match the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. When the process of S1407 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b is issued. Set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description will be continued by returning to FIG. 47. In the process of S1406, if the reserved ball number command has not been received (S1406: No), then it is determined whether or not a special symbol winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1408). Then, when the winning command is received (S1408: Yes), the winning command receiving process is executed (S1409), and the winning information indicated by the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223f (S1410). After that, it returns to the main process. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (starting winning), the main control device 110 acquires each value of each counter C1 to C3, and the value thereof is acquired. Each value of each of the acquired counters C1 to C3 is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number storage area 203b, respectively. Further, as soon as the respective values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 are acquired in the main control device 110, the original values of the acquired counters C1 to C2 are selected separately from the original special symbol jackpot lottery. Various information obtained when the lottery is held is pre-read (predicted). Then, when the pre-reading is completed in the main control device 110, a winning command including various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113.

Here, the winning command reception process (S1409) will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the winning command reception process (S1409). In the winning command receiving process, first, it is determined whether the sub long-time open flag 223h is on, that is, whether it is hit for a long time (S1481). When it is determined that the sub-long-time open flag 223h is off (S1481: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-long-time open flag 223h is on (S1481: Yes), it is determined whether or not the winning command of the special symbol 2 has been received (S1482).

If it is determined in the process of S1482 that the winning command of the special symbol 2 has not been received (S1482: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning command of the special symbol 2 has been received (S1482: Yes), the opening effect flag 223i of the corresponding number of reserved balls is set to ON (S1483).

Here, the open effect flag 223i is set with a flag corresponding to each holding area and execution area. Therefore, the opening effect flag 223i corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the winning command of the received special symbol 2 is set to ON. This makes it possible to distinguish and distinguish between the reserved spheres stored for a long time and the other reserved spheres.

Here, the description will be continued by returning to FIG. 47. In the process of S1408, if the special symbol winning command has not been received (S1408: No), then it is determined whether or not the normal symbol winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1411). When it is determined that the winning command of the normal symbol is received (S1411), the winning information of the normal symbol indicated by the received winning command is set in the normal winning information storage area 223g (S1412). After that, it returns to the main process. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is acquired in the main control device 110, and the acquired value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is normal. It is stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203f. Further, as soon as the value of the ordinary hit counter C4 is acquired in the main control device 110, the original lottery is performed from the acquired value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4 separately from the original winning lottery of the ordinary symbol. Various information obtained in this case is pre-read (predicted). Then, when the pre-reading is completed in the main control device 110, a winning command of a normal symbol including various information (whether or not, hit type) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113.

On the other hand, in the process of S1411, when the winning command of the normal symbol is not received (S1411: No), it is determined whether the addition command is received (S1413). When it is determined that the addition command has been received (S1413: Yes), the information indicated by the received addition command is set in the addition command storage area 223x (S1414). The addition command reception flag 223y is set to on (S1415).

On the other hand, in the process of S1413, when it is determined that the addition command has not been received (S1413: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed. (S1416), the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114.

Next, the variation display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S1312). This variation display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process (FIG. 54, S1312), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1501). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1505 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S1501: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S1502), and then the fluctuation pattern selection process (see FIG. 49) of S1433, S1437, and S1438. In any of the processes, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1503).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1504). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1505.

In the process of S1505, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1505). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1505: No), the process of S1510 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1505: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1506), and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is set from the RAM 223. Acquire (S1507). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509.

In the process of S1509, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1509). .. By receiving this display stop type command, the display control device 114 stops and displays the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the process of S1509 is executed, the process proceeds to the process of S1510.

In the process of S1510, it is determined whether the addition command reception flag 223y is on (S1510). It is determined whether the value of the SW effective time counter 223q is 0 (S1511). When it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223q is 0 (S1511: Yes), the display effect content is determined based on the received addition information based on the set background mode (S1512). ). After that, the display addition command is set based on the set display effect content (S1513).

Here, in the process of S1512, the information indicated by the received addition command and the display effect content corresponding to the set background mode are selected and set. The display content is set in the variation pattern selection table 222a. Specifically, when it is the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol 1, the hit / fail judgment result is wrong, the number of reserved pieces is 2, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 160, as shown in FIG. 19, the main control device. From 110, "A1B4" is output as a fluctuation pattern command, and "B0B2" is output as an addition command. The voice lamp control device 113 determines a display mode at a fixed time corresponding to each background mode based on the fluctuation pattern command, and outputs a command to the display control device 114. Then, after the SW effective time has elapsed, only the display mode corresponding to the set background mode is output to the display control device 114 so as to be set at the start of the addition time.

In the above example, if the underwater background mode is selected when the SW effective time becomes 0, the variation display mode after the reach display mode of the super reach out-of-reach variation pattern A1 (after the addition time) is set. .. In detail, as shown in FIG. 18, a chance effect (see FIG. 13A) is set. When the beach background mode is selected, the display modes after the reach display mode of the super reach out-of-reach variation pattern A2 are set. In detail, as shown in FIG. 18, a continuous effect (see FIG. 13B) is set.

With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the process of setting the data required for the start of fluctuation of the special symbol set at the start of fluctuation. Further, even when it is necessary to set different display modes corresponding to a plurality of background modes, display data corresponding to each background mode is set for a period including a time that the player can switch. However, in the period after that, since the display data corresponding to the set background mode may be set, the control processing required for the variable display of the special symbol can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a look-ahead effect selection process (S1313), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead effect selection process (S1313). In this look-ahead effect selection process (FIGS. 55 and S1313), a process for selecting (determining) the advance notice effect display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the look-ahead results of the normal symbol and the special symbol.

In the look-ahead effect selection process (FIG. 55, S1313), first, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead effect of a normal symbol is set (S1601). The determination of whether or not the pre-reading effect of the normal symbol is set is executed by determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is selected and the display period is reached. In addition, a dedicated flag is set, and the flag is set to on based on the selection of the look-ahead effect, and the look-ahead effect is controlled to be turned off when the display of the look-ahead effect is completed. It may be configured to determine whether or not the effect is set.

If it is determined in the process of S1601 that the pre-reading effect of the normal symbol is set (S1601: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pre-reading effect of the ordinary symbol is not set (S1601: No), it is determined whether the hold of the ordinary symbol, which is a long-time hit, is stored in the ordinary winning information storage area 223 g (S1602). .. When it is determined that the hold of the ordinary symbol that hits for a long time is stored in the ordinary winning information storage area 223 g (S1602: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing of the long-time open effect (S1603).

The long-time open effect is a symbol schematically showing the electric accessory 64c by opening the door displayed in the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 5A. It is a notice effect that is displayed to notify in advance that the electric accessory 64c will be opened due to a long hit. The timing to start this long-time open effect is 3 seconds before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed at the hit of a long time. In this way, by configuring the opening effect to be displayed for a long time from 3 seconds before the hit for a long time, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the opening time of the electric accessory 64c. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the opportunity to easily enter the second starting port 64b. In addition, the player can play the game with the expectation that the open effect will be executed for a long time, and can prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

If it is determined in the process of S1603 that it is not the timing to execute the open effect for a long time (S1603: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the timing to execute the open effect for a long time (S1603: Yes), the start of the open effect is set (S1604). A display opening effect command for instructing the display control device 114 to display the long-time opening effect shown in FIGS. 5A to 6A on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S1605). ..

On the other hand, in the processing of S1602, when it is determined that the hold of the ordinary symbol, which is a long-time hit, is not stored in the ordinary winning information storage area 223g (S1602: No), it is determined whether the look-ahead effect is the executable period. (S1606). Here, the pre-reading effect executable period is a period during which the open effect is not being executed for a long time and is not in the jackpot game state. In the present embodiment, the pre-reading effect execution period is set as described above, but the period is not limited to this, and other settings may be made as appropriate.

In the process of S1606, when it is determined that the pre-reading effect execution period is not (S1606: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the look-ahead effect can be executed (S1606: Yes), it is determined whether the hold of the special symbol or the normal symbol is stored, the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223a, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter. It is determined from the values of 223b and the normal hold ball number counter 223c (S1607). When it is determined that there is no reservation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol (S1607: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a hold of a special symbol or a normal symbol (S1607: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223k is acquired and the look-ahead effect is executed from the look-ahead effect lottery table 222c (see FIG. 24 (b)). A lottery for whether or not to do so is executed (S1608). Here, in the look-ahead effect lottery table 222c (FIG. 24 (b)), when the reserved ball that becomes a big hit is stored in the reserved ball of the special symbol, the reserved ball that becomes a big hit is stored in the reserved ball of the special symbol. The probability of being drawn with a look-ahead effect is set higher than when there is no reserved ball with a special symbol (special symbol). Therefore, the player can predict in advance the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct or not depending on the frequency with which the look-ahead effect is executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy not only the content of the look-ahead effect but also the frequency of the pre-reading effect.

It is determined whether the lottery result of S1608 has a look-ahead effect (S1609). If it is determined that the lottery result has no look-ahead (S1609: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result has the look-ahead effect (S1609: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223k is acquired and from the look-ahead effect selection table 222d (see FIGS. 24 (c) to (d)). The look-ahead effect is selected (S1610). A display look-ahead effect command indicating the selected look-ahead effect is set (S1611).

Here, the look-ahead effect selection table 222d has only a look-ahead effect lottery table (FIG. 24 (c)) for selecting a look-ahead effect when there is a hold ball of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2, and a hold of a normal symbol. It is composed of a look-ahead effect lottery table (FIG. 24 (d)) for selecting a look-ahead effect in the case. When there is a reserved ball with a special symbol, as shown in FIG. 24 (c), the door displayed on the third symbol display device 81 indicating a sign (notice) of whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed is displayed. The number of small trembling effects is set, after which the door is opened and a comment is displayed in it. This comment is a notice display mode for the player to predict the lottery result of the reserved ball with a special symbol, and indicates that the lottery result is a win (big hit), such as "I did it !!" or "Congratulations! , And characters such as "Chance !!" and "Great chance !!", which are easier to select than in the case of a hit or a miss, are selected based on the value of the production counter 223k. Has been done.

With this configuration, the player can predict and determine the lottery result of the special symbol in advance by the comment display displayed when the door is opened. Therefore, even if the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has a low degree of expectation for a big hit, it can be enjoyed with the content displayed by the look-ahead effect, and the game can be played early. You can prevent getting bored.

Further, when there is no hold of the special symbol (when only the normal symbol is held), as shown in FIG. 24 (d), only the vibration effect of the door is selected. When the opening effect is executed for a long time, the door tremor effect is executed twice. Therefore, when the production of the two door vibrations is selected, the player expects that the door will be opened and the production of opening for a long time will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the opportunity for the player to have a feeling of expectation for the long-time open production. Further, as shown in FIG. 24C, the door opening effect is executed and a comment is displayed whenever the door tremor effect is executed three or more times. When the door trembles continuously, the number of times is counted and the door is expected to open. In addition, when the door tremor is executed four times, it is configured to be executed only when the hold ball that is a big hit is stored in the hold ball of the special symbol, so that the player can perform the door tremor four times. By being executed, the jackpot can be predicted at an early stage. In addition, when the door tremor is executed, the player can be expected to tremble four times to give the player an uplifting sensation (a feeling of excitement).

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the synchronous effect management process (S1314), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this synchronous effect management process (S1314). In this synchronous effect management process (S1314), a process of acquiring time information from RTC292, determining whether it is a preparation period or a time effect period based on the time information, and setting an effect mode indicating it is performed. Execute.

In the synchronous effect management process (FIG. 56, S1314), first, it is determined whether or not the time effect execution flag 223m is set to ON (S1701). When it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223m is off (S1701: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223m is on (S1701: Yes), the time information of "hours and minutes" is acquired from RTC292 (S1702). It is determined whether the preparation period flag 223o indicating that the preparation period is in progress is on (S1703). When it is determined that the preparation period flag 223o is on (S1703: Yes), it is determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1702 is the time production period set in the set time storage area 223n (S1704). ). If it is determined that it is not the time production period (S1704: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the time production period is set (S1704: Yes), the preparation period flag 223o is set to off (S1705). The start period flag 223p is set to on (S1706). The effect mode C is set in the effect mode storage area 223w (S1707). After that, the effect variation process is executed (S1708), and this process is terminated.

Here, the effect change process (S1708) will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this effect change process (S1708). In this effect change process (FIG. 57, S1708), when the preparation period shifts to the time effect period, the special fish school is displayed as the third symbol if the result of the hit / fail judgment is correct for the changing special symbol. This is a process for executing a process of displaying on the device 81 and notifying in advance that it is a big hit. Here, the special school of fish is a notice effect display in which red fish form a school and swim from the right to the left of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the notice effect display of a normal school of fish is composed of blue fish, and notifies the player that the expectation of a big hit is high.

In the effect changing process (FIG. 57, S1708), first, it is determined whether the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) is changing (S1721). If it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S1721: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S1721: Yes), it is determined whether the result of determining whether the special symbol is changing is a big hit (S1722). When it is determined that the result of the hit / fail determination of the changing special symbol is a big hit (S1722: Yes), a display notice display command indicating the display of the special school of fish is set (S1723). On the other hand, in the process of S1722, when it is determined that the result of the hit / fail determination is incorrect (S1722: No), this process is terminated.

In this way, when the preparation period shifts to the time production start period, the result of the hit / fail judgment of the changing special symbol is notified in advance by the special school of fish. Therefore, the time production period can be used by the player. It is possible to display a notice effect that is advantageous to the user. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the time production period is an advantageous period for the player, and it is possible to enjoy the time production period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the present embodiment, the hit / fail judgment is notified in advance by shifting from the preparation period to the time production period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in the case of a big hit, the judgment result is notified. In addition, it may be configured to execute a process of switching so as to always display a stop display with a symbol that notifies the jackpot B. Then, during the jackpot game executed in the time effect period, the effect of whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot A may be executed. With this configuration, even if the time production period becomes a big hit game, a special production can be provided to the player, and the player can be more entertained.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, a hold quantity display update process (S1306), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the hold quantity display update process (S1306).

In the hold quantity display update process (FIG. 58, S1306), first, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the number of hold symbols (S1801). If it is determined that there is no change in the reserved symbol (S1801: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a change in the number of reserved symbols (S1801: Yes), it is determined whether there is a reserved ball of the special symbol 2 in which the open effect flag 223i is set to ON (S1802). When it is determined that there is a reserved ball of the special symbol 2 in which the open effect flag 223i is set to ON (S1802: Yes), the corresponding special reserved symbol (in the present embodiment, the star-shaped reserved symbol) and others. A display hold command indicating the hold symbol of (hold ball other than the open effect flag 223i turned on) is set (S1803). On the other hand, in the processing of S1802, when all the open effect flags 223i are off (S1802: No), the values are set to the set special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Based on this, a display hold command indicating a hold symbol to be displayed is set (S1804).

In this way, by determining whether or not there is a reserved ball for which the open effect flag 223i is set to ON, the reserved symbol of the reserved ball can be changed to a special symbol different from the usual one and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the ball is a reserved ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 64b for a long time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307), which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307).

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 59, S1307), first, it is determined whether or not the demo screen is displayed in the standby state (S1901). When it is determined that the standby state is in the standby state (S1901: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) (S1902). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1902: Yes), it is determined whether the setting of the setting switch 291 is the setting "1" or "2" (S1903). When it is determined that the setting switch 291 is set "1" or set "2" (S1903: Yes), the fluctuation for display for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of fluctuations indicated by the value of the fluctuation counter 223u. Set the number of times command (S1904). After that, the process of S1905 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1901 when it is determined that the state is not in the standby state (S1901: No), the process of S1905 is executed.

In the process of S1905, the sensor input process is executed (S1905). Here, the sensor input process (S1905) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a sensor input process (S1905), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 59, S1307) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

In the sensor input process (FIG. 60, S1905), first, it is determined whether the sensor effective time counter 223r is set to a value larger than 0 (S1921). When it is determined that the sensor effective time counter 223r is a value of 0 or less (S1921: No), it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect display is set (S1922). When it is determined that the notice effect display is set (S1922: Yes), the sensor effective time set as the notice effect display is set in the sensor effective time counter 223r (S1923). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1922 that the notice effect display is not set (S1922: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1921, when it is determined that the sensor effective time counter 223r is a value larger than 0 (S1921: Yes), the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r is subtracted and updated by the elapsed time (S1924). ). It is determined whether the touch sensor 290 is on, that is, whether the player operates the touch sensor 290 with his or her hand close to it (S1925). When it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is on (S1925: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r is 10 seconds or more (S1926). When it is determined that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r is 10 seconds or more (S1926: Yes), it is determined whether the current effect mode is the effect mode C (during the time effect period) (S1927). If it is determined that the effect mode is C (S1927: Yes), the process of S1928 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect mode is other than the effect mode C (S1927: No), this process ends.

In the process of S1926, when it is determined that the sensor effective time counter 223r is 10 seconds or less (S1926: No), the process of S1928 is executed. In the process of S1928, the value of the touch counter 223s is updated by +1 (S1928), and a display notice display command corresponding to the updated value of the touch counter 223s is set (S1929). It is determined whether the value of the touch counter 223s is the upper limit value set in the selected touch notice effect display (S1930). When it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223s is the upper limit value (S1930: Yes), the value of the touch counter 223s is reset to the initial value 0 (S1931). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223s is not the upper limit value (S1930: No), this process ends.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 59. After the sensor input process (S1905) is executed, it is determined whether the value of the SW effective time counter 223q is larger than 0, that is, whether the SW effective time is in progress (S1906). When the SW effective time counter 223q is a value of 0 or less, that is, when it is determined that the SW is not in the effective time (S1906: No), it is determined whether the special symbol is changing (S1907). If it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S1907: No), the process of S1914 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is changing, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1908).

When it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed in the process of S1908 (S1908: No), the value of the SW count counter 223v is added by 1 (S1909). The value of the sensor effective time counter 223r is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1910). After that, it is determined whether the SW count counter 223v is larger than the upper limit value (S1911). When it is determined that the value of the SW count counter 223v is equal to or less than the upper limit value (S1911: No), the process of S1914 is executed.

When it is determined that the value of the SW count counter 223v is larger than the upper limit value (S1911: Yes), the special effect lottery is executed (S1912). A display notice display command indicating the notice effect determined by the lottery is set (S1913). After that, the process proceeds to S1914. In the process of S1914, it is determined whether or not a new fluctuation pattern is set (S1914). When it is determined that a new fluctuation pattern has been set (S1914: Yes), the SW effective time is set in the SW effective time counter 223q based on the set fluctuation pattern (S1915). On the other hand, if it is determined in S1914 that no new fluctuation pattern has been set (S1914: No), this process ends.

In the process of S1906, when it is determined that the SW effective time counter 223q is a value larger than 0 (S1906: Yes), the value of the SW effective time counter 223q is updated by subtracting the value corresponding to the elapsed time. (S1916). After that, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1917). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S1917: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1917: Yes), it is determined whether the preparation period flag 223o is on (S1918).

If it is determined that the preparation period flag 223o is on in the process of S1918 (S1918: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the preparation period flag 223o is off (S1918: No), the background mode is added by 1 and set in the background mode storage area 223t (S1919). A display switching command for a variation pattern corresponding to the set background mode is set (S1920). Then, this process ends.

<Control processing in the display control device 114>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 73, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 61, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2001) will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released is performed. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S2103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S2001 in FIG. 61) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 61) (S2105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S2001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, the display control device 114 High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 62, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S2102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2103 to S2105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2101. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S2102 and S2102, the processes of S2103 to S2105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes S2103 to S2105 may be executed without performing the processes S2101 and S2102. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 61. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings such as the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2003, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S2004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 71 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S3402 in FIG. 71 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIG. 11 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 63 (b)). The determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 63 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 63 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the NAND flash memory 234a can be stored. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that this is the case, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entering the first starting port 64a (starting prize), and the main control device 110 issued a voice lamp control device to instruct the start of the variation effect. When the display variation pattern command is received, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on, which is not shown, can be immediately displayed during the variation effect period to perform a simple variation effect. it can. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S2005, the interrupt permission is set (S2006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 63 (a). FIG. 63A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing or the simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing described later, and the processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 63 (b). FIG. 63 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 31) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 63B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, it is not the image at power-on shown in FIG. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S2302) is executed, and then the display setting process (S2303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the image. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 64 to 68.

In the display setting process (S2303), one frame of images to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 69 to 70.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2303) or the simple display setting process (S2309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous warning command (not shown) is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305), which are determined in the task process (S2304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 31 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 73.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type (big hit A, big hit B) indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop type counter. Then, the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2309) is executed to process S2304. Move to.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 to 68, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process (FIG. 64, S2302), as shown in FIG. 64, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2401), and if there is no unprocessed new command, there is no unprocessed new command. (S2401: No), the command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2402), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2405), the process returns to the process of S2401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2405) will be described with reference to FIG. 65 (a). FIG. 65A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, it is determined whether the received variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a plurality of background modes are set (S2501). A plurality of background modes are set in the variation pattern selected in the effect mode A, and only one type of background mode is set in the variation pattern selected in the effect mode B and the effect mode C. ..

In the present embodiment, the effect mode B and the effect mode C have one type of background mode, but the background mode is not limited to one, and a plurality of background modes may be set as in the effect mode A.

In the process of S2501, when it is determined that the received fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern in which a plurality of background modes are not set (S2501: No), the display data table corresponding to the command is determined and the display data table is determined. Set in the buffer (S2502). On the other hand, in the process of S2501, when it is determined that the received fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern in which a plurality of background modes are set (S2501: Yes), a display data table corresponding to each background mode is determined. And set it in the display data table buffer (S2503). The display data table corresponding to the background mode stored in the background mode storage area 233k is actively set (S2504). After that, the process of S2505 is executed.

Here, the display data table buffer 233d is configured so that a plurality of display data tables can be set, and it is possible to synchronize the set display data tables and transfer pointers for processing. Therefore, even when different displays are executed corresponding to a plurality of background modes, it is possible to switch to a plurality of display contents by actively setting and switching one of the plurality of display data table buffers.

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed in the display data table buffer. Set to 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2502 or S2503 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2505). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the set fluctuation display data table is turned on, and other fluctuation display data tables are displayed. The corresponding data table determination flag is set to off (S2506). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S2506, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2507), and the pointer 233f is set to 0. Initialize (S2508). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S2509), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2508, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is changed to the pointer 233f. The drawing content defined at the indicated address is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the content is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing of S2505. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 in the image storage area of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, when the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2507, the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 64. In the processing of S2404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2406). If there is a display variable type command (S2406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2407), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2407) will be described with reference to FIG. 65 (b). FIG. 65B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, before big hit B) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S2601), and the stop type table and V interrupt processing are performed. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set by comparing with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time (see FIG. 63B) is executed. (S2602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set to off (S2603). After that, the process returns to the process of S2401 in FIG.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2406: No), then it is determined whether there is a display notice display command among the unprocessed commands (S2408). When it is determined that the display notice display command has been received (S2408: Yes), the notice effect display process is executed (S2409). The details of the advance notice effect display processing (S2409) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 66 (a), but the degree of expectation for the jackpot to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the variable display of the special symbol. The setting of the notice display mode for notifying the player of the notification of a big hit or the like is executed.

Here, the notice effect display process (S2409) will be described with reference to FIG. 66 (a). FIG. 66A is a flowchart showing this advance notice effect display process (S2409).

In the notice effect display process (FIG. 66 (a), S2409), first, the display data table corresponding to the received display notice display command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S2701). The transfer data table corresponding to the set advance notice display data table for displaying at the display timing based on the display timing of the notice display indicated by the received display notice display command is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (S2702).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S2703), and the time data representing the fluctuation time is clocked based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d. The counter is set to 233h (S2704), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2705).

In this way, the notice display is set based on the display notice display command output from the voice lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even if the same variation pattern is used, it can be shown to the player as if the display modes are different.

In the present embodiment, the content of the notice display and the display timing are selected by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is configured to execute the selection of the notice display. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table for advance notice is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table that has already been set may be set to be overwritten by setting the advance notice display. Good.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 64. When it is determined that there is no display notice display command in the processing of S2408, it is determined whether or not there is a display switching command among the unprocessed commands (S2410). If it is determined that there is a display switching command (S2410: Yes), the mode switching process is executed (S2411). The mode switching process (S2410) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 66 (b), but a process of switching to a display mode corresponding to the background mode is executed based on the operation of the frame button 22.

Here, the mode switching process will be described with reference to FIG. 66 (b) (S2411). FIG. 66B is a flowchart showing this mode switching process (S2411). In the mode switching process (S2411), first, the background mode corresponding to the received command is set in the background mode storage area 233k (S2801). It is determined whether the special symbol is changing (S2802). When it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S2802: Yes), the display data table buffer of the background mode corresponding to the background mode corresponding to the received command is actively set (S2803). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S2802: No), the background data is changed to the background data corresponding to the received command and set (S2804).

In this way, if the special symbol is changing, the display mode is switched to the change pattern corresponding to the background mode. On the other hand, if the special symbol is stopped, the background of the display mode in the standby state is set to be displayed with the set background.

The process of changing the background or the like corresponding to the background mode may be configured as follows.

Set the back image change flag to turn on to notify the normal image transfer setting process of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the back on state. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images are displayed. Set the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type to off, end this back image change command processing, and return to the command judgment processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the set back image change flag is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the set back image discrimination flag. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display any of the back images A to C according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the set back image discrimination flag is used at that time. The back image type to be displayed is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident video) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored is specified. RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. When it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command may be turned on, or later. The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the received back image command may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 64. In the process of S2410, when it is determined that there is no display switching command (S2410: No), it is determined whether there is a display addition command (S2412). When it is determined that there is an addition command for display (S2412: Yes), the addition command process is executed (S2413).

Here, the addition command processing (S2413) will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing this addition command processing (S2413).

In the addition command processing (FIG. 67, S2413), first, the display data table of the display effect corresponding to the received command is determined, and the display data table is added to the display data table set in the display data table buffer and set (S2901). ). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233d currently actively set). To. The position to be added is additionally set before the END data.

The changing symbol information is added and set in the set display data table (S2902). By setting the changing symbol information in this way, it is possible to suppress a problem that a symbol different from the displayed symbol is displayed when the display content is switched to correspond to the addition time.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is determined, and the transfer data table is added to the transfer data table buffer 233e and set (S2903). Based on the data table, the time data is added to the time counter 233h and set (S2904).

When the addition command is received, the display mode of the fluctuation pattern set corresponding to the addition time is specified based on the time data indicated by the addition command, the set fluctuation pattern, and the background mode. , Set the display data table. With this configuration, even if it is necessary to switch between different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode after the addition time may be set according to the set background mode, and the display mode may be set. The control load of the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the display data table is added to the set display data table for setting, but the display data table may be newly set.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 64. In the processing of S2412, if it is determined that there is no display addition command (S2412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2417), and there is an error command. If (S2417: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2418), and the process returns to the processing of S2401.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2418) will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3001). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S3002). The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3001, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S3002 is determined, and the error type is supported. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S3002 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 64. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2417 (S2417: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2419), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

In the processing of S2401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes). ), The processing of S2402 to S2419 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2401 to S2419 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 63B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands required to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 11 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Only the type commands are extracted, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 65 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 65 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and other processes are executed. For a command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 65A) executed in this case, in the processing of S2301, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on required in that case are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 70, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 69, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3101), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3101: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S3102 to S3104 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3105. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3101: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S3102), S3103 to S3104 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S3103, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3103). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3103: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3104).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 70A. FIG. 70A is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to and all the error determinations set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3201).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various parameters required.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3201, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3202), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 69. After the warning image setting process (S3104) or in the process of S3103, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3103: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3105.

In S3105, the pointer update process is executed (S3105). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 70 (b). FIG. 70B is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3301). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the actual data of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3301, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S3302). As a result, if it is End information (S3302: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3303), and if it is a demo display data table (S3303: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S3304), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3305), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S3303, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3303: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3303: No). S3306), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3302, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3302: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 69 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3106). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S3106 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinates are displayed for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3107), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3108). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3108: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3108: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S3109).

As a result, if the definite display flag is off (S3109: No), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to produce the definite display effect. The contents are cleared (S3111) by setting (S3110) and then writing Full data to the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3112), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3113). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S3114), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3115), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing contents can be set as described above. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3115 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2304), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S3115, and the stop symbol thereof By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3109, if the confirmation display flag is off instead of on (S3109: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S3116). If the demo display flag is off (S3116: Yes), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S3117) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3118). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3119). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3120), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S3121), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In the process of S3116, if the demo display flag is on (S3116: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2309), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 63B), also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. A process is performed in which a display data table that specifies that the image (not shown) is stopped and displayed is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72, details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 71A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3401). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3401: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S3402), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 71 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S3401 (S3401: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3403), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 72.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3402), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 71 (b). FIG. 71B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3402).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S3501), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3501: Yes). ), Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3502). In the process of S3502, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S3502 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3502: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3502: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3503. Further, as a result of the processing of S3501, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3501: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3503.

In the processing of S3503, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3503), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3503: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3504), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3503 (S3503: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S3505), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 63 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 63 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 63 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 64 to 68) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 69 to 70 (b)) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device An image at the normal time is displayed on 81. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 72) (see S3401: No in FIG. 71 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 contains image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by the above, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a normal image transfer setting process (S3403), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3403).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3105) of the display setting process (S2303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S3601). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3602), and if it is transfer data information (S3602: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3603) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3604), and the process proceeds to S3605.

Further, in the process of S3602, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S3602: No), the processes of S3603 and S3604 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3605. In the process of S3605, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3605), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3605: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3606).

In the process of S3606, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S3606 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3606: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3606: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3607. Further, as a result of the processing of S3605, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3605: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3607.

In the process of S3607, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3607), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3607: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3608), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3603 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3609. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3607: No), this process ends.

In the process of S3609, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3609). The discrimination in the processing of S3609 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S3609, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3609: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3609 (S3609: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3610). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S3610, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3611), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. The image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 31 (S3701). That is, in the processing of S3701, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2304). Then, the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3702). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including information instructing the first frame buffer 236b to expand the image drawn as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the process of S3702 (S3703). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 63B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

Further, in the above embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but instead, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

Further, in the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the voice lamp control device 113. The command to be to be determined is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. After that, the display control device 114 may be configured to send a command to the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read the image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the image data read from the character ROM 234 by the MPU 231 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

In this case, the image controller 237 is accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. A resident video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (that is, it is in use) and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown). ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may confirm the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM of the transfer destination.

Alternatively, the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and resident from the state of the signal. It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts to access the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, or when the access is terminated, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time, so that the MPU 231 can perform the access. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether or not the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scanning is in the blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. As a result, the image controller 237 confirms only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be easily performed.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 is the transfer data that is not the Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be started according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is specified for a predetermined address, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to a display data table or the like by transferring image data according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, the drawing of the sprite is drawn. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, which is necessary for the resident video RAM 235, can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

The process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process or the loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. As a result, in the MPU 231, the image data transfer processing can be executed by utilizing the time when the important processing in the display control device 114 such as the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing is not performed. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are processes that are executed with priority over the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 is used for image data without affecting the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process. Transfer processing can be executed.

In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM by using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but is commonly used by the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address at that address. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236. That is, when the MPU 231 specifies the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply specified. The structure of the instruction that specifies it can be simplified. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as the information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data, the address set in the common address system is simply used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is provided as the image controller. It may be provided by directly connecting to 237. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. May be good.

By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the premise that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the character ROM 234 may be configured to be directly accessible from the MPU 231.

In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. May be done. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow read speed, but by adopting the display control device 114 having the configuration described in the above embodiment, the image can be displayed without any problem at the time to be displayed. be able to.

In the above embodiment, the case where the NOR type ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is provided in that area after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. It may be possible to store a part of the boot program executed in. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234, and after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. It may store a part of the boot program that is executed first.

Further, in the above embodiment, a first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in that area. However, the case is not limited to this, and a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a is stored in the internal bus (bus line 240). A first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program that is first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM), etc. are provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and MPU231 is provided. You may store a part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released.

In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then sets the boot program in the buffer RAM 234c. When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and the internal bus (bus line 240) is read. It may be output to MPU231 via 240). In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" for the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, is the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 already set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the display main process can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done.

Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified in the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b detects that the control program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read directly from the MPU 231 and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", so that the display main process can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done. Further, in this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, the power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the internal bus (bus) to which the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected is not necessarily limited. It may be provided by directly connecting to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video can be connected even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured so that the resident video RAM 235 can be directly connected. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

In the above embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more. A video RAM may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and a resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a 1-port type (1 port input / output port) DRAM is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the multi-port is not always limited. A type RAM may be used. As a result, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. Therefore, for example, the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn while being read from the character ROM 234. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and one RAM is divided into a resident area and a normal area. It may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, in order to prevent the input / output port of the memory from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write process. , It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. In this case, at least the image data corresponding to the image to be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident in response to the reception command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other external input. It is preferable to make it resident in the video RAM 235.

In the above embodiment, a case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident has been described, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. You may. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 does not exist, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is not overwritten and its contents are continuously retained during power-on is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 is not limited to this. Even if the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is overwritten and updated based on a predetermined opportunity, such as when the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is significantly different based on the command received from Good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as the transition period while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept in the resident video RAM 235. You may leave it. Further, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out new image data to be resident, and the read image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. It may be transferred while it is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). Image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information), and transferred to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may try to do it.

Further, when updating the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is transferred using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the newly resident image data, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the newly resident image data, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored when the power failure is resolved, and the power supply is supplied. In the display main process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power is turned on, the RAM determination value is confirmed before starting the transfer of the main image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on. If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored. Therefore, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. It may be configured to do so. In this case, by turning off the simple image display flag, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may not be executed. As a result, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and the display main process or the execution of the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data of the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If this is the case, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for recovery from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a having a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, if the data of the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to a momentary power failure or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, the normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Further, instead of this RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

In the above embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) where many data signals are exchanged. Transfers can be performed efficiently without being affected by.

In the above embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be appropriately set. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the buffer is being scanned during the period (blank period) of scanning on the blank area which is the scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. As a result, the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period. ..

In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. It may be configured. Further, another area in which the image data is stored while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written in the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since it can be processed, the time required for the processing can be shortened.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are input from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 from the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area. Although the case of transferring to 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the character ROM 234 displays the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the above is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. You may transfer directly to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. Further, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236. If the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the time main image or the like. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation of the resident video RAM 235. The case of transferring to the image area 235b has been described, but since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred, the power supply The image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the main image at power-on and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image, the resident video RAM 235 When the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a rear image change command or a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the rear image change command or the frame button. Although the case of changing the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of the super reach based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the game state of the game machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the game state, for example, in accordance with the change of the game state. A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the rear image and the super reach effect mode according to the game state based on the back image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the game state of the game machine 10 and change the rear image or the super reach effect mode according to the game state. Then, the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least a part of the range of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the back image can be immediately displayed by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c.

Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the provisions of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed rear image is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, or the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is transferred. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, and what is the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored? The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again, so that the processing of the display control device 114 The increase in load can be suppressed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected in the voice lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 to be main. A vibration error may be detected by the control device 110, and an error command notifying the error may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to either the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. Then, when an error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error. You may.

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. When a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 69). By executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 70A) when the above is determined, the warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, since it is not necessary to send and receive an error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game plate 13 has been described, but instead of the vibration sensor or together with the vibration sensor, the magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game plate 13. May be good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the sphere from being changed by a magnetic field such as a magnet and intentionally entering the sphere. Therefore, the output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. Then, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main control device 110, if it is determined that the main control device 110 has applied a magnetic field to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is generated. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 or directly. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, if it is determined by the voice lamp control device 113 that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field is determined. An error command that conveys an error may be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, in the error message image image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident. When an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error is received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, if it is determined by the display control device 114 that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113 May display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, or grasps the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the character ROM 234 is displayed. Even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used, the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is used to generate an error message image for notifying a magnetic field error without delay. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that the player behaves illegally. It can be deterred.

When the drawing contents necessary for changing the color tone of a part or all in one effect are specified by the additional data table or the display data table, the additional data table or the display data table is 1 in the third symbol display device 81. The type of sprite that changes the color tone at that time corresponding to the address expressed in units of the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for the frame is displayed, and the type of sprite after the change in the sprite. It may specify the color information that specifies the color tone. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. When the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing the color information specified by the additional drawing contents of the data table. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

Further, when the drawing content required for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. Corresponds to the address represented by the time when is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new sprite type. It may specify the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the MPU 231 sets the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the sprite type to be newly displayed at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing contents specified in the display data table has been described. The transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data required when drawing the image according to the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with the identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the effect that can be additionally displayed. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines the effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing contents and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. It may be configured as.

As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used in the drawing according to the additional drawing contents to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and surely displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, it is possible to transfer the necessary image data to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of the image based on the additional drawing contents. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various kinds of effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, and the player The case where only the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is specified has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. You may. Thereby, the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Further, since it is not necessary to specify the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress the increase in the data third of the display data table.

In the above embodiment, the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are included in the display data table has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the additional drawing contents of the effect to be additionally displayed may be specified in the additional data table. In this case, the work RAM 233 may be provided with an additional data table buffer, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. .. Further, even if the additional data table includes not only the additional drawing contents but also the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data necessary for drawing the image performed according to the additional drawing contents. Good. As a result, it is possible to specify the drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image required for the drawing, so that the additional data table and the additional transfer data table can be used. Compared with the case of specifying the drawing content and the transferred data information, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the case where the display control device 114 prepares the display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the variation effect can be described, for example. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "variable start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "notice effect", "normal reach", and "super reach", and the display data table is prepared according to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command. After identifying the elements required for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the paper required for the specified variation effect are put together into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do so. "Fluctuating start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach", etc. are often displayed in common with each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, by elementizing the variation effect in this way and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, the data table can be efficiently provided.

In the above embodiment, a case where a common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f has been described, but each data table has been described. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) of an image for one frame at which the drawing process is completed will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the driving of the third symbol display device 81 is performed so that the images for one frame are always displayed at equal time intervals (20 milliseconds intervals), the V interrupt signal is signaled for each display of the images for one frame. Can be kept accurate without timing the time interval by sending.

In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded first from the other frame buffer. The case where the image is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded each time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. May be alternately selected, and the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, every time the image controller 237 transmits the image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image information is output to the frame buffer for expanding the drawn image and the third symbol display device 81. It may be replaced with the frame buffer to be used.

In the above embodiment, after the final display data table corresponding to the final display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113 until the final display effect is completed. When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demo command (demo command for display) is received, the display data table for demo corresponding to the demo production is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. Further, in this case, the final display effect is displayed until either the fluctuation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) or the demo command (demo command for display) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. The final display data table corresponding to the final display effect may be reset to the display data table buffer 233d each time the command is completed. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can continue to display the final display effect until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110.

In the above embodiment, the case where the demonstration effect is to change the rear image and stop and display the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers “0” to “9” has been described, but it is not always the case. The present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol consisting of the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, in the display control means 114, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on and the power-on of the resident video RAM 235. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the display control means 114, only the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, and when the power is turned on after the transfer is completed. After displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be used for operation checks at players, hall personnel, factories, etc. at the time of manufacturing. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation is started without any problem by turning on the power.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. It is desirable that the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image at power-on is transferred to the fluctuating image area 235b at power-on immediately after the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to speed up the variation display by the variation image when the power is turned on.

In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table should correspond to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds, and the content of the image to be drawn (drawing content) at that time and should be transferred at that time. The case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is specified has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display content may be specified at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since one frame of image is displayed every second, the display data table may specify the display contents at 1/30 second intervals.

Further, in the display data table, the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is not specified as the sprite type to be drawn, which is defined at each predetermined time interval. May be specified. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is specified as the display content specified for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, instead of this, the work RAM 233 may store information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a. In this case, when the MPU 231 instructs to transfer the image data of the predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and refers to the predetermined image data. Is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, an instruction for transferring image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the transfer instruction of the image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores the information indicating the sprite type in which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and also stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

In the above embodiment, when the image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. The case where the MPU 231 performs a process of non-execution of the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 after determining whether or not the data is transferred has been described. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite is determined. You may memorize it. Further, the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer the image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 will be transferred to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to the “back surface A” among the plurality of back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the rear image used in some super reach may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by resident the back image of the super reach, which is expected to appear frequently or frequently, in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times.

In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines a transfer command for image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 specifies the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data instructed in the above from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data is at the top of the display data table. The information regarding the sprite type required in the table is described, and the MPU 231 is an image controller so as to transfer the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and normally outputs the image data of the image type from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled so as to transfer the data to the video RAM 236.

In the above embodiment, in the back surface C which is the back image of the “island stage”, the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time has been described, but even if the color tone of the entire image changes with time. Good. Further, as the rear image, not only the one that scrolls or the color tone changes with the passage of time, but also an object (for example, a person) that appears with the passage of time instead of such a rear image. It may be something that moves or changes.

In the above embodiment, the information of various counters (special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning, which the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113, is used as a hold ball number command. Although the case of including is described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the information of various counters (special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by another command. You may notify.

In the above embodiment, the case where all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot see them is displayed when the fluctuation effect is executed. However, instead of displaying the high-speed fluctuation , All symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In the above embodiment, the case where one first starting port 64a for starting the lottery for the big hit of the special symbol when the ball enters is arranged in the game board 13, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, a plurality of (for example, two) first entry ports may be arranged on the game board 13 in which the entry is detected independently and the lottery for the jackpot is started. In this case, when there is a hold at each first entry port, the hold ball number command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 indicates which first entry port is the hold. Information may be included. Further, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started includes information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by the first entry port. Good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a hold ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entry port, and when a hold ball number command is received, the first ball entry indicated in the hold ball number command is received. When the number of reserved balls is set in the hold ball counter for the mouth and a fluctuation pattern command is received, if the hold ball counter for the first entry port indicated in the fluctuation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entry port The number of reserved balls can be counted for each.

In the above embodiment, every time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main controller 110 (that is, when it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is mainly used. Although the case of transmitting from the control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 transmits the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, so that the main control device 110 and The control load on the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the winning of the first starting port 64a and the passage of the through gate 67 are each held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of reserved balls of the variable display based on the winning of the first starting port 64a is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81 or by the number of reserved balls in the area divided into four. It may be displayed in an aspect (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is vertically The symbol may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, and for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in various ways separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 79. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is won for a long time of the normal symbol, the game ball wins the second starting port 64b, and when the special symbol 2 starts to fluctuate, the special symbol 1 As with the fluctuation of, the case where the selected fluctuation pattern is displayed in fluctuation at the timing of the start of fluctuation has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is won for a long time and the variable display of the special symbol 2 based on winning the second starting port 64b is started, the third symbol display is displayed. The opening display mode is displayed on the device 81, and the player is given a special effect of the special symbol 2 (an effect of a variable display of the special symbol 2 based on winning a prize in the second starting port 64b for a long time of the normal symbol). It differs from the first embodiment in that it is configured to be notified that it will be started.

<About the display mode of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment>
With reference to FIGS. 74 to 75, a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and a timing chart thereof will be described.

FIG. 74 (a) shows the third symbol display device 81 when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 64b which is opened for a long time during the variable display of the special symbol 1 shown in FIG. 75 (a). It is a figure which showed the opening display mode displayed in. First, the timing chart will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (a).

In FIG. 75 (a), the special symbol 1 is changing when the game ball wins the second starting port 64b in a state where the normal symbol is won for a long time and the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 2 is 0. It is a figure which showed the timing chart until the special symbol 2 becomes the fluctuation start when (the remaining fluctuation time is 3 seconds or more).

As shown in FIG. 75 (a), when the special symbol 1 is in the variable display state, the normal symbol is hit for a long time, and the special symbol is 0 reserved balls, and the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 64b. When a prize is won, the opening display mode shown in FIG. 74 (a) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 within 3 seconds before the fluctuation stops on the changing special symbol 1. When the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is 3 seconds or less, the same processing as that of the special symbol 1 described later being won while the fluctuation is stopped is executed. A detailed description of this case will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (b).

While the opening display mode is displayed for 3 seconds, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the main symbol of the special symbol 1 is reduced to the upper left of the third symbol display device 81 and displayed in a variable manner. After that, the main symbol of the special symbol 1 is stopped and displayed in the usual size, and the main symbol of the special symbol 2 starts the variable display.

With this configuration, even if the game ball wins in the second starting port 64b, the variation of the special symbol 2 is changed even if the variation display of the special symbol 2 is not started until the variation of the special symbol 1 is stopped. The start time can be easily recognized.

Further, the variable display time of the special symbol 1 can be effectively used by executing the opening effect by using the variable time of the special symbol 1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75 (b), when the game ball wins the second starting port 64b by winning the normal symbol for a long time, the special symbol 1 does not change. The timing chart of the display mode displayed by the symbol display device 81 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 75 (b), when the fluctuation of the special symbol 1 is stopped (the state where there is no reserved ball of the special symbol 1, the stop timing of the special symbol 1), the game ball is placed in the second starting port 64b. When a prize is won and the variable display of the special symbol 2 starts, the opening display mode as shown in FIG. 74 (b) is applied to the third symbol display device for 3 seconds after the special symbol 2 starts to change. Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 74 (b), the special symbol 2 is reduced to the upper left of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 and displayed in a variable manner. The opening display mode is a "chance zone start" that notifies the player that the variable display of the special symbol 2 based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 64b is started after a long time of the normal symbol. The characters are displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 76, a display data table for an opening effect, which is executed when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 64b for a long time of a normal symbol in the second embodiment, will be described. In this display data table, the display mode of the opening effect as shown in FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (b) is set. The opening effect is stored in the moving image data, and the playback setting is set in this display data table. Then, it is set as an image in front of the background image. The fluctuating special symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. The winning command receiving process (FIG. 53, S1409) is changed to the winning command receiving process 2 (FIG. 77, S1409) with respect to the control process executed by the voice lamp control process 113 described in the first embodiment. It differs in that it is. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The winning command receiving process 2 (S1409) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the winning command reception process 2 (S1409). The winning command receiving process 2 (FIG. 77, S1409) of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is from S1484 to S1489 with respect to the winning command receiving process (FIG. 53, S1409) of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Processing has been added respectively. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed.

When the process of S1483 is executed, the process of S1484 is executed. In the process of S1484, it is determined whether the winning command received when the sub-long-time flag 223h is on is the winning command of the first reserved ball of the special symbol 2 (S1484). If it is determined that the command is not the first winning command of the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 (S1484: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is the first winning command of the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 (S1484: Yes), the process of S1485 is executed. In the process of S1485, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 is in the variable display (S1485).

If it is determined that the special symbol 1 is stopped (S1485: No), the process of S1489 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol 1 is in the variable display (S1485: Yes), it is determined whether or not the hit / fail determination result of the special symbol 1 in the variable is a hit (S1486). If it is determined that the result of determining whether or not the special symbol 1 is changing is out of order (S1486: No), the process of S1487 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit / fail determination result of the changing special symbol 1 is a hit (S1486: Yes), this process is terminated. In this way, when the changing special symbol 1 is a hit, the jackpot game is subsequently executed, so that the opening display mode is cancelled. Therefore, before the big hit game, it is canceled that the opening display mode indicating that the variable display of the special symbol 2 is started by winning the second starting port 64b based on the long-time hit of the normal symbol is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that confuses the player.

In the process of S1487, it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is 3 seconds or more (S1487). If it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is less than 3 seconds (S1487: Yes), the process of S1489 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is 3 seconds or more (S1487: Yes), when the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is 3 seconds before the remaining fluctuation time, as shown in FIG. A display opening effect command for instructing the display of the opening display mode is set (S1488).

In the process of S1489, a display opening effect command instructing to display the opening display mode shown in FIG. 74 (b) is set based on the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol 2. In this way, when the game ball wins the second starting port 64b due to a long hit of the normal symbol and the special symbol 2 starts to fluctuate, the special symbol 1 is fluctuating and the remaining time is 3 seconds or more. For example, the opening display mode is displayed at the timing 3 seconds before the remaining. On the other hand, when the special symbol 1 is stopped or the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is less than 3 seconds, the opening display mode is the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the fluctuation start of the special symbol 2. It is set to be displayed in.

Therefore, the timing for displaying the opening display mode can be appropriately determined according to the state when the game ball wins the second starting port 64b. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand and smooth effect.

In the present embodiment, the opening display mode is canceled when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the changing special symbol 1 is a hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol 2 started after the big hit game. The opening display mode may be set to be displayed at the timing of the start of fluctuation.

<Control processing executed by the display control device 114 in the second embodiment>
With reference to FIGS. 78 to 79, the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment is executed. In the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 64, S2302) is the command determination process 2 (FIG. 78, S2320) with respect to the control process in the first embodiment. ) Is changed. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination process 2 (S2320) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S2320). In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 78, S2320) in the second embodiment, each process from S2414 to S2415 is added to the command determination process (FIG. 64, S2302) in the first embodiment. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

If it is determined in the process of S2412 that the display addition command has not been received (S2412: No), it is determined whether or not the display general figure opening command has been received (S2414). When it is determined that the display general map opening command has been received (S2414: Yes), the general map opening process is executed (S2415). On the other hand, if it is determined that the display opening command has not been received (S2414: No), the process of S2417 is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 79, a normal drawing opening process, which is one process in the command determination process 2 (FIG. 78, 2320) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. (S2415) will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing this general drawing opening process (S2415).

In the normal figure opening process (FIG. 79), first, the display timing of the opening display mode set in the command is set (S2911). It should be noted that this display timing setting is set by setting a normal map opening flag (not shown) and overwriting the display data table for the normal map opening set by the timing indicated by the flag.

The offset data of the symbol is set in the display data table for the opening of the normal diagram (S2912). The display data table set by overwriting the display data table set in the display data table buffer is set by overwriting the display data table for the opening of the general drawing (S2913).

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 81. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a normal symbol is won for a long time, the variable display of the special symbol 2 based on the winning at the second starting port 64b is accompanied by a notice effect different from the normal display mode. The configuration in which the variable display mode is displayed has been described. However, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is configured so that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol after a long-time hit is set by one fluctuation, which is longer than the normal time, and the long-time hit is achieved. The difference is that even when the judgments are made continuously, the problem that a game ball equal to or larger than the reserved ball wins in the second starting port 64b and becomes an overflow ball is solved. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, the detailed configurations thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (b), the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is added, and the normal status storage area 203k is added to the RAM 203, respectively. Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment.

The normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d provided in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is a selection table for selecting (determining) the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. As shown in FIGS. 80 (c) to 80 (d), the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is dedicated to the normal status value (mode 1 or mode 2) set in the normal status storage area 203k described later. The normal fluctuation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 80 (c)) and the normal fluctuation pattern selection table B (see FIG. 80 (d)) are set respectively.

The normal status storage area 203k provided in the RAM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is a storage area in which the normal status is stored. Mode 1 and mode 2 are set as the normal status, and mode 1 is set in the normal state. Mode 2 is set based on the fact that the normal symbol is won for a long time. After being set to mode 2, once the normal symbol variation is selected, it is set to mode 1. That is, the normal status is a status for making it possible to identify that it is a fluctuation after winning for a long time.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. The difference is that the normal symbol variation start process (FIG. 38, S608) is changed to the normal symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 81, S640) with respect to the control process in the first embodiment. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 81, the normal symbol variation start processing 2 (S640) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation start processing 2 (S640). In the normal symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 81, S640) in the third embodiment, each process of S641 to S645 is added to the normal symbol variation start process (FIG. 38, S608) in the first embodiment. There is. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After the processes of S630, S634, and S635 are executed, the process of S641 is executed. In the process of S641, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is selected based on the normal status stored in the normal status storage area 203k (S641). It is determined whether the normal status is mode 2 (S642). When it is determined that the normal status is mode 2 (S642: Yes), the normal status is set to mode 1 and stored in the normal status storage area 203k (S643).

In this way, after selecting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, it is determined whether the normal status is set to mode 2, and if the normal status indicates mode 2 after a long hit, the mode Set to 1. Therefore, the first variation of the ordinary symbol per long time of the ordinary symbol is selected from the ordinary variation pattern selection table B (see FIG. 80 (d)). In this normal fluctuation pattern selection table B (see FIG. 80 (d)), the fluctuation time is set longer than that of the normal fluctuation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 80 (c)), so that the normal symbol is hit for a long time. The fluctuation time of the latter one fluctuation can be set longer.

Further, the fluctuation time set in the normal fluctuation pattern selection table B (see FIG. 80 (d)) is set to 70 seconds when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit (long-time hit, normal hit). There is. As a result, when four hold items are stored in the special symbol 2 and the fluctuations are displayed immediately, the total fluctuation time is 66 seconds when the longest fluctuation time is selected with the fluctuation pattern in which all the hit / fail judgment results are out of order. However, since a longer fluctuation time is selected, even if the hits are continuous for a long time, the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is not digested, and the game ball wins the second starting port 64b. However, it is possible to suppress the problem of becoming an overflow ball that does not become a hold ball.

In the present embodiment, 70 seconds is set as the case where the special symbol 2 is immediately changed and displayed, but in consideration of the fact that the special symbol 1 is changing, the result of determining whether the special symbol 1 is correct or not is out of order. It may be configured to be set to 100 seconds or more by adding 30 seconds, which is the longest fluctuation time selected in the case of. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the game ball from becoming an overflow ball when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 64b. Further, after all the reserved balls of the special symbol 2 are digested, the next long-time hit is likely to be established, so that the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be executed and the probability of winning the jackpot can be improved.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 90. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a configuration has been described in which the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 winning in the first starting port 64a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the first starting port 64a is won and the color of the reserved symbol displayed when the ball is stored as a reserved ball is changed according to the result of the hit / fail determination. It is different from the first embodiment. The detailed description of the same processing as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

<Regarding the period setting (setting of the production mode) in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (b), in the normal game period in the fourth embodiment, the setting of each period when the reserved symbol is displayed as a rainbow indicating a jackpot will be described.

In FIG. 82A, the reserved symbol is displayed in rainbow during the normal period, the special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball starts to fluctuate during the normal period, fluctuates and stops during the preparation period, and then the jackpot game is started. It is a timing chart which showed the processing of the case.

As shown in FIG. 82 (a), a game ball wins a prize in the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b in a normal period and becomes a hold ball, and the hit / fail judgment result is regarded as a big hit by pre-reading. , The pending symbol is displayed in rainbow color. In this case, if the special symbol has changed first, or if it has been put on hold first and the one with the higher priority of the change start timing stops changing, it is held as a hold period. After that, it is the timing of the start of fluctuation, and when the fluctuation starts, the fluctuation starts in the normal game period as shown in FIG. 82 (a). Then, at the start of the fluctuation, it is determined whether the preparation period is set at the time of stopping the fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 82 (a), when it is determined that the fluctuation is stopped within the preparation period, the setting of the preparation period is set to be canceled at this time. As a result, if the player is notified that the jackpot game will start at the start of the fluctuation, the player is worried that the jackpot will not start due to the change in the background set in the preparation period. It is possible to suppress the trouble that makes you think. In addition, since the background screen is changed to the background of the preparation period during the variable display of the special symbol that becomes a big hit, it is possible to prevent the special hit effect from being impaired.

Next, FIG. 82B is a timing chart in the case where the fluctuation starts in the preparation period, the fluctuation is displayed over the time production period, and the fluctuation stops in the time production period. Since the preparation period is not set to the period when the notice display is not selected, the notice display displayed in the preparation period is not set at the start of the fluctuation, but it is dedicated to the time production period based on the switching to the time production period. It is set so that the notice effect is displayed. As a result, it is possible to make other players think that a big hit is likely to occur when it comes to time production. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is dissatisfied with the fact that the notice display (special fish school) dedicated to the time production that notifies the jackpot is not displayed even though the player is recognized as a jackpot at the start of the fluctuation. ..

<About the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 83. In the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment, the mode B prohibition flag 223α is set in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 with respect to the first embodiment. Notice delay flags 223β have been added respectively. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The mode B prohibition flag 223α is a flag indicating that the setting of the preparation period is prohibited. When the reserved symbol is displayed in the rainbow display color indicating that the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol 1 indicated by the reserved symbol is a big hit, the variation display of the special symbol 1 corresponding to the reserved symbol is stopped and displayed in the preparation period. When determined, the mode B prohibition flag 223α is set to ON (FIG. 86, S1553). Although not shown, the mode B prohibition flag 223α is set to off based on the start of the jackpot game.

The advance notice delay flag 223β is a flag indicating that the advance notice display mode of the special school of fish that notifies the player that it is a big hit during the time effect period is delayed until the start of the opening effect of the big hit game. This notice delay flag 223β is set to ON in the process of S1734 in the process of the effect change process 2 (FIG. 90, S1730) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Here, when the time effect period is set, it is set to ON when the hit / fail determination result of the changing special symbol is a big hit and the remaining fluctuation time is 3 seconds or less.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the notice display when the remaining variable display is already small. Furthermore, by delaying the advance notice display mode of the special school of fish until the start of the jackpot game, it is possible to inform the player that the jackpot game has started in an easy-to-understand manner, and during the time production period, if the jackpot is a special It is possible to inform in an easy-to-understand manner that the notice display mode of the school of fish is displayed.

The notice delay flag 223β is set to off in the processing of S1546 of the opening processing (FIG. 88, S1540) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

<Regarding the control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 84 to 90, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described. The processing different from that of the first embodiment will be described, and the detailed description of the same processing will be omitted.

The command determination process 2 (S1320) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S1320). In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 84, S1320) in the fourth embodiment, the variation pattern reception process (FIG. 48, S1402) receives the variation pattern with respect to the command determination process (FIG. 47, S1311) in the first embodiment. In the process 2 (S1529), the winning command receiving process (FIGS. 53 and S1409) is changed to the winning command receiving process 3 (FIG. 84 and S1530), and the processes S1539 to S1540 are added respectively.

In the variation pattern reception process 2 (S1529), the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 49, S1422) is different from the variation pattern command reception process (FIGS. 48, S1402) in the first embodiment. Since it was only changed to S1428), the illustration is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1428) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (S1428). In the variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 85, S1428) in the fourth embodiment, the processes S1434 to S1435 are deleted from the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 49, S1422) in the first embodiment, and the advance notice selection process is performed. (FIG. 86, S1550) has been added. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

Next, the advance notice selection process (S1550), which is one process in the variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 85, S1428), will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this advance notice selection process (S1550).

In the advance notice selection process (FIG. 86, S1550), first, it is determined whether the color of the reserved symbol of the special symbol that starts to fluctuate is rainbow (S1551). When it is determined that the color of the reserved symbol is rainbow (S1551: Yes), it is determined whether the period during which the special symbol whose fluctuation starts is the preparation period (S1552). When it is determined that the period during which the fluctuation is stopped is the preparation period (S1552: Yes), the mode B prohibition flag 223α is set to ON (S1553). After that, the process of S1554 is executed.

In this way, when the color of the reserved symbol is a big hit (the lottery result of the reserved ball indicated by the reserved symbol), the fluctuation stop time is determined, and if it is the preparation period, the preparation period The mode B prohibition flag 223α indicating that the prohibition is set is set to on. Therefore, before the big hit, the background image is changed to show the preparation period, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the variable display of the special symbol cannot be concentrated. Further, since the other pachinko machine 10 is set to the preparation period, the pachinko machine 10 in which the player is playing cannot be set to the preparation period, so that it can be recognized that the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit. You can play the game with confidence.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1551 when it is determined that the color of the reserved symbol is not rainbow (S1551: No), in the processing of S1552, when it is determined that the period at the time of suspension of fluctuation is not the preparation period (S1552: No), The process of S1554 is executed.

In the process of S1554, the notice effect display is selected from the notice selection table A, and the selected notice effect display is set (S1554). After that, the notice effect is selected and set from the touch charge notice selection table (S1555).

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the winning command receiving process 3 (FIG. 87, S1530) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the winning command reception process 3 (S1530). In the winning command receiving process 3 (FIG. 87, S1530) in the fourth embodiment, each process from S1534 to S1538 is added to the winning command receiving process (FIG. 53, S1409) in the first embodiment. .. Since each process from S1531 to S1533 in the fourth embodiment is the same process as each process from S1481 to S1483 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After the process of S1553 is executed, the process of S1534 is executed. In the process of S1534, it is determined whether or not the winning command of the special symbol 1 has been received (S1534). When the winning command of the special symbol 1 is received (S1534: Yes), it is determined whether the received winning command is a winning command indicating that the winning / failing determination result is a big hit (S1535). When it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is a big hit (S1535: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223k is acquired (S1536).

It is determined whether the value of the acquired effect counter 223k is any of "0 to 30" (S1537). When it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223k is any of "0 to 30" (S1537: Yes), the color of the corresponding reserved symbol is set to rainbow (S1538).

Here, the color of the reserved symbol is output to the display control device 114 by generating a display pending command indicating the color and the number of the reserved symbol in the reserved number display update process (FIG. 46, S1306). ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the opening process (S1540) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this opening process (S1540).

In the opening process (FIG. 88, S1540), first, it is determined whether or not it is 1 minute or less until the time production start period (S1541). When it is determined that it is 1 minute or less until the start period of the time effect (S1541: Yes), the volume in the jackpot game is set to a low volume (S1542).

In this way, when the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot game is received and it is less than 1 minute before the time production period is set, the volume of the jackpot game is set low, so that the jackpot game is in progress. This can be obscured by other players. Further, as will be described later, when the time production period is set after that, the volume of the jackpot game is set to the normal volume. Therefore, it is possible for other players to think that the jackpot game has started due to the time production period, and to make the player think that the jackpot game is likely to start during the time production period. Can be done.

On the other hand, in the process of S1541, if it is determined that there is a time longer than 1 minute until the time effect period (S1541: No), the process of S1543 is executed. In the process of S1543, it is determined whether the advance notice delay flag 223β is on (S1543). When it is determined that the advance notice delay flag 223β is on (S1543: Yes), a display advance notice display command for setting the advance notice display of the special school of fish is set (S1544). Set the display opening command (S1545). The notice delay flag 223β is set to off (S1546). On the other hand, in the process of S1543, when it is determined that the advance notice delay flag 223β is off (S1543: No), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the synchronous effect management process 2 (S1330) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the synchronous effect management process 2 (S1330). In the synchronous effect management process 2 (FIG. 89, S1330) in the fourth embodiment, the processes S1730 and S1731 are added to the synchronous effect management process (FIGS. 56, S1314) in the first embodiment. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed.

After executing the process of S1707, the effect change process 2 (S1730) is executed. The effect change process 2 (S1730) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the effect change process 2 (S1730).

In the effect change process 2 (FIG. 90, S1730), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing (S1731). When it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S1731: Yes), it is determined whether the result of determining whether the special symbol is changing is a big hit (S1732). When it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is a big hit (S1732: Yes), it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time is 3 seconds or less (S1733).

When it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is 3 seconds or less (S1733: Yes), the advance notice delay flag 223β is set to ON (S1734). After that, this process ends. on the other hand. If it is determined in the process of S1733 that the remaining fluctuation time is larger than 3 seconds (S1733: No), a display notice display command indicating the display of the special school of fish is set (S1735).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1731 when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S1731: No), or in the processing of S1732, when it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is incorrect (S1732: No), S1736. Executes the processing of. In the process of S1736, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (S1736). When it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S1736: Yes), the volume setting in the jackpot game is set to the normal volume (S1737). After that, the process of S1735 is executed.

In this way, when the time production period is set and it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress, the volume setting is set to the normal volume, so that the start of the jackpot game is 1 minute of the time production period setting. If it is within the front, the volume is set to low volume, so the volume will be returned to the normal volume, and other players started the jackpot game based on the time production period being set. Can make you think. Therefore, it is possible to make other players think that the jackpot game is likely to be started when the time production period is set, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the jackpot for the time production period. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the time production period will be set, and can prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

On the other hand, in the process of S1736, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S1736: No), this process is terminated.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 99. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the display mode of each mode displayed in the fixed time of each background mode is set based on the fixed time, and then, based on the elapse of the SW effective time, at that time. The case of setting the display mode indicated by the addition command corresponding to the set background mode has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the display mode of each background mode displayed in the fixed time is set based on the number of reserved pieces, and then the addition time is set until the fixed time elapses. It is different from the first embodiment in that it is configured to set the table mode corresponding to each background mode. The illustration and description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment>
In the fifth embodiment, the contents of the special figure 1 variation pattern selection table of the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. As shown in FIGS. 91 to 92, in the fifth embodiment, the addition command is not set when the addition time is 0 seconds with respect to the first embodiment. Further, it differs from the first embodiment in that the fluctuation time, SW effective time, fixed time, and addition time of the super reach jackpot fluctuation patterns B1 to B2 and the super reach deviation fluctuation patterns B1 to B2 are changed. Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment. Further, an addition data transfer flag 233m is added to the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 according to the fifth embodiment. Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment.

The addition data transfer flag 233m is a flag for determining whether or not the transfer of display data corresponding to the addition time has been started. The addition data transfer flag 233m is set to ON in the process of S2432 of the addition command process 2 (FIG. 99, S2430) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment. Further, it is set to off in the process of S2441.

<Regarding the control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described.

The command determination process 3 (S1340) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 3 (S1340). In the command determination process 3 (FIG. 94, S1340) in the fifth embodiment, the process of S1560 is added to the command determination process (FIG. 47, S1311) in the first embodiment. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed.

After the process of S1414 is executed, the process of S1560 is executed. In the process of S1560, a display addition command for notifying the display control device 114 of the information indicated by the received addition command is set (S1560).

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the variation display setting process 2 (S1350) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process 2 (S1350). In the variation display setting process 2 (FIG. 95, S1350) in the fifth embodiment, each process from S151 to S1513 is deleted from the variation display setting process (FIG. 54, S1312) in the first embodiment. .. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (FIG. 96, S1360) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S1360). In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (FIG. 96, S1360) in the fifth embodiment, the processing of S1920 is S1940 with respect to the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 59, S1307) in the first embodiment. It has been changed to processing.

After the process of S1919 is executed, the process of S1940 is executed. In the process of S1940, a display background command indicating the set background mode is set (S1940).

<Control processing by the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the command determination process 3 (S2320) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 99. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 3 (S2320). In the command determination process 3 (FIG. 97, S2320) in the fifth embodiment, the variation pattern command process (FIG. 65, S2405) is the variation pattern command with respect to the command determination process (FIG. 64, S2302) in the first embodiment. The addition command processing (FIG. 67, S2413) is changed to the addition command processing 2 (FIG. 99, S2430) in the processing (FIG. 98, S2420), respectively. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed.

Next, the variation pattern command process 2 (S2420) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process 2 (S2420). In the variation pattern command process 2 (FIG. 98, S2420) in the fifth embodiment, the processes of S2503 and S2504 are S2510 and S2510, respectively, as opposed to the variation pattern command process (FIGS. 65 (a) and S2405) in the first embodiment. It has been changed to each process of S2511. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed.

In the process of S2510, the display data table corresponding to the fixed time of each background mode is determined based on the number of reserved items and set in the display data table buffer (S2510). The variable display data table corresponding to the background mode stored in the background mode storage area is actively set (S2511).

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the addition command process 2 (FIG. 99, S2430) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the addition command process 2 (S2430).

In the addition command process 2 (FIG. 99, S2430), first, it is determined whether or not the addition data transfer flag 233m is on (S2431). When it is determined that the addition data transfer flag 233m is on (S2431: Yes), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the fixed time (S2435). When it is determined that the end timing of the fixed time is reached (S2435: Yes), the determined display data table is set in the display data table buffer (S2436). The transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer (S2437). The data table determination flag is set to on (S2438). Time data is set in the timekeeping counter based on the data table (S2439). Initialize the pointer (S2440). The data transfer flag 233m for addition is set to off (S2441).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2431 that the data transfer flag 233m for addition is off (S2341: No), the display data table is determined based on the received command and the fluctuation pattern, and the symbol information is set. (S2432). The transfer of the moving image data set in the display data table is started (S2433). The data transfer flag 233m for addition is set to ON (S2434).

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the fixed time variable display, the variable display data is set for each background mode based on the number of reserved pieces, and then, in the addition time until the fixed time elapses. Since the variable display data to be set is set, the amount of data set at the start of the variable display can be reduced. Therefore, the control load at the start of fluctuation can be reduced, and problems such as processing omission can be suppressed.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 102. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an RTC 292 that is operated by a built-in battery, time is timed, and a variation display effect selected for each time is produced based on the timed data. The case where it was configured to be different was explained. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is configured to input the power supplied from the pachinko machine 10 to the RTC 292, and when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the power is supplied to the RTC 292. It was configured to. Further, the setting switch 291 is configured to be rotatable and driven by a motor so that the setting can be switched by controlling the pachinko machine 10, which is different from the first embodiment.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment>
The electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 101. FIG. 100A is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the RTC 292 connected to the voice lamp control device 113. A voltage of 5 V from the power supply device 290 is connected to the power input unit of the RTC 292 via the diode D1. Further, the 5V battery 292a of the RTC 292 is also connected to the power input unit via a predetermined resistor. With this configuration, when voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115, power is supplied to the RTC292 from the pachinko machine 10, and when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is off, the battery is used. It is switched so that the required power is supplied from 292a.

Therefore, the operating time of the battery 292a can be reduced, and the power consumption of the battery 292a can be further suppressed. Therefore, the RTC292 can be operated for a long period of time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (b), the setting switch 291 is rotatably configured by a changeover motor 293 composed of a stepping motor. With this configuration, when the power of the battery 292a of the RTC 292 falls below a predetermined value, the setting switch 291 can be rotated to automatically change the setting to prohibit the use of the RTC 292. Therefore, it is possible to save the trouble of setting appropriately on the game store side, and it is possible to reduce the maintenance work.

Next, the time setting process 2 (S1230) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the time setting process 2 (FIG. 102, S1230).

In the time setting process 2 (FIG. 102, S1230), first, it is determined whether the setting switch 291 is 1 or 3 (S1221). If the setting of the setting switch 291 is 1 or 3, time information is acquired from RTC292 (S1222). It is determined whether the acquired time information is within the deadline data (in the present embodiment, within 6 years from the predetermined date).

When it is determined that the acquired time data is within the deadline (S1223: Yes), the time effect execution flag 223m is set to ON (S1224). Based on the acquired time information, the preparation period and the time production period are calculated and set in the set time storage area 223n (S1225).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired time information is not within the deadline data, that is, 6 years or more have passed (S1223: No), the switching motor 293 is operated so that the setting switch 291 becomes 2. Set (S1226). Here, specifically, since the setting switch 291 is set so that the setting is switched one by one every time the setting switch 291 is rotated 90 degrees, when switching from the setting 1 to the setting 2, the setting switch 291 is rotated 90 degrees forward. The stepping motor, which is the switching motor 293, is operated. Further, in order to switch from the setting 3 to the setting 2, the stepping motor, which is the switching motor 293, is operated so as to rotate 270 degrees forward.

As a result, the setting 2 is set so that the function of the RTC292 is disabled as shown in FIG. 26B and the variable display number is switched to the display. Therefore, when the expiration date of the battery 292a of the RTC292, 6 years, has passed, the function of the RTC292 is automatically disabled, so that the time production period and the like can be set in a state where the timekeeping data is not accurate due to insufficient power. It is possible to suppress a problem that the pachinko machine 10 is executed and cannot be synchronized with the other pachinko machine 10.

In the present embodiment, when the setting 1 or the setting 3 is set, the setting 2 is automatically set when the deadline data elapses, but the setting is not limited to this, and the setting 1 is not limited to the setting 1. The switching motor 293 may be operated to switch to the setting 2 and the setting 3 when the setting 3 is set. With this configuration, it is possible to configure only the function of RTC292 without changing the setting of the display of the total number of fluctuations.

In addition to the configuration of this embodiment, if the setting switch is changed on the hall side, a retry is performed to adjust to the correct setting (matching the setting using RTC292 even though 6 years or more have passed). A process of executing the operation by the switching motor 293 may be added. In this case, it may be configured to operate immediately by constantly monitoring that the setting has been changed at predetermined time intervals (for example, every hour). With this configuration, it is possible for the hall side to easily notice that the expiration date of RTC292 has passed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the expiration date data of the date when 6 years have passed from the preset setting period is determined, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a determination means for determining the voltage value of the battery 292a is provided. The setting switch 291 may be automatically switched when the voltage value becomes equal to or less than a predetermined predetermined voltage (for example, 3.3 V or less). With this configuration, the state of the battery 292a of the RTC 292 can be discriminated and switched.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 112. The pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment describes a configuration in which the player can change the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the touch switch 290 provided on the upper plate 17 of the pachinko machine 10. did. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the variable display device unit 80 provided on the game board 60 is provided with a board-side touch sensor 294 composed of an optical touch sensor. The board-side touch sensor 294 is provided above the third symbol display device 81, and is provided on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 on the left side of the board and on the right side of the pachinko machine 10. It is composed of a touch sensor 294b.

The board-side touch sensor 294 turns on the board-side left touch sensor 294a when the player holds his hand over the left side of the main display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 through the glass unit 16, and displays the third symbol. When a hand is held over the right side of the main display area Dm of the device, the panel side right touch sensor 294b is turned on. As will be described in detail later, the board-side touch sensor 294 brings the hands close to each other so as to point the display modes of the cards and the like displayed on the left and right sides of the third symbol display device 81 through the glass unit 16 with a finger or the like. You can choose. Further, by holding a hand over the glass unit 16, either the panel-side left touch sensor 294a or the panel-side right touch sensor 294b of the panel-side touch sensor 294 is turned on, as shown in FIG. 104 (b). Performs a production that moves a school of fish from right to left.

<About the display effect using the touch sensor in the seventh embodiment>
A display effect using the frame-side touch sensor 290 and the board-side touch sensor 294 displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 105.

A notice of fish school charge using the frame-side touch sensor 290 and the board-side touch sensor 294 will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 (a) to 104 (c). Normally, when the main symbol is in the reach display mode, the fish school notice display mode in which the school of fish (school of fish) is displayed so as to swim from right to left of the third symbol display device 81 is the notice shown in FIG. As set in the selection table A222e (see FIG. 25A), this is a notice display mode that is easily selected when the hit / fail determination result is a big hit. Here, the fish school charge notice is also configured so that it is easier to select when the result of the hit / miss judgment is a big hit than when it is a miss. Although not shown, the fish school charge notice effect may also be set to be selected by replacing the fish school notice with the fish school charge notice in the notice selection table A222e (see FIG. 25A).

When the fish school charge notice is selected as shown in FIG. 104 (a), the main symbol of the changing special symbol 1 is reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the third symbol display device 81. Then, the text "Collect fish with the touch sensor on the frame! Reach with 5 or more fish !!" is displayed, and the player holds his hand over the touch sensor 290 on the frame to turn it on and collect the fish. Then, when the number is 5 or more, a character notifying that the reach is reached is displayed.

After that, when the player holds his / her hand over the touch sensor 290 of the frame as shown in FIG. 104 (b), a display mode in which the fish gather at the right end of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed based on the holding time. .. When the number of fish is 5 or more, the main symbol is displayed in the reach display mode. In that state, when the hand is held over the board-side touch sensor 294 (either the board-side left touch sensor 294a or the board-side right touch sensor 294b) to turn it on, a school of fish gathered as shown in FIG. 3 The symbol display device 81 is displayed in a variable manner as if swimming from right to left.

In the present embodiment, when the board-side touch sensor 294 is turned on, the school of fish gathered is varied and displayed from right to left, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the board-side touch sensor 294 is turned on. The value of the effect counter 223k may be acquired based on the above, the winning / failing determination may be executed, and when the winning is won, the school of fish may be variablely displayed from the right to the left of the third symbol display device 81. In this case, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol being changed is a hit, it is configured so that it is more likely to be judged as a hit than a hit, and the school of fish is displayed in a variable manner to increase the degree of expectation for a big hit. It is possible to notify the player.

The player can also turn on the board-side touch sensor 294 by moving the school of fish to the third symbol display device 81 so as to fluctuate from right to left with his / her own hand, as if he / she were himself / herself. Based on the movement of the hand, it can be made to appear as if the school of fish fluctuated. In addition, by executing a lottery to change the display of the school of fish each time the board-side touch sensor 290 is turned on, the player moves his / her hand many times to turn on the board-side touch sensor 294. After turning on the times, the player can be surprised by winning the lottery and displaying the school of fish in a variable manner.

Next, with reference to FIG. 105, a display mode of the card notice, which is a notice effect using the frame-side touch sensor 290 and the board-side touch sensor, will be described. In FIG. 105A, the card notice is selected, and the changing special symbol is reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the third symbol display device 81. Two cards are displayed on the left and right, and a triangular cursor is displayed below one of them. In addition, the characters "Move the cursor with your finger and select a card !!" are displayed, and a notification is executed to urge the player to move the cursor with his finger. Here, the card A displayed in FIG. 105A is arranged below the board-side left touch sensor 294a, and the card B is arranged below the board-side right touch sensor 294b.

As a result, when the card A is pointed through the glass unit 16, the left touch sensor 294a on the board side is turned on and the cursor moves below the card A. on the other hand. When the card B is pointed through the glass unit 16, the right touch sensor 294b on the board side is turned on and the display is controlled so that the cursor moves below the card B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105 (a), the character "determined by the frame side touch sensor" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the selected card is turned on by turning on the frame side touch sensor 290. The card is determined, the selected card is turned over, and the message written on the card is displayed, as shown in FIG. 105 (b). In the example shown in FIG. 105 (b), the characters "reach!" Notifying that the changing special symbol is in the reach display mode are displayed.

It should be noted that a plurality of notification contents are set, for example, it is set to be a "big hit" for notifying that the hit / fail judgment result of the changing special symbol is a big hit, or to be easily selected when it is a big hit. , Characters such as "Intense heat !!" are displayed to notify the player that the expectation for the big hit is high. This character is selected in advance when the card notice is selected, and the same notice display mode is displayed regardless of whether the card A or the card B is selected. In the card notice, if the player does not select the card, the card notice is erased after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed without displaying the contents of the card.

Further, in the present embodiment, the contents of the card are not displayed when the card notice is not selected, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the contents of the card on which the cursor is located are automatically displayed to the player after a predetermined time has elapsed. It may be configured to be displayed.

<About the electrical configuration in the 7th embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 107. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, a panel-side touch sensor 294 electrically connected to the input / output port of the voice lamp control device 113 is added, and a frame-side time counter is added to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. 223γ and the board side time counter 223δ are added respectively. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 103, the panel-side touch sensor 294 is provided with transmissive sensors on the left and right sides of the center frame 86 of the variable display unit 80 toward the glass unit 16. The board-side touch sensor 294 is a board-side left touch sensor 294a arranged on the upper left side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and a board-side right arranged on the upper part on the right side of the display area on the third symbol display device 81. It is composed of a touch sensor 294b. When the panel side touch sensor 294 holds a hand over the left side portion of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 through the glass unit 16, the panel side left touch sensor 294a turns on and holds the hand over the right portion of the display area. The right touch sensor 294b on the board side is arranged so as to turn on. Further, the panel-side left touch sensor 294a and the panel-side right touch sensor 294b are configured to be turned on when a hand is held over the central portion of the display area.

Next, referring to FIG. 107, the frame-side time counter 223γ of the RAM 203 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment is a counter for measuring the time when the touch sensor 290 on the frame side is turned on. is there. The frame-side time counter 223γ is added one by one by the processing of S1967 of the sensor execution processing (FIG. 110, S1954) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The board-side time counter 223δ is a counter for measuring the time when the board-side touch sensor 294 is turned on. The board-side time counter 223δ is added one by one by the processing of S1974 of the sensor effect processing (FIGS. 110, S1954) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment.

<Regarding the control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 108 to 112, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment will be described.

The frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1370) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1370). The frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (FIG. 108, S1370) in the seventh embodiment is a sensor input process (FIG. 60) with respect to the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 59, S1307) in the first embodiment. , S1905) has been changed to sensor input processing 2 (FIG. 109, S1950), and special operation processing (FIG. 112, S1960) has been added. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 109, in one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (FIG. 108, S1370) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment. A certain sensor input process 2 (S1950) will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the sensor input process 2 (S1950).

In the sensor input process 2 (FIG. 109, S1950), first, it is determined whether the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r is larger than 0 (S1951). When it is determined that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r is 0 (S1951: No), it is determined whether the advance notice effect display using the frame side touch sensor 290 or the board side touch sensor 294 is set (S1952). ). When it is determined that the notice effect display using the frame side touch sensor 290 or the board side touch sensor 294 is set (S1952: Yes), the frame side touch sensor 290 or the board set for the notice effect The sensor effective time of the side touch sensor 294 is set in the sensor effective time counter 223r (S1953). On the other hand, when it is determined that the advance notice effect display using the frame-side touch sensor 290 or the board-side touch sensor 294 is not set (S1952: No), this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S1951 that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r is greater than 0 (S1951: Yes), the sensor effect process is executed (S1954).

Next, the details of the sensor effect processing (S1954) will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing this sensor effect processing (S1954).

In the sensor effect processing (FIG. 110, S1954), first, is the effective time of the touch sensor 290 on the frame side, that is, is the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r corresponding to the touch sensor 290 on the frame side 0? Determine (S1961). When it is determined that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r corresponding to the touch sensor 290 on the frame side is 0 (S1961: No), the process of S1969 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r corresponding to the touch sensor 290 on the frame side is larger than 0 (S1961: Yes), the sensor effective time counter corresponding to the touch sensor 290 on the frame side is determined. 223r is subtracted and updated (S1962). Here, the time corresponding to the elapsed time, in the present embodiment, is subtracted by 1.

It is determined whether the touch sensor 290 on the frame side is on (S1963). When it is determined that the touch sensor 290 on the frame side is on (S1963: Yes), it is determined whether the selected (set) advance notice effect is a card advance notice effect (S1964). On the other hand, when it is determined that the touch sensor 290 on the frame side is off (S1963: No), the process of S1969 is executed. When it is determined that the card advance notice effect is produced (S1964: Yes), the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r corresponding to the touch sensor 290 on the frame side is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1966).

On the other hand, in the process of S1964, when it is determined that the selected advance notice effect is not the card advance notice effect (S1964: No), the frame side time counter 223γ is added by 1 (S1967). A display notice display command (shown) corresponding to the value of the frame-side time counter 223γ is set (S1968). Here, when the display control device 114 receives this display notice display command, a notice display data table corresponding to the value of the frame side time counter 223γ indicated by the display notice display command is set. For example, when the fish school charge notice shown in FIGS. 104 (a) to 104 (c) is selected, the display data in which the fish are displayed up to the upper limit of the number of fish preset in the fish school charge notice. The table is set. For example, when the fish school charge notice in which the upper limit of the number of fish is set to 3 is selected, the number of fish is increased by 1 every time the value of the frame side time counter 223r is increased by 1 second. When the number reaches the upper limit of three, a display data table is set in which the number is maintained.

In the process in S1969, it is determined whether the panel-side touch sensor 294 is in the effective time, that is, whether the sensor effective time counter 223r corresponding to the panel-side touch sensor 294 has a value greater than 0 (S1969). If it is determined that the panel side touch sensor 294 is not in the effective time (S1969: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the panel-side touch sensor 294 is in the effective time (S1969: Yes), the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r corresponding to the panel-side touch sensor 294 is subtracted and updated (S1970). It is determined whether the panel side touch sensor 294 is on (S1971). When it is determined that the panel side touch sensor 294 is off (S1971: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the board-side touch sensor 294 is on (S1971: Yes), it is determined whether the selected advance notice effect is a card advance notice effect (S1972). When it is determined that the card advance notice effect is selected (S1972: Yes), the sensor selection process is executed (S1973). The sensor selection process (S1973) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 111, but a process for selecting a card is executed in the card advance notice effect.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1972 that the card advance notice effect is not selected (S1972: No), the board-side time counter 223δ is added by 1 (S1974). A display notice display command corresponding to the value of the board-side time counter 223δ (indicating the value of the board-side time counter 223δ) is set. Here, the value of the board-side time counter 223δ is reset to the initial value of 0 based on the setting of the display notice display command. When the display control device 114 receives this display notice display command, the display control device 114 is set to move and display the school of fish from the left to the right of the display area (S1975).

Next, the sensor selection process (S1973) in the sensor effect process (FIG. 110, S1954) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing this sensor selection process (S1973).

In the sensor selection process (FIG. 111, S1973), first, it is determined whether or not the panel-side right touch sensor 294b is on (S1981). When it is determined that the right touch sensor 294b on the board side is on (S1981: Yes), a display command for displaying the cursor on the right side is set (S1982). On the other hand, in the process of S1981, when it is determined that the board-side right touch sensor 294b is off (S1981: No), it is determined whether the board-side left touch sensor 294a is on (S1983). When it is determined that the left touch sensor 294a on the board side is on (S1983: Yes), a display command for displaying the cursor on the left side is set (S1984). On the other hand, in the process of S1983, when it is determined that the left touch sensor 294a on the panel side is off (S1983: No), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 112, a special operation process (S1960) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing this special operation process (S1960). The special operation process (FIG. 112, S1960) in the seventh embodiment is the same as the process of S1907 to S1913, S1916 of the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 59, S1307) in the first embodiment. Since it is executed, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by performing the effect using the plurality of touch sensors, the player can be made to move and the boredom can be suppressed. Further, by configuring the touch sensor, the player can operate the display screen by pointing a finger or the like, and it is possible to enhance the feeling of participating in the game.

Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for displaying a variable display of a sequence of symbols consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is not provided. Things can be mentioned. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

Further, the configuration of each of the above embodiments may be configured to be implemented in whole or in combination.

Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments will be shown.

<Characteristic A group>
A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information necessary for executing a game lottery based on an entry port where a game ball can enter and a game ball entering the entry opening, and a lottery information acquisition means thereof. A winning / failing determination means that executes a winning / failing determination when the lottery condition is satisfied based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means, and a storage means that stores the lottery information at least until the lottery condition is satisfied. , A display means for displaying an identification symbol capable of identifying the number of lottery information stored by the storage means, a first state in which a game ball is likely to enter the ball entrance, and a game ball rather than the first state. The ball entry assisting means that can be changed to the second state that makes it difficult to enter the ball, and the ball entry assisting means are changed from the second state to the first state when the first condition is satisfied. When the first opening and the second condition are satisfied, the second opening in which the ball entry assisting means is changed from the second state to the first state so as to be more advantageous to the player than the first opening. At least the variable control means that is variable, and while the variable control means is variable to the second opening, the game ball enters the ball entry port, and the lottery information is stored in the storage means. If this is the case, the identification symbol different from the identification symbol due to the game ball entering the entry port while the number of lottery information is changed to the first opening by the player is displayed. A game machine A1 characterized by having a display control means capable of being displayed by the means.

According to the game machine A1, the lottery information necessary for executing the lottery of the game is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball enters the entrance where the game ball can enter. .. Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, the winning / failing determination is executed by the winning / failing determination means when the lottery condition is satisfied. The lottery information is stored by the storage means at least until the lottery conditions are satisfied. An identification symbol capable of identifying the number of lottery information stored by the storage means is displayed by the display means. It is varied by the ball entry assisting means into a first state in which the game ball is easy to enter into the ball entry port and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. When the first condition is satisfied, the first opening which is changed from the second state to the first state, and when the second condition is satisfied, the ball is entered so as to be more advantageous to the player than the first opening. The ball entry assisting means is changed by the variable control means from the second state to the first state. If a game ball enters the entry port and the lottery information is stored in the storage means while the variable control means is variable to the second opening, the number of the lottery information is given to the player. An identification symbol different from the identification symbol due to the game ball entering the entry port while being changed to the first opening is displayed on the display means by the display control means. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner of the number of game balls that have entered the ball entrance at the second opening and the lottery information is stored. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the second opening has been performed, and there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In order to determine the establishment of at least the first condition and the second condition based on the detection means capable of detecting the passage of the game ball and the detection means determining the passage of the game ball in the game machine A1. Discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the discrimination information of the above, a discrimination means for discriminating the discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination means for discriminating the establishment of the first opening or the second opening, and the acquisition means. The discrimination information storage means that stores the discrimination information acquired by the discriminant information at least until the discriminant condition is satisfied, and the discriminant information acquired by the discriminant information acquisition means is discriminated in advance before the discriminant condition is satisfied. When the establishment of the second opening is determined by the pre-determining means and the pre-determining means, the information is notified to the player before the ball entry assisting means is changed to the second opening. A game machine A2 characterized by having a notification means.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, the passage of the game ball is detected by the detecting means. Based on the detection means determining the passage of the game ball, the determination information acquisition means acquires at least the determination information for determining the establishment of the first condition and the second condition. Based on the establishment of the determination condition, the determination information acquired by the acquisition means is determined by the determination means whether the first opening or the second opening is established. The discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the discrimination information storage means at least until the discrimination condition is satisfied. Prior to the determination condition being satisfied, the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is discriminated in advance by the pre-discrimination means. When the establishment of the second opening is determined by the prior determination means, the information is notified to the player by the notification means before the ball entry assisting means is changed to the second opening. As a result, it is possible to know in advance about the second opening and prepare for the second opening. Therefore, there is an effect that the second opening can be effectively used.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the notification means is the same until the period when the ball entry assisting means is in the first state based on the determination of the establishment of the second opening by the prior determination means. It is characterized in that the first notification mode indicating the first state is notified, and the second notification mode indicating that the second state is changed is notified based on the change to the second state. The game machine A3.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machines A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the fact that the establishment of the second opening is determined by the prior determination means, the first notification mode indicating the first state is notified by the notification means until the period when the ball entry assisting means is in the first state. To. Further, based on the change to the second state, the notification means notifies the second notification mode indicating that the change has been made to the second state. As a result, the player can recognize the state of the ball entry assisting means by notifying the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can suppress the problem of overlooking that the old / new assisting means is the second opening.

In the game machine A3, as the first notification mode, the notification means displays a first notification symbol indicating that the ball entry assisting means is in the first state on the display means, and as the second notification mode. The gaming machine A4, characterized in that the display means displays a second notification symbol indicating that the ball entry assisting means is in the second state.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A3, the following effects are played. That is, as the first notification mode, the first notification symbol indicating that the ball entry assisting means is in the first state is displayed on the display means by the notification means. Further, as a second notification mode, a second notification symbol indicating that the ball entry assisting means is in the second state is displayed on the display means by the notification means. As a result, the player can recognize whether the ball entry assisting means is in the first state or the second state by the display means. Therefore, there is an effect that more information can be obtained than the display means and the game can be facilitated.

In any of the game machines A1 to A4, based on the determination of the establishment of the second opening by the advance determination means, the notification means before the information is notified by the notification means. The gaming machine A5, characterized in that it has a prior notification means for notifying an advance notification mode for notifying that notification is to be performed.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A4, the information is not notified by the notification means based on the determination of the establishment of the second opening by the prior determination means. In advance, since the advance notification mode for notifying that the notification is performed by the notification means is notified by the advance notification means, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player overlooks that the second opening has been made. ..

<Characteristic B group>
A hit / fail determination means for executing a hit / fail judgment based on the establishment of a start condition, a display means for displaying an identification symbol indicating a hit / fail judgment result by the hit / miss judgment means, and a dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol. Timekeeping is performed on a gaming machine having a dynamic display mode determining means for determining and a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player based on the hit / fail determination result. When the timekeeping means capable of discriminating the timekeeping means, the timekeeping data discriminating means for discriminating the timekeeping data by the timekeeping means, and the timekeeping data discriminating means determine that the value is a predetermined set value, the dynamic display mode determining means The dynamic display mode to be determined is different from other periods. The effect period setting for setting the specific period in which the dynamic display mode is determined and the preparation period for starting the specific period before the specific period. The dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode, which has the means and can be determined by the dynamic display mode determining means outside the specific period, is set to be shorter than the preparation period. A game machine B1 characterized by this.

According to the game machine B1, the hit / fail determination is executed by the hit / miss determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. An identification symbol indicating the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / miss determination means is displayed by the display means. The dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. Based on the hit / fail determination result, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. The timed data by the timed means capable of measuring is determined by the timed data discriminating means. When it is determined by the timekeeping data discriminating means that the value is a predetermined setting value, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is determined to be a dynamic display mode different from other periods. A specific period and a preparation period for starting the specific period before the specific period are set by the effect period setting means. The dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode, which can be determined by the dynamic display mode determining means outside the specific period, is set to be shorter than the preparation period. Thereby, in the preparation period before the specific period is started, the dynamic display mode started before the preparation period can be ended. Therefore, there is an effect that the specific period can be prepared and the specific period can be started.

In the game machine B1, the timekeeping means measures the elapsed time since the power is turned on to the game machine, and the timekeeping data discriminating means means that the timekeeping data by the timekeeping means is turned on to the game machine. The game machine B2 is characterized in that it is determined that the set value is obtained when it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B1, the following effects are played. That is, in the timekeeping means, the elapsed time since the power is turned on to the game machine is timed by the timekeeping means. When it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the power of the timekeeping means was turned on to the game machine, it is determined by the timekeeping data discrimination manual judgment that it is a set value. As a result, by turning on the power to a plurality of game machines at the same time, the game machines can time the same elapsed time. Therefore, it is possible to set a specific period in synchronization with a plurality of the same gaming machines. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to determine the dynamic display mode synchronized between the game machines.

In the game machine B1, the timekeeping means is configured to be able to time the time even when the power is not turned on to the game machine, and the timekeeping data discriminating means obtained from the timekeeping means. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that when it is determined that the data is at a predetermined set time, it is determined that the data is the set value.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B1, the following effects are played. That is, even when the power of the game machine is not turned on, the time is timed by the timekeeping means. When it is determined that the timekeeping data acquired from the timekeeping means has a predetermined set time, the timekeeping data discriminating means determines that it is a set value. As a result, by setting the same time as a set value between the same game machines in advance, the game machines can be synchronized with each other and set to a specific period. Therefore, there is an effect that the dynamic display mode synchronized between the game machines can be determined.

In any of the game machines B1 to B3, when the identification symbol is dynamically displayed, a notice effect executing means for executing a notice effect based on the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / fail determination means, and a notice effect executing means thereof. The preparation period is based on the advance notice effect determining means for determining the advance notice effect to be executed from among a plurality of advance notice effects based on the result of the hit / fail determination and the preparation period set by the period setting means. The gaming machine B4 is characterized by having a prohibition means for prohibiting the execution of the advance notice effect.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B3, the following effect is played. That is, when the identification symbol is dynamically displayed, the notice effect is executed by the notice effect execution means based on the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / fail determination means. The advance notice effect to be executed by the advance notice effect execution means is determined by the advance notice effect determining means from among a plurality of advance notice effects based on the result of the success / failure determination. Based on the fact that the preparation period has been set by the period setting means, the prohibition means is set to prohibit the execution of the advance notice effect during the preparation period. As a result, since the advance notice effect is not determined during the preparation period, it is possible to provide the player with an effect different from the normal time. Therefore, in the preparation period before the transition to the specific period, it is possible to provide the player with an effect different from the normal time, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the specific period is about to start. There is.

In the game machine B4, at least a specific advance notice effect is set for the plurality of advance notice effects, and the advance notice effect determining means is easier to determine the specific advance notice effect in the specific period than outside the specific period. A game machine B5 characterized by being.

According to the game machine B5, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects of the game machine B4. That is, at least a specific advance notice effect is set for the plurality of advance notice effects. In the specific period, the specific advance notice effect is more likely to be determined by the advance notice effect determination means than outside the specific period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the specific period is reached by the specific advance notice effect.

A game machine B6 in any of the game machines B1 to B5, wherein the set value is a plurality of set values set in advance.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects played by the game machines B1 to B5, since a plurality of set values are set in advance, there is an effect that a specific period can be set a plurality of times.

<Characteristic C group>
Based on the establishment of the starting condition, the winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination, and when the winning / failing determination means determines the winning, a privilege more advantageous to the player than the first hit and the first hit is given. The hit type determining means for determining at least the second hit, the display means for displaying the identification symbol indicating the hit / fail determination result by the hit / fail determination means, and the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine having a dynamic display mode determining means for determining, and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the hit / fail determination result is displayed with an identification symbol indicating a hit. , The timekeeping means capable of timing, the timekeeping data discriminating means for discriminating the timekeeping data by the timekeeping means, and the dynamic display mode when it is determined by the timekeeping data discrimination that the value is a predetermined set value. The dynamic display mode determined by the determining means is different from other periods. Period setting for setting a specific period in which the dynamic display mode is determined and a preparation period for starting the specific period before the specific period. A dynamic display determining means for determining whether or not the dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed on the display means when the specific period is set by the means and the period setting means, and a dynamic display determining means thereof. A second hit determination means for determining whether or not the dynamically displayed hit / fail determination result is the second hit based on the determination that the dynamic display is performed, and the second hit determination means. It has a notification means for notifying the player of the notification mode indicating that the second hit is obtained before the identification symbol is stopped and displayed when the second hit is determined. A game machine C1 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine C1, the hit / fail determination is executed by the hit / miss determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. When it is determined to be a hit by the hit / fail determination means, at least the first hit and the second hit in which the player is given a privilege more advantageous than the first hit are determined by the hit type determining means. An identification symbol indicating the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / miss determination means is displayed by the display means. The dynamic display mode of the identification symbol displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. When the hit / fail determination result is displayed with an identification symbol indicating a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. The timed data by the timed means capable of measuring is determined by the timed data discriminating means. When it is determined by the timekeeping data discrimination that it is a predetermined set value, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is specified so that the dynamic display mode different from other periods is determined. The period and the preparation period for starting the specific period before the specific period are set by the period setting means. When a specific period is set by the period setting means, the dynamic display determining means determines whether the dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed on the display means. Based on the fact that the dynamic display is determined to be dynamically displayed by the dynamic display determination means, the second hit determination means determines whether the dynamically displayed hit / fail determination result is the second hit. .. When the second hit determination means determines that the second hit is achieved, the notification means notifies the player of the notification mode indicating that the second hit is obtained, before the identification symbol is stopped and displayed. To. As a result, by setting the specific period, the player can determine whether or not it is the second hit earlier than usual. Therefore, the specific period can be made more advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that it will be set in a specific period, and there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the game machine C1, the game machine C2 is characterized in that the notification means displays a symbol indicating that it is the second hit on the display means.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C1, a symbol indicating that the second hit is displayed on the display means is displayed by the notification means, so that the player can easily understand the second hit. It has the effect of being able to be recognized.

In the game machine C1 or C2, at least a common hit identification symbol indicating that the identification symbol is the first hit or the second hit and a dedicated hit identification symbol indicating that the identification symbol is the second hit are set. When the common hit identification symbol is stopped and displayed, the determination notification mode indicating the hit type determined by the hit type determining means is notified during the privilege game executed thereafter. A game machine C3 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1 or C2, the following effect is played. That is, at least a common hit identification symbol indicating that it is a first hit or a second hit and a dedicated hit identification symbol indicating that it is a second hit are set in the identification symbol. When the common hit identification symbol is stopped and displayed, the determination notification mode indicating the hit type determined by the hit type determining means is notified during the privilege game executed thereafter. As a result, even during the privilege game, the game can be played with the expectation for the second hit. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

<Feature D group>
The main control means for executing the control of the game, the sub-control means for executing the control of the game based on the control signal from the main control means, and the display means, and the main control means is a start condition. Based on the establishment, the pass / fail determination means for executing the pass / fail determination and the dynamic display time for determining the dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol indicating the pass / fail determination result by the pass / fail determination means on the display means. A dynamic display time determining means for determining, and a dynamic display information generating means for generating a dynamic display information signal for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means. , A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the stop display of the identification symbol indicating that the result of the success / failure determination by the hit / fail determination means is a hit. The slave control means determines the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol based on the dynamic display information signal, and the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. In a gaming machine having a display control means for displaying, the slave control means is identified by an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation determination means that determines whether the operation means has been operated, and the operation determination means. When the symbol is dynamically displayed, it has a switching means for switching the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol to another dynamic display mode based on the determination that the operation means has been operated. The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means of the slave control means includes a switchable period set to be switchable to another dynamic display mode by the switching means and another dynamic display mode. A switching prohibition period during which switching is prohibited is set, and the dynamic display information signal sets the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means to the first time and the first time thereof. The dynamic display mode determining means is determined based on the first dynamic display mode and the second time, which are determined based on the first time, and are composed of signals separately shown by the second time to be added. The second dynamic display mode is determined, and the switchable period is set within the period during which the first dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed. Machine D1.

According to the game machine D1, the control of the game is executed by the main control means. The control of the game is executed by the subordinate control means based on the control signal from the main control means. In the main control means, the hit / fail determination is executed by the hit / fail determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. The dynamic display time is determined by the dynamic display time determining means for determining the dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol indicating the result of the hit / fail determination on the display means. The dynamic display information generating means generates a dynamic display information signal for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means. The privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the stop display of the identification symbol indicating that the result of the success / failure determination by the hit / fail determination means is a hit. In the slave control means, the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the dynamic display information signal. The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is displayed by the display control means. Whether or not the operating means that can be operated by the player has been operated is determined by the operation determining means. When the identification symbol is dynamically displayed by the operation determination means, the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol is switched to another dynamic display mode by the switching means based on the determination that the operation means has been operated. .. An operation in which a switchable period set to be switchable to another dynamic display mode by the switching means and a switching prohibition period in which switching to another dynamic display mode is prohibited are determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. Each is set to the target display mode. The dynamic display information signal is a signal showing the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means separately for the first time and the second time added to the first time, and is a dynamic display information signal. Is configured. In the dynamic display mode determining means, the first dynamic display mode determined based on the first time and the second dynamic display mode determined based on the second time are determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, respectively. .. As the switchable period, the switchable period is set within the period in which the first dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed. Therefore, since the first dynamic display mode set within the switchable period is configured to be set separately, there is an effect that the control load for setting the first dynamic display mode to be switched can be reduced. ..

In the game machine D1, the switching means switches a plurality of preset setting modes based on the determination that the operating means has been operated by the operation determining means, and corresponds to the switched setting modes. The process of switching to the dynamic display mode is executed, and the dynamic display mode determining means switches to the setting mode switched by the switching means as the first dynamic display mode based on the first time. The corresponding dynamic display mode is determined respectively, and the second dynamic display mode is determined based on the set setting mode and the second time based on the end of the switchable period. A game machine D2 characterized by being.

According to the game machine D2, based on the determination that the operation means has been operated by the operation determination means, a plurality of preset setting modes are switched, and a dynamic display mode corresponding to the switched setting modes is used. The process of switching to is executed by the switching means. The dynamic display mode determining means determines, as the first dynamic display mode, the dynamic display mode corresponding to the setting mode switched by the switching means based on the first time, and the switchable period has expired. Based on this, the second dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the set setting mode and the second time. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load for setting the second dynamic display mode at the start of fluctuation can be reduced.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the switching means switches the setting modes in order in a predetermined order based on the operation of the operating means by the operation determining means. Machine D3.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machines D1 or D2, the setting modes are sequentially switched by the switching means in a predetermined order based on the operation of the operating means by the operation determining means. By operating the player, there is an effect that it is possible to easily understand which setting mode is to be switched to next.

<Feature E group>
A plurality of effect determining means for executing a hit / fail determination based on the establishment of a start condition, an effect executing means for executing an effect based on the result of the hit / fail determination by the pass / fail determination means, and a plurality of effects executed by the effect executing means. In a gaming machine having a production determining means determined from the production and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning / failing determination by the hit / fail determination means being a hit. While the effect is being executed by the effect executing means, a plurality of notice effect executing means for executing the notice effect based on the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / fail determination means, and a plurality of notice effects executed by the notice effect executing means. The notice effect determination means determined from the notice effect, the first operation means that can be operated by the player, the second operation means different from the first operation means, and the first operation means and the second operation means. The operation discriminating means for determining that the operation has been performed is provided, and the plurality of advance notice effects are operations in which the content of the advance notice effect is changed based on the operation by the first operation means and the second operation means. A notice effect is included, and at least a first period in which the operation by the first operation means is possible is set in the operation notice effect, and the operation by the second operation means is performed during the first period. A game machine E1 characterized by having an invalidating means for invalidating.

According to the game machine E1, the hit / fail determination is executed by the hit / miss determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. An effect based on the result of the hit / miss determination by the hit / miss determination means is executed by the effect execution means. The effect executed by the effect executing means is determined by the effect determining means rather than a plurality of effects. Based on the result of the winning / failing determination by the winning / failing determination means, the privileged game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privileged game executing means. While the effect is being executed by the effect executing means, the advance notice effect based on the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / fail determination means is executed by the notice effect execution means. The notice effect executed by the notice effect execution means is determined by the notice effect determination means from the plurality of notice effects. It is determined by the operation determining means that the first operating means that can be operated by the player and the second operating means that is different from the first operating means have been operated. The plurality of advance notice effects include an operation advance notice effect in which the content of the advance notice effect changes based on the operation by the first operation means and the second operation means. At least a first period during which the operation by the first operating means can be performed is set in the operation notice effect, and the operation by the second operating means is invalidated by the invalid means during the first period. As a result, the operation is set to be invalid, so that the player can easily understand that the correct operation has not been performed. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

In the game machine E1, the first operating means has a pressing portion that can be pressed by the player, and the second operating means can detect that a part of the player's body is in contact with or close to each other. The game is characterized in that the player is arranged at a position where the detection unit can detect the player by pressing the pressing unit of the first operating means. Machine E2.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, the following effects are played. That is, the first operating unit is provided with a pressing portion that can be pressed by the player. In addition, the second operation unit is provided with a detection unit capable of detecting that a part of the player's body is in contact with or close to each other. When the player presses the pressing unit of the first operating means, the second operating means is arranged at a position where the player can be detected by the detecting unit. As a result, it is possible to detect both the first operating means and the second operating means, and it is possible for the player to perform an effect on the condition that both are detected. Therefore, there is an effect that a game machine that is easy for the player to play can be provided.

In the game machine E2, in the operation notice effect, the content of the notice effect changes based on the determination by the operation determination means that the detection unit of the second operation means has detected the detection for a predetermined time or longer. A game machine E3 characterized in that a notice production is included.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, the content of the advance notice effect changes based on the fact that the detection unit of the second operation means has detected the detection for a predetermined time or more by the operation determination means. Since the specific advance notice effect is included in the operation advance notice effect, it is possible to provide a novel effect by the player, and there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

In any of the game machines E1 to E3, the operation notice effect does not teach the instruction notice effect in which the instruction effect for teaching the operation timing of the first operation means is executed and the operation timing of the first operation means. A game machine E4 characterized in that at least a non-teaching notice effect is included.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E3, a teaching notice effect for instructing the operation timing of the first operating means is executed, and an operation timing of the first operating means is provided. Since the non-teaching notice effect that is not taught is included in at least the operation notice effect, the more the game is played, the easier it is to be able to display the non-teaching notice effect, and it is possible to make the player play the game more. It has the effect of being able to do it.

<Characteristic F group>
Based on the establishment of the start condition, the hit / fail determination means for executing the hit / fail judgment, the effect execution means for executing the effect indicating the result of the hit / fail judgment by the pass / fail determination means, and the effect content determination for determining the effect content by the effect execution means. A state in which power is not supplied to the game machine in the game machine having the means and the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game which is advantageous to the player based on the hit / fail determination result. However, a timekeeping means that has a power supply means that can supply power for a predetermined period and can measure time even when power is not supplied, a timekeeping data acquisition means that acquires timekeeping data from the timekeeping means, and a timekeeping data acquisition means. Based on the timekeeping data acquired by the timekeeping data acquisition means, the timekeeping control means that executes the control process related to the predetermined game and the acquisition data acquired by the timekeeping data acquisition means in a period shorter than the predetermined period. When the operating period determining means for determining whether or not the set operating period has passed and the operating period determining means determine that the operating period has elapsed, the control process by the timekeeping control means is prohibited. A gaming machine F1 characterized by having a prohibition setting means for the purpose of performing.

According to the game machine F1, the hit / miss determination is executed by the hit / miss determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. An effect indicating the result of the hit / miss determination by the hit / miss determination means is executed by the effect execution means. The effect content by the effect execution means is determined by the effect content determining means. Based on the hit / fail determination result, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. It has a power supply means capable of supplying electric power for a predetermined period even when the power is not supplied to the game machine, and the time is measured by the timing means even when the power is not supplied. Timekeeping data is acquired from the timekeeping means by the timekeeping data acquisition means. Based on the timekeeping data acquired by the timekeeping data acquisition means, the control process related to the predetermined game is executed by the timekeeping control means. The operating period determining means determines whether or not the operating period set for a period shorter than a predetermined period has elapsed from the acquired data acquired by the timekeeping data acquiring means. When it is determined by the operating period determining means that the operating period has elapsed, the control process by the timekeeping control means is prohibited by the prohibition setting means. As a result, the control process can be set to be prohibited by the timekeeping control means before the period during which the power supply means of the timekeeping means cannot supply power elapses. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that an erroneous control is executed based on an inaccurate timekeeping information due to a power shortage.

In the game machine F1, the timekeeping means is configured to be able to time the date and time, and the operating period is set at a date and time set in a period equal to or less than the predetermined period from the time when the game machine is manufactured. A game machine F2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F1, the following effects are played. That is, the date and time are timed by the timekeeping means. The operating period is set at a date and time set within a predetermined period or less from the time when the game machine is manufactured. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to further suppress the occurrence of a problem after a predetermined period has passed.

<Characteristic G group>
Based on the establishment of the start condition, the hit / fail determination means for executing the hit / fail judgment, the effect execution means for executing the effect indicating the result of the hit / fail judgment by the pass / fail determination means, and the effect content determination for determining the effect content by the effect execution means A state in which power is not supplied to the game machine in the game machine having the means and the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game which is advantageous to the player based on the hit / fail determination result. However, a timekeeping means that has a power supply means that can supply power for a predetermined period and can measure time even when power is not supplied, a timekeeping data acquisition means that acquires timekeeping data from the timekeeping means, and a timekeeping data acquisition means. A timekeeping control means that executes control processing related to a predetermined game based on the timekeeping data acquired by the timekeeping data acquisition means, and a power supply that discriminates information based on a voltage value supplied to the timekeeping means from the power supply means. It has a determination means and a prohibition means for prohibiting control by the timekeeping control means when the voltage value output from the power supply means is determined by the power supply determination means to be equal to or less than a predetermined set value. A game machine G1 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine G1, the hit / fail determination is executed by the hit / miss determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. An effect indicating the result of the hit / miss determination by the hit / miss determination means is executed by the effect execution means. The effect content by the effect execution means is determined by the effect content determining means. Based on the hit / fail determination result, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. It has a power supply means capable of supplying electric power for a predetermined period even when the power is not supplied to the game machine, and the time is measured by the timing means even when the power is not supplied. Timekeeping data is acquired from the timekeeping means by the timekeeping data acquisition means. Based on the timekeeping data acquired by the timekeeping data acquisition means, the control process related to the predetermined game is executed by the timekeeping control means. Information based on the voltage value supplied from the power supply means to the time measuring means is discriminated by the power supply discriminating means. When the voltage value output from the power supply means is determined by the power supply determination means to be equal to or less than a predetermined set value, the control by the timekeeping control means is prohibited by the prohibition means. As a result, when the voltage value supplied to the timekeeping means is equal to or less than the set value, the timekeeping control means sets the control process to prohibit, so that incorrect control is executed based on inaccurate timekeeping information due to power shortage. It has the effect of suppressing defects.

<Characteristic H group>
A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information necessary for executing a game lottery based on an entry port where a game ball can enter and a game ball entering the entry opening, and a lottery information acquisition means thereof. Dynamic display that dynamically displays the winning / failing judgment means that executes the winning / failing judgment when the lottery condition is established based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means, and the identification information indicating the winning / failing judgment result by the winning / losing judgment means A control means, a storage means for storing the lottery information, and a display means for displaying an identification symbol capable of identifying the number of lottery information stored by the storage means, at least until the lottery condition is satisfied. When the variable means that can be changed to the first state in which the game ball easily enters the ball entry port and the second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state and the first condition are satisfied. In addition, when the first opening and the second condition for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state are satisfied, the variable means is more advantageous to the player than the first opening. At least to the second opening that is variable from the second state to the first state, and to the entrance while being changed to the second opening by the variable control means. When a game ball enters and the identification information is dynamically displayed, the display means has a start information display control means for displaying a start display mode indicating the start of the dynamic display. A game machine H1 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine H1, the lottery information necessary for executing the lottery of the game is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball enters the entrance where the game ball can enter. .. Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, the winning / failing determination is executed by the winning / failing determination means when the lottery condition is satisfied. The identification information indicating the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / miss determination means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display control means. The lottery information is stored by the storage means at least until the lottery conditions are satisfied. An identification symbol capable of identifying the number of lottery information stored by the storage means is displayed by the display means. It is variable by the variable means to a first state in which the game ball is easy to enter the ball entry port and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. When the first condition is satisfied, the first opening and the second condition, which are changed from the second state to the first state by the variable means, are satisfied, so that the player is more advantageous than the first opening. It is variable by the variable control means to the second open, which is variable from the second state to the first state by the variable means. If a game ball enters the entrance and the identification information is dynamically displayed while the variable control means is variable to the second opening, a start display indicating the start of the dynamic display is displayed. The mode is displayed on the display means by the start information display control means. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the identification information based on the game ball entering the ball entrance is displayed while the second opening is changed. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the player will enter the ball at the second opening. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the game machine H1, the game ball is configured to be able to enter at all times, and the lottery information is always acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the entry of the game ball. , The lottery information acquired based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball entry port and the lottery information acquired based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball entry port at all times are individually stored. The lottery information stored in the storage means is such that the lottery condition is preferentially satisfied with the lottery information acquired based on the entry into the ball entrance, and the start information display control means While the second opening is set, the game ball enters the ball entry port, and the identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result based on the lottery information that always enters the ball entry port is dynamically displayed. If so, the gaming machine H2 is characterized in that the start display mode is displayed during the dynamic display.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H1, the following effects are played. That is, in the storage means, the lottery information acquired based on the entry of the ball into the entrance and the game ball are configured to be able to enter at all times, and the lottery information is acquired based on the entry of the game ball. The lottery information acquired based on the fact that the ball has entered the constant entry port acquired by the means is individually stored. In the lottery information stored in the storage means, the lottery conditions are satisfied with priority given to the lottery information acquired based on the entry into the ball entrance. When a game ball enters the entrance while the second opening is set, and identification information indicating a winning / failing judgment result based on the lottery information that always enters the entrance is dynamically displayed. The start display mode is displayed by the start information display control means during the dynamic display. Therefore, since the start display mode is displayed before the identification symbol entered in the second opening is dynamically displayed, the identification symbol based on the ball entered in the second opening is dynamically displayed in advance. It has the effect of notifying the player.

<Feature I group>
A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information necessary for executing a game lottery based on an entry port where a game ball can enter and a game ball entering the entry opening, and a lottery information acquisition means thereof. A winning / failing determination means that executes a winning / failing determination when the lottery condition is satisfied based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means, and a storage means that stores the lottery information at least until the lottery condition is satisfied. , A display means for displaying an identification symbol capable of identifying the number of lottery information stored by the storage means, a first state in which a game ball is likely to enter the ball entry port, and a game ball rather than the first state. A variable means that can be changed to a second state that makes it difficult to enter the ball, and a first opening that changes the variable means from the second state to the first state when the first condition is satisfied. When the second condition is satisfied, the variable means is at least variable to the second open, which is variable from the second state to the first state, so as to be more advantageous to the player than the first open. Judgment information that dynamically displays the control means, the determination means for determining the establishment of the first condition and the second condition based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery opportunity, and the determination information indicating the determination result by the determination means. The display means includes a display means and a display time determining means for determining a display time for dynamically displaying the determination information, and the display time determining means displays determination information indicating the second condition on the determination information display means. The gaming machine I1 is characterized in that a display time longer than the normal time is determined until the lottery opportunity is established a predetermined number of times based on the fact that the lottery has been performed.

According to the game machine I1, the lottery information necessary for executing the lottery of the game is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball enters the entrance where the game ball can enter. .. Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, the winning / failing determination is executed by the winning / failing determination means when the lottery condition is satisfied. The lottery information is stored by the storage means at least until the lottery conditions are satisfied. An identification symbol capable of identifying the number of lottery information stored by the storage means is displayed by the display means. It is variable by the variable means to a first state in which the game ball is easy to enter the ball entry port and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. When the first condition is satisfied, the variable means is changed from the second state to the first state. When the first opening and the second condition are satisfied, it is more advantageous to the player than the first opening. The variable means is varied by at least the variable control means to the second open, which is variable from the second state to the first state. Based on the establishment of the predetermined lottery opportunity, the establishment of the first condition and the second condition is determined by the determination means. Judgment information indicating the determination result by the determination means is displayed by the determination information display means. The display time for dynamically displaying the determination information is determined by the display time determining means. Based on the determination information indicating the second condition being displayed on the determination information display means, the display time determination means determines a display time longer than the normal time until the lottery opportunity is established a predetermined number of times. As a result, even if the second condition is continuously satisfied, the display time longer than the normal time is determined after the second opening, so that the identification symbol based on the lottery information stored in the storage means during that time is determined. Is dynamically displayed, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the number of lottery information stored in the storage means becomes too large.

<Characteristic J group>
A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information used for a game lottery based on an entry port where a game ball can enter, and a lottery information acquisition method based on the entry of the game ball into the entry opening. A storage means that stores the lottery information acquired by the means until at least the start condition is satisfied, and a discrimination symbol display means that individually displays a discrimination symbol corresponding to each of the lottery information stored in the storage means. , A hit / fail determination means for executing a hit / fail judgment based on the establishment of the start condition, a symbol display means for displaying an identification symbol indicating a hit / fail judgment result by the hit / miss judgment means, and a dynamic display of the identification symbol. When the lottery information is stored in the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the display mode and the storage means, a winning / failing determination is made based on the stored lottery information before the start condition is satisfied. Based on the advance hit / fail determination means to be executed, the discrimination symbol variable display means for varying the display mode of the discrimination symbol in a display mode capable of identifying the determination result by the prior hit / fail determination means, and the hit / fail determination result. A timekeeping means capable of measuring time in a game machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player, and a timekeeping data determination means for discriminating the timekeeping data by the timekeeping means. When it is determined by the timekeeping data determination that the value is a predetermined set value, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is different from that of other periods. The effect period setting means for setting at least the determined specific period and the preparation period for starting the specific period before the specific period, and the display mode indicating the specific pass / fail determination by the discrimination symbol variable means. It has a prohibition means for prohibiting the setting of the preparation period when the discrimination symbol is displayed and it is determined that the dynamic display of the identification symbol corresponding to the discrimination symbol ends within the preparation period. Characterized game machine J1.

According to the game machine J1, the lottery information used for the lottery of the game is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry port where the game ball can enter. The lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means is stored by the storage means at least until the start condition is satisfied. The discriminant symbol is individually displayed by the discriminant symbol display means corresponding to each lottery information stored in the storage means. Based on the establishment of the start condition, the hit / fail determination is executed by the hit / fail determination means. An identification symbol indicating the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / miss determination means is displayed by the symbol display means. The dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. When the lottery information is stored in the storage means, the winning / failing determination is determined by the advance winning / failing determination means based on the stored lottery information before the start condition is satisfied. The display mode of the discriminant symbol is changed by the discriminant symbol variable display means in a display mode in which the determination result by the prior hit / fail determination means can be identified. Based on the hit / fail determination result, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. The timed data by the timed means capable of measuring is determined by the timed data discriminating means. When it is determined by the timekeeping data discrimination that it is a predetermined set value, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is specified so that the dynamic display mode different from other periods is determined. The period and the preparation period for starting the specific period before the specific period are set at least by the effect period setting means. The setting of the preparation period is prohibited when the discrimination symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating a specific pass / fail judgment by the discrimination symbol variable means and it is determined that the dynamic display of the identification symbol corresponding to the discrimination symbol ends within the preparation period. Prohibited by means. As a result, it is possible to set a period in which the preparation period is not set, and it is possible to make the player predict the hit / fail determination result depending on whether or not the preparation period is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the playability can be further enhanced and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

<Characteristic K group>
A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information used for a game lottery based on an entry port where a game ball can enter, and a lottery information acquisition method based on the entry of the game ball into the entry opening. A storage means that stores the lottery information acquired by the means until at least the start condition is satisfied, and a discrimination symbol display means that individually displays a discrimination symbol corresponding to each of the lottery information stored in the storage means. , A hit / fail determination means for executing a hit / fail judgment based on the establishment of the start condition, a symbol display means for displaying an identification symbol indicating a hit / fail judgment result by the hit / miss judgment means, and a dynamic display of the identification symbol. While the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the display mode and the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means are displayed, the suggestion display mode suggesting the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / miss determination means. Is displayed on the display means, the suggestion display mode determining means for determining the suggestion display mode displayed by the suggestion display control means based on the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / fail determination means, and the storage means. When the lottery information is stored, prior to the start condition being satisfied, the pre-win / fail determination means for executing the win / fail judgment based on the stored lottery information and the determination result by the pre-win / fail determination means are displayed. A discriminant symbol variable display means that changes the display mode of the discriminant symbol in an identifiable display mode, and a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the hit / fail determination result. In the gaming machine having the above, it is determined that the time measuring means capable of measuring the time, the time measuring data discriminating means for discriminating the time measuring data by the time measuring means, and the preset value determined by the timed data discrimination. In this case, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is different from other periods in the specific period in which the dynamic display mode is determined, and the suggestion display mode before the specific period. The effect period setting means for setting at least the preparation period for prohibiting the display of the above and the suggestion display control means display the discrimination symbol in a display mode indicating a specific hit / fail judgment by the discrimination symbol variable means, and the discrimination symbol is displayed. When it is determined that the dynamic display of the identification symbol corresponding to the symbol starts the dynamic display within the preparation period and ends within the specific period, the suggestion display mode is displayed after the transition to the specific period. A game machine K1 characterized in that it is to be displayed.

According to the game machine K1, the lottery information used for the lottery of the game is acquired from the lottery information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry port where the game ball can enter. The lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means is stored by the storage means at least until the start condition is satisfied. The discriminant symbol is individually displayed by the discriminant symbol display means corresponding to each lottery information stored in the storage means. Based on the establishment of the start condition, the hit / fail determination is executed by the hit / fail determination means. An identification symbol indicating the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / miss determination means is displayed by the symbol display means. The dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. While the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is displayed, the suggestion display mode suggesting the result of the hit / fail determination by the pass / fail determination means is displayed on the display means by the suggestion display control means. The suggestion display mode displayed by the suggestion display control means is determined by the suggestion display mode determining means based on the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / miss determination means. When the lottery information is stored in the storage means, the winning / failing determination is executed by the advance winning / failing determination means based on the stored lottery information before the start condition is satisfied. The display mode of the discriminant symbol is changed by the discriminant symbol variable display means in a display mode in which the determination result by the prior hit / fail determination means can be identified. Based on the hit / fail determination result, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. The timed data by the timed means capable of measuring is determined by the timed data discriminating means. When it is determined by the timekeeping data discrimination that the value is a predetermined set value, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is specified so that the dynamic display mode different from other periods is determined. A period and a preparation period for prohibiting the display of the suggestion display mode before the specific period are set at least by the effect period setting means. In the suggestion display control means, the discrimination symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating a specific hit / fail judgment by the discrimination symbol variable means, and the dynamic display of the identification symbol corresponding to the discrimination symbol starts dynamically within the preparation period. When it is determined that the dynamic display ends within the specific period, the suggestion display mode is displayed by the suggestion display control means after the transition to the specific period. As a result, the suggestion display mode is displayed in a specific period, so that the player can expect the player to have a specific period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.
The game machine K2 is characterized in that, in the game machine K1, the suggestion display control means displays the suggestion display mode on the display means when the transition to the specific period is triggered.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine K1, the following effects are played. That is, the suggestion display mode is displayed on the display means by the suggestion display control means when the transition to the specific period is triggered. Therefore, since the suggestion display mode is displayed at the timing of transition to the specific period, there is an effect that the suggestion display mode can be displayed at the timing synchronized with other same gaming machines.

In the game machine K1 or K2, the determination symbol of the display mode indicating the specific hit / fail determination is the display mode indicating that the hit / fail judgment result is a hit.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effect of the game machine K1 or K2, the judgment symbol of the display mode showing the specific pass / fail judgment is a hit / fail judgment result, so that the player can win at a specific period. There is an effect that it is possible to recognize a certain thing and to make it easy to hit in a specific period.

In any of the game machines K1 to K3, the suggestion display mode determining means is used as the suggestion display mode indicating that the hit / fail determination result by the hit / miss determination means is a hit when the specific period is set. The gaming machine K4, which determines a specific suggestion display mode.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines K1 to K3, the following effects are played. That is, in the suggestion display mode determining means, when a specific period is set, the specific suggestion display mode is determined by the suggestion display mode determining means as a suggestion display mode indicating that the hit / fail determination result by the hit / fail determination means is correct. It is determined. Therefore, there is an effect that the value of the specific period can be increased and the player can expect the specific period to be reached.

In any of the game machines K1 to the game machine K4, the voice control means includes a voice output means capable of outputting voice and a voice control means for executing control of the voice output from the voice output means. , When the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, if the period until the specific period is set is less than or equal to the predetermined period, at least the privilege until the specific period is set. The game machine K5 is characterized in that it controls the volume of sound related to the game so as to be output at a volume lower than that at normal times.

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines K1 to K4, the following effect is played. That is, the voice control means executes the control of the voice output from the voice output means capable of outputting the voice. When the award game is executed by the award game execution means, if the period until the specific period is set is less than or equal to the predetermined period, at least the sound related to the award game is heard until the specific period is set. The volume is controlled by the voice control means so that the volume is output at a lower volume than usual. Therefore, even if a big hit is made before the specific period, it is difficult for the surrounding players to notice that it is a big hit, and it is easy to make the player think that it is a big hit when the specific period is reached. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to think that it is easy to be a big hit in a specific period.

<Characteristic L group>
Based on the establishment of the start condition, the hit / fail determination means for executing the hit / fail judgment, the effect execution means for executing the effect indicating the result of the hit / fail judgment by the pass / fail determination means, and the effect content determination for determining the effect content by the effect execution means. A state in which power is not supplied to the game machine in the game machine having the means and the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game which is advantageous to the player based on the hit / fail determination result. However, a timekeeping means that has a power supply means capable of supplying power for a predetermined period and can measure time even when power is not supplied, and a timekeeping data acquisition means that acquires timekeeping data from the timekeeping means. , A timekeeping control means that executes control processing related to a predetermined game based on the timekeeping data acquired by the timekeeping data acquisition means, a first setting that executes control by the timekeeping control means, and control by the timekeeping control means. It has at least a switching means capable of switching to a second setting for prohibiting the above, a switching setting means for switching and setting by operating the switching means, and an operation control means for controlling the operation of the switching operation means. A game machine L1 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine L1, the hit / fail determination is executed by the hit / miss determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. An effect indicating the result of the hit / miss determination by the hit / miss determination means is executed by the effect execution means. The effect content by the effect execution means is determined by the effect content determining means. Based on the hit / fail determination result, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. It has a power supply means capable of supplying electric power for a predetermined period even when the power is not supplied to the game machine, and the time is measured by the timing means even when the power is not supplied. Timekeeping data is acquired from the timekeeping means by the timekeeping data acquisition means. Based on the timekeeping data acquired by the timekeeping data acquisition means, the control process related to the predetermined game is executed by the timekeeping control means. The switching means switches between the first setting for executing the control by the timekeeping control means and the second setting for prohibiting the control by the timekeeping control means. By operating the switching means, switching is set by the switching setting means. The operation of the switching operation means is controlled by the operation control means. As a result, since the switching means is operated by the switching setting means to switch, there is an effect that the setting can be automatically switched without manually setting the setting.

<Characteristic M group>
Based on the establishment of the start condition, the hit / fail determination means for executing the hit / fail judgment, the effect execution means for executing the effect indicating the result of the hit / fail judgment by the pass / fail determination means, and the effect content determination for determining the effect content by the effect execution means. A state in which power is not supplied to the game machine in the game machine having the means and the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game which is advantageous to the player based on the hit / fail determination result. However, a timekeeping means that has a power supply means capable of supplying power for a predetermined period and can operate even when the power is not supplied, a timekeeping data acquisition means that acquires timekeeping data from the timekeeping means, and a timekeeping means thereof. It has a timekeeping control means that executes a control process related to a predetermined game based on the timekeeping data acquired by the data acquisition means, and the timekeeping means is used when power is not supplied to the game machine. It has a switching means for switching between a first state in which power is supplied from the power supply means and a second state in which power is supplied from the game machine based on the power being supplied to the game machine. A game machine M1 characterized by.

According to the game machine M1, the hit / fail determination is executed by the hit / miss determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. An effect indicating the result of the hit / miss determination by the hit / miss determination means is executed by the effect execution means. The effect content by the effect execution means is determined by the effect content determining means. Based on the hit / fail determination result, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. The timekeeping data is obtained by the timekeeping data acquisition means, which has a power supply means capable of supplying power for a predetermined period even when the power is not supplied to the game machine and can operate even when the power is not supplied. To be acquired. Based on the timekeeping data acquired by the timekeeping data acquisition means, the control process related to the predetermined game is executed by the timekeeping control means. In the timekeeping means, when the power is not supplied to the game machine, the power is supplied from the game machine based on the first state in which the power is supplied from the power supply means and the power is supplied to the game machine. It is switched to the second state by the switching means. As a result, it is possible to extend the period during which power can be supplied during the period when the power is not turned on to the game machine. Therefore, there is an effect that the timekeeping means can be used for a longer time.

<Characteristic N group>
It has a main control means for executing game control, a slave control means for executing game control based on a control signal from the main control means, and a display means, and the main control means has predetermined conditions. Based on the establishment, the lottery information acquisition means for acquiring the lottery information, the storage means for storing the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means at least until the start condition is satisfied, and the establishment of the start condition. Based on this, the pass / fail determination means for executing the pass / fail determination and the dynamic display time for determining the dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol indicating the pass / fail determination result by the pass / fail determination means on the display means are determined. The dynamic display time determining means, the dynamic display information generating means for generating the dynamic display information signal for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, and the above-mentioned It has a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the stop display of the identification symbol indicating that the result of the result of the success / failure determination is a hit, and the slave control The means displays the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol based on the dynamic display information signal, and the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. In a gaming machine having a display control means, the slave control means is identified by an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation determination means that determines whether the operation means has been operated, and the operation determination means. It has a switching means for switching the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol to another dynamic display mode based on the determination that the operating means has been operated when the symbol is dynamically displayed. The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means of the slave control means includes a switchable period set to be switchable to another dynamic display mode by the switching means and another dynamic display mode. A switching prohibition period in which switching is prohibited is set, respectively, and the dynamic display information signal is a first time which is a dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means and its dynamic. The dynamic display mode determining means uses the dynamic display mode up to the second time as the storage means, which is composed of a signal indicating a second time, which is the remaining time after the elapse of a predetermined time among the display times. The second time between the first dynamic display mode determined based on the number of stored lottery information and the second time after the first dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed. The second dynamic display mode to be determined based on is determined respectively. A game machine N1 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine N1, the control of the game is executed by the main control means. The control of the game is executed by the subordinate control means based on the control signal from the main control means. In the main control means, lottery information is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. The lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means is stored by the storage means at least until the start condition is satisfied. Based on the establishment of the start condition, the hit / fail determination is executed by the hit / fail determination means. The dynamic display time is determined by the dynamic display time determining means for determining the dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol indicating the result of the hit / fail determination on the display means. The dynamic display information generating means generates a dynamic display information signal for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means. The privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the stop display of the identification symbol indicating that the result of the success / failure determination by the hit / fail determination means is a hit. In the slave control means, the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the dynamic display information signal. The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is displayed and controlled by the display control means. Whether or not the operating means that can be operated by the player has been operated is determined by the operation determining means. When the identification symbol is dynamically displayed by the operation determination means, the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol is switched to another dynamic display mode by the switching means based on the determination that the operation means has been operated. .. In the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means of the slave control means, the switchable period set to be switchable to another dynamic display mode by the switching means and the other dynamic display mode are switched. A switching prohibition period is set for each of the prohibitions. In the dynamic display information signal, the first time, which is the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, and the second time, which is the remaining time of the dynamic display time after the lapse of a predetermined time, It is composed of signals indicating. The dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode up to the second time based on the number of lottery information stored in the storage means. The first dynamic display mode and the first dynamic display mode are dynamic. During the period from the display to the second time, the second dynamic display mode determined based on the second time is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, respectively, so that when the dynamic display is started. It has the effect of reducing the control load.

Each of the gaming machines is a gaming machine Z1 characterized by being a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through a winning opening), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some of them are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

The game machine Z2, wherein each of the game machines is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and when the stop It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that each of the gaming machines is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the above, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
64b 2nd starting port (ball entry port)
64c Electric accessory (variable means)
81 Third symbol display device (display means, judgment information display means)
203a Special symbol 1 Hold ball storage area (part of storage means)
203b Special symbol 2 Hold ball storage area (part of storage means)
S301 Lottery information acquisition means S305 Win / fail determination means S1005 Variable control means
Display time determination means

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, there has been known a game machine configured to execute the same effect at the same timing among a plurality of game machines, or to change the display mode when a preset time is reached. There is.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-13528

In this type of gaming machine , there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game early .

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine which can prevent the player become bored early.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a determination means for executing a predetermined determination and a first privilege and the first privilege based on the determination as a specific determination result by the determination means. Shows a privilege type determining means for determining one privilege type from a plurality of privilege types including at least a second privilege capable of giving a privilege more advantageous to the player than the privilege, and a determination result by the determination means. A display means for displaying the identification symbol for the purpose, a dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol displayed on the display means, and an identification symbol for showing the specific determination result. When displayed, it has a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and a timing means capable of measuring the time, and a preset value for measuring data by the time measuring means. The specific determination result is provided with a notification means capable of notifying a notification mode based on the determination result by the determination means, provided that the specific period is started in the case of. The identification symbol for showing that the first privilege or the second privilege is given is a common identification symbol for showing that the first privilege or the second privilege is given, and a dedicated symbol for showing that the second privilege is given. When at least the identification symbol is set and the common identification symbol is stopped and displayed, a determination notification mode indicating the privilege type determined by the privilege type determining means during the privilege game to be executed thereafter. Is notified, and when the determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed identification symbol is the specific determination result, the notification means indicates that the determination result is the specific determination result. The mode can be notified before the identification symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the notification means, the determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed identification symbol is the specific determination result. If the dynamic display of the identification symbol is started in the period before the start of the specific period and the dynamic display of the identification symbol is stopped within a predetermined period from the start of the specific period, the privilege It is configured so that the notification mode can be delayed until the game is started .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a player rather than the first privilege and the first privilege based on the determination means for executing a predetermined determination and the determination as a specific determination result by the determination means. A privilege type determining means for determining one privilege type from a plurality of privilege types including at least a second privilege to which an advantageous privilege can be given, and an identification symbol for showing a determination result by the determination means. When the display means to be displayed, the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol displayed on the display means, and the identification symbol for indicating the specific determination result are displayed. , A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, a timing means capable of timing, and a timing data obtained by the timing means are set values in advance. It is shown that the specific determination result is obtained by having the notification means capable of notifying the notification mode based on the determination result by the determination means, provided that the specific period is at least one condition. The identification symbol for this purpose includes at least a common identification symbol for indicating that the first privilege or the second privilege is granted, and a dedicated identification symbol for indicating that the second privilege is granted. When the common identification symbol is set and stopped and displayed, a determination notification mode indicating the privilege type determined by the privilege type determining means is notified during the privilege game executed thereafter. When the determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed identification symbol is the specific determination result, the notification means sets the notification mode indicating that the identification symbol is the specific determination result. Is capable of notifying before the stop display, and in the notifying means, the determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed identification symbol is the specific determination result, and the identification symbol is the identification symbol. When the dynamic display of the identification symbol is started in the period before the start of the specific period and the dynamic display of the identification symbol is stopped within a predetermined period from the start of the specific period, the privilege game is started. Up to, the notification mode can be delayed and notified .

Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) to (b) are schematic views schematically showing a notice display mode per long time. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a notice display for a long time, and (b) is an example of a change notice display for a reserved ball that has won a prize at the second starting port during a long time. It is a figure shown as a target. (A) to (b) are diagrams schematically showing an example of a notice display of fluctuations for a reserved ball that has won a prize at the second starting port during a long period of time. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the notice display of the fluctuation with respect to the holding ball which won a prize in the 2nd start port during a long time hit. (A) is an upper perspective view showing the positional relationship between the frame button and the touch switch of the pachinko machine, and (b) shows the display mode when the total number of fluctuations of the pachinko machine in a day is displayed. It is the figure which showed an example, (c) is the enlarged view which showed the changeover switch of a pachinko machine in an enlarged manner. (A) is a timing chart showing the period setting from the power-on of the pachinko machine, (b) is an example showing the background image displayed in the preparation period of the pachinko machine, and (c) is an example. This is an example showing a background image displayed during the time production period of a pachinko machine. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of the advance notice effect display mode of the touch sensor displayed on the third symbol display device of the pachinko machine, and (c) is the third symbol display device of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which showed an example of the notice effect display mode displayed by. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a variation display mode of a variation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device when the background mode A is selected, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the variation display mode of the variation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device when the background mode A is selected. It is a figure which showed an example of the variation display mode of the display variation pattern. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a variation display mode of a variation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device when the background mode A is selected, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the variation display mode of the variation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device when the background mode A is selected. It is a figure which showed an example of the variation display mode of the display variation pattern. It is a figure which showed the timing chart for each background mode when the fluctuation pattern which set the addition time is selected. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a normal hit random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of ROM in the main control device, and (c) is a schematic diagram. , Is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM in the main control device. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 variation pattern selection table which is a part of the variation pattern selection table. It is the figure which showed the list of the fluctuation pattern command and addition command output from the main control device of a pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variation pattern selection table B, which is a part of the variation pattern selection table, and (b) is a part of the variation pattern selection table. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern selection table B. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variation pattern selection table A, which is a part of the variation pattern selection table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variation pattern selection table B, which is a part of the variation pattern selection table, and (b) is a part of the variation pattern selection table. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern selection table C. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hold effect selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the look-ahead effect lottery table, (c) to (d). ) Is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the look-ahead effect selection table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the advance notice selection table A, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the advance notice selection table C. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the touch notice selection table, and (b) is a diagram listing the settings of the changeover switch. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table for notice schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the electric accessory opening process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the time setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern reception process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the hold effect selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control process. It is a flowchart which showed the hold quantity transfer process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the holding ball number command reception process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command reception process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the look-ahead effect selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the synchronous effect management process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the effect change process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the hold quantity display update process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the sensor input process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing the advance notice effect display process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the mode switching process executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. It is a flowchart which showed the addition command processing executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) to (b) are schematic views schematically showing the opening display mode of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. (A) is a case where the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment is won for a long time of the normal symbol, and the game ball wins the second starting port with the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 being 0. It is a timing chart which showed an example until the special symbol 2 becomes the fluctuation start when the special symbol 1 is changing (the remaining fluctuation time is 3 seconds or more), and (b) is the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. This is a timing chart of a display mode showing an example of a state in which the special symbol 1 does not fluctuate when a game ball wins a prize at the second starting port by winning a normal symbol for a long time. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table of the general drawing opening effect of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command reception process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device of the pachinko machine in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the general drawing opening process executed by MPU in the display control device of a pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM in the main control device of the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment, and (b) is the main control device of the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 5C is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM in the above, and FIG. 3C is a normal variation pattern selection table A (mode 1) which is a part of the variation pattern selection table of the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example schematically, (d) is a schematic example of a normal variation pattern selection table B (mode 2) which is a part of the variation pattern selection table of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation start processing 2 executed by MPU in the main control device of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a timing timing chart showing an example in which the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol notified by the rainbow-colored reserved symbol of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment is the preparation period, and (b) is a timing timing chart. It is a timing chart which showed an example of the case where the variation period of the special symbol notified by the rainbow-colored reserved symbol of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment extends from the preparation period to the time production period. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the advance notice selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command receiving process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the opening process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the synchronous effect management process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the effect change process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the special symbol 1 variation pattern selection table which is a part of the variation pattern selection table of the pachinko machine in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the list of the fluctuation pattern command and addition command output from the main control device of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment as an example. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine according to the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the display control device of the pachinko machine according to the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern command processing 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the addition command processing 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of an RTC connected to a voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine according to a sixth embodiment. (B) is a conceptual diagram of a structure in which the setting switch of the pachinko machine according to the sixth embodiment is operated by a changeover motor. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the time setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 7th Embodiment. (A) to (c) are schematic views schematically showing a display mode of a notice of fish school charge using the touch sensor of the pachinko machine and the touch sensor on the board side in the seventh embodiment. (A) to (b) are schematic views schematically showing a display mode of a card notice, which is a notice effect using the frame-side touch sensor 290 and the board-side touch sensor of the pachinko machine according to the seventh embodiment. is there. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of the contents of RAM in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 7th Embodiment schematically. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the sensor input process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the sensor effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the sensor selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special operation process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 15) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 and a touch sensor 290 are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17.

The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the background mode of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or changing the content of the advance notice effect. To. Further, in the touch sensor 290, for example, the display content of the dedicated effect using the touch sensor 290 displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later is based on the operation of the player's touch sensor 290. Be changed. Further, the frame button 22 and the touch sensor 290 may be configured to be used as a switch for driving a driving accessory or the like provided in the game machine, for example. The frame button 22 and the touch sensor 290 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 9A. However, the touch switch 290 is arranged closer to the front side of the game machine than the frame button 22. Normally, when the player presses (operates) the frame button 22, the touch switches are arranged at positions where the player's hand can react.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and the inside of the operation handle 51 permits the driving of the ball launch unit 112a. A touch sensor 51a for this purpose, a push-button type stop switch 51b that stops the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. The starting port 64a, the second starting port 64b, the electric accessory 64c, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the through hole of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with wood screws or the like. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 15) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery for special symbol 1 (first symbol) is performed when the ball enters the first starting port 64a, and special symbol 2 (when the ball enters the second starting port 64b). A lottery for the first symbol) is performed, and when the ball passes through the through gate 67, a lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 (hereinafter, the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is referred to as a special symbol) performed for entering the ball into the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, it is special. Whether or not the symbol is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the jackpot type is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls are won. ) It is released, and the opening is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal case. There are two types of jackpots for special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B". After the end of the special game state, as added value after the end of the jackpot, the game according to these jackpot types Value (game value) is given to the player.

Further, when the special symbol 1 (first symbol) or the special symbol 2 (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable display of the special symbol for a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds). After a lapse of ~ 30 seconds, etc.), a special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first starting port 64a while the special symbol is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is entered is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is the first. It is shown by the symbol display device 37 and also shown by the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, when a ball enters the second starting port 64b while the special symbol is changing, the number of times the ball enters is held up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is shown on the first symbol display device 37. Both are also shown for the third symbol display device 81. The number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is shown on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in an identifiable display mode, respectively. As will be described in detail later, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to make it easier for the player to identify the number of reserved balls, the variation display mode of the special symbol, the determination result, etc. than the first symbol display device 37. Usually, the player is configured to play the game by looking at the display mode of the third symbol display device 81.

When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the lottery is performed. The variable display according to is started. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 64b is prioritized over the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 64a, and the lottery for the special symbol 2 is performed. , The variable display according to the lottery is started. Therefore, the lottery for the reserved ball of the first starting port 64a is executed when the reserved ball does not exist in the second starting port 64b. While the change of the special symbol 2 is being executed, the change of the special symbol 1 is not executed. That is, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are configured so that there is no period during which they fluctuate at the same time.

In the present embodiment, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 do not change at the same time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may be configured to change at the same time. With this configuration, a lottery for more games can be executed in a short time, and the determination result can be displayed, so that the games can be played more time-efficiently.

Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the second starting port 64b is in an open state in which the game ball can be guided to the ball entry port on both sides of the ball entry port into which the game ball enters, and the ball entry into the ball entry port. It has an electric accessory 64c provided with a blade member that can rotate in a closed state that regulates. The electric accessory 64c is operated from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time based on the winning (winning) of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) described later. In addition, normally, the game ball is held in an upright state so as to prevent the game ball from entering from both sides of the ball entry port, and the game ball is prevented from entering between the blade members. , The first starting port 64a is arranged. Therefore, the second starting port 64b is normally configured to be able to enter the ball only when the electric accessory 64c is operated in the open state. Therefore, normally, the game ball is easily inserted into the first starting port 64a, and the player launches the game ball to enter the game ball into the first starting port 64a to play the game. It will be a thing.

The special winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, is provided immediately below the second starting opening 64b. Therefore, during the special gaming state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win a prize in the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls also enter the first starting opening 64a. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first starting port 64a becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the through gate 67, whether or not the ordinary symbol is a hit is determined. There are two types of hits for normal symbols: normal hits and long-time hits in which the opening time and the number of times of opening are increased, respectively, as compared with the normal hits. When the normal symbol hits normally or for a long time, the electric accessory attached to the second starting port 64b is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 2 seconds), and the second starting port 64b is opened. It becomes easy for the ball to enter the ball. That is, when it hits a normal symbol, the ball easily enters the second starting port 64b, and as a result, a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the through gate 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. At the same time, it is also shown in the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the through gate 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display according to the lottery is started. To.

As described above, there are two types of jackpots of the special symbol, "big hit A" and "big hit B". In both cases of "big hit A" and "big hit B", the number of rounds is 16 rounds in a special gaming state (16R big hit). After that, in the case of "big hit A", as an added value after the big hit ends, the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the special symbol from the end of the big hit to the start of the big hit game of the next special symbol ( Move to (during probabilistic change of special design). On the other hand, in "Big hit B", the winning probability of the normal symbol increases from the end of the big hit to the end of the lottery of the special symbol 100 times. Even in the high probability state, the hit probability of the normal symbol is similarly increased and set.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, the probability state of the so-called special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol), in other words, the special game state (16R jackpot). ) Is a state of the game that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, the case where it is not the "high probability state of the special symbol" is called the "low probability state of the special symbol", which means that the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is the normal state. (Normal state or low probability game state of special symbol). In addition, the "normal symbol time saving state" (normal symbol time saving medium or time saving game state) is a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and the ball can easily enter the second starting port 64b. To say. On the other hand, the time when it is not "the time saving state of the normal symbol" is called "the normal state of the normal symbol" (normal game state), and this is the state where the hit probability of the normal symbol is the normal state, that is, the hit probability is lower than during the time saving. Indicates that. Hereinafter, the period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot of the special symbol is referred to as the probability variation period of the special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot type is "big hit A", the period from the end of the "big hit A" to the start of the next jackpot is set as the probability variation period, but the number of times (for example, 20) is not limited to this. The period during which the lottery of special symbols (such as times or 100 times) is executed may be set as the probability variation period. Further, both "big hit A" and "big hit B" may be set so as to have a predetermined number of times and a probability variation period. Further, the probability variation period may be a probability variation period for a predetermined time (2 minutes, 5 minutes, etc.).

In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the "low probability state of the special symbol". After that, when the special symbol becomes a big hit, it shifts to the "high probability state of the special symbol" and also shifts to the "time saving state of the normal symbol".

In addition, while the "high probability state of the special symbol" is continued, if the special symbol becomes a big hit and the jackpot type is "big hit A", the "high probability state of the special symbol" is further changed. It will continue from the end of the big hit of the new special symbol to the start of the next big hit game.

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a determine whether or not the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 performed in association with the entry into the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (starting prize) is being executed, depending on the lighting state. The variation is displayed by showing, or the special symbol 1 (first symbol) or the special symbol 2 (first symbol) according to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by the lighting state as the stop symbol after the fluctuation ends. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the balls that have entered the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, is indicated by the lighting state.

The sphere enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b while the special symbol 1 (first symbol) or the special symbol 2 (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37. When a ball is hit, the number of times the ball is entered is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the balls entering the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of holding times is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot). A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to B) is shown.

The special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are assigned separate dedicated LEDs 37a for displaying the symbol and displaying the number of reserved balls, respectively. With this configuration, the player can more easily distinguish between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (starting prize), a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the entering opening in the first symbol display device 37 is triggered by the ball. The variable display of the symbol) is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle, and right are used. The column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of the main symbols of the numbers "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 15) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A", the variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the odd numbers "1, 3, 4, 7, 9" are aligned and stopped. Further, in the case of "big hit B", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are aligned.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the upper two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The lower 1/3 is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The substantially center of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the jackpot symbols are aligned on the effective line L1 (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols), the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed among the balls entered in the first starting port 64a, and the small area Ds2 is. The small area Ds3 is an area for displaying the advance notice effect image, and the small area Ds3 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed among the balls that have entered the second starting port 64b. Is.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. In the case of variable display, in addition to the main symbols displayed in the center, the main symbols arranged before and after the main symbols are visibly displayed, so that a total of nine main symbols are displayed at the maximum. In some cases. In the sub-display area Ds, doors, characters, characters, etc. are displayed in the small area Ds2 in the center, and it is suggested to the player that the transition to a big hit is easier than usual, and that a normal symbol hit, etc. .. By lowering the transparency of the main symbol displayed on the effective line L1 and increasing the transparency of the other main symbols displayed, the player can easily recognize the effective line. it can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, in the sub-display area Ds, the display mode of the reserved ball based on entering the first starting port 64a displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3. It is displayed in a different display mode from the display mode of the holding ball of the second starting port 64b displayed on the above. Specifically, one "○" is displayed for one holding ball of the first starting port 64a, and when there are two holding balls, two "○" are displayed side by side. To Similarly, "○" is displayed side by side according to the number of reserved balls. On the other hand, for the reserved ball of the second starting port 64b, "Δ" is displayed for one reserved ball, except for the reserved ball that has been entered for a long time with a normal symbol. When a ball enters the second starting port 64b during a long period of time with a normal symbol, one "★" is displayed for each reserved ball, as shown in FIG. 6A.

As a result, the reserved balls of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, that is, the reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, can be displayed in an easy-to-identify manner. In addition, since the display mode of the reserved ball that has entered the second starting port 64b is displayed differently depending on the hit type of the normal symbol, the player can easily determine that the reserved ball has occurred in a long time. be able to.

In the present embodiment, in the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the above-mentioned main symbol, reserved symbol, etc., character display, advance notice display of characters, etc., and total The display of the number of fluctuations is displayed as appropriate. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small areas Ds1 and Ds3, it means that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first starting port 64a is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1 or the small area Ds3, the number of reserved balls is displayed as a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the amount. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8, the second starting port 64b is entered in the notification display mode of the normal symbol per long time performed in the third symbol display device 81 and the long time hit of the normal symbol. A notice display mode executed for the reserved ball that has been balled will be described. First, FIG. 5A is a diagram showing a display mode foretelling that the electric accessory 64c will be released by hitting a normal symbol for a long time. Here, the lottery result of the changing ordinary symbol is determined, and when the lottery result is a long-time hit, it is displayed in the small display area Ds2 in FIG. 5 (b) 3 seconds before the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed. The door of the door design is slid in the opening direction (horizontal direction of the display area), and as shown in FIG. 5A, the design of the winning opening imitating the shape of the second starting port 64b is displayed.

After that, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the electric accessory of the winning opening displayed in the small area Ds2 is activated at the timing when the electric accessory 64c is released, as shown in FIG. 5 (b). The symbol in the open state is displayed, and the player is notified that the electric accessory 64c is in the open state. Further, as shown in FIG. 5A, when the door symbol of the small area Ds2 is displayed to be opened, the dolphin symbol is displayed in the upper left of the small area Ds3.

The dolphin symbol displays the characters "opening" in a balloon in accordance with the opening timing of the electric accessory 64c (the stop display timing of the normal symbol) to notify that the electric accessory 64c is in the open state. Will be done. In this way, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a long time different from the normal hit, the third symbol display device 81 is notified in advance before the stop display is displayed, so that the normal symbol is notified in advance for a long time. , It is possible to prevent the player from missing the opportunity to open the electric accessory 64c.
Here, if the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 is four, which is the maximum number, and the special symbol has a long fluctuation display such as reach on the third symbol display device 81, the player can display it. Even if the game ball is launched and the ball enters the first starting port 64a, it becomes an invalid ball that does not become a reserved ball. Therefore, the launch of the game ball is stopped and the reserved ball is digested. There are many cases where the game is played after waiting for. In such a case, even if the ball is started to be launched based on the fact that the electric accessory 64c is in the open state for a long time by winning the normal symbol for a long time, the game is played to the second starting port 64b. It is difficult to put the ball in, and it is not possible to put the ball in the second starting port 64b by effectively using the opening time of the electric accessory 64c.

However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, it is notified in advance that the electric accessory 64c will be in the open state before a predetermined time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) when the electric accessory 64c is opened due to a long hit. The player can play the game by preventing the player from missing the opportunity to put the ball into the second starting port 64b.

Next, FIG. 6A shows a special case in which a ball enters the second starting port 64b when the electric accessory 64c is operated in the open state based on a long-time hit of a normal symbol. This is a display mode showing a state in which four holding balls are set in the symbol 2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the holding symbol of the holding ball established by entering the second starting port 64b in the open state of the electric accessory 64c per long time is "a holding symbol of the holding ball". ★ ”is displayed. When there are four holding balls, four "★" s are displayed side by side as shown in FIG. 6A.

Next, in FIG. 6B, the electric accessory 64c shifts from the open state to the closed state, a lottery is executed for one reserved ball for the special symbol 2, and the variable display of the special symbol 2 starts. It is a figure which showed the state which was done. For the reserved ball that is established by entering the electric accessory 64c due to a long hit of the normal symbol, the dolphin displayed in the small area Ds3 executes a notice display by a balloon at each start of fluctuation. In FIG. 6A, when one of the four reserved balls starts to fluctuate, a “?” Is displayed by a balloon. This "?" Is not included (all are out of order) than when the lottery that starts to fluctuate and the reserved balls of the special symbol 2 include those for which the winning / failing judgment result is a hit. , It is set so that it can be easily selected (see FIG. 24 (a) for details later), and informs the player that the probability of hitting is low.

Next, FIG. 7 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode when the reserved ball is further digested from the state of FIG. 6 (b) and the variable display of the special symbol 2 is started. In FIG. 7A, when the change of the special symbol 2 starts, the character “chance?” Is displayed to notify the player of the notice display related to the winning / failing determination result. The notice display of "chance?" Is set so that it is easier to select than the case where the hit / fail judgment result (including the one whose fluctuation has started and the hit / miss judgment result of the reserved ball of the special symbol 2) is out of order. As a result, the player can predict the result of the winning / failing determination in advance.

Next, FIG. 7 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which one reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is further digested from the reserved number of FIG. 7 (a) and the variable display of the special symbol 2 is started. FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a case where the dolphin displays a notice of "chance !!" with a balloon at the start of the variable display of the special symbol 2. The notice display of "chance !!" is set so that it is easier to select when the hit / fail judgment result (including the one whose fluctuation has started and the hit / fail judgment result of the reserved ball of the special symbol 2) is a hit, than in the case of a miss. (See FIG. 24 (a)). As a result, the player can predict the result of the winning / failing determination in advance.

Next, FIG. 8 shows a case where one reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is further digested from the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 shown in FIG. 7 (b) and the variable display of the special symbol 2 is started. It is a figure which showed the display mode of. In FIG. 8, when the change of the special symbol 2 starts, the characters “Great chance !!” are displayed to notify the player of the notice display related to the result of the hit / fail determination of the changing special symbol 2. This "great chance !!" notice display is set so that it is easier to select when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the changing special symbol 2 is a hit than when it is a miss (see FIG. 24 (a)). .. As a result, the player can play the game with the expectation that the winning / failing determination result of the changing special symbol 2 will be a big hit.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern selected in the variation display of the special symbol 2 in the normal game state always reaches when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 0. The fluctuation pattern is configured to be selected regardless of the result of the hit / fail judgment. That is, when the electric accessory 64c is opened, a plurality of balls enter the second starting port 64b, and then the fluctuation starts in order based on the long-time hit of the normal symbol, all the balls enter. Even if the lottery result of the drawn ball is wrong, the fluctuation pattern to be the reach is always selected in the fluctuation display of the last reserved ball.

Further, in the case of fluctuation of the reserved ball due to the operation of the electric accessory 64c due to the operation of the electric accessory 64c for a long time, the notice display related to the hit / fail judgment result is continuously displayed every time when the fluctuation starts. Configured. Further, as the number of consecutive times increases, it is easy to select a notice display that makes it expected that the winning / failing judgment result is a big hit. Therefore, the player usually hits the symbol for a long time. 2 The lottery executed when the ball is entered into the starting port 64b can be made to feel easier to win than the lottery executed by winning the first starting opening 64a at normal times. Furthermore, in the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 that occurs per long time, the variation pattern that becomes the reach is always selected in the final fluctuation (lottery executed when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is 0). Therefore, even if the lottery result is out of order, the player's expectation for a big hit can be increased. Therefore, the player can expect the variable display of the special symbol 2 triggered by a long-time hit as a special variable display, and can play the game with a higher expectation that the normal symbol will be a long-time hit. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5B, at the timing when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed with the stop symbol indicating a long-term hit, the dolphin's notice display displayed in the small area Ds3 is " It is configured to display the characters "Opening", but it is not limited to this, and the normal symbol stops about the time it takes for the player to launch the game ball and reach the second starting port 64b. It may be configured to be displayed before it is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to make the second starting port 64b win a prize by effectively utilizing the long-time hit.

In addition, the notification may be made about 2 seconds earlier than the arrival time of the game ball. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect that is advantageous to the player while protecting the interests of the game store.

Next, the positional relationship between the touch sensor 290 and the frame button 22 will be described with reference to FIG. 9A. As shown in FIG. 9A, the touch sensors 290 are provided side by side in front of the frame button 22. The touch sensor 290 has a built-in reflective photo sensor, and a cover member whose output portion from which the LED of the photo sensor is output is made of a transparent black resin member is attached. It is arranged on the surface of the pachinko machine 10. In this touch sensor 290, when a player brings his / her hand or the like close to the output unit of the photo sensor to a predetermined interval and blocks the light of the LED, the light of the LED is reflected and input to the input unit of the photo sensor. By doing so, it is configured to detect. The photo sensor 290 is electrically connected to the input / output port of the voice lamp control device 113, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can determine whether the touch sensor 290 is on. There is. The touch sensor 290 is an operation means that can be operated by the player in order to change the effect content displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the frame button 22.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11A to 11B, the player continuously detects the touch sensor 290 and changes (stores) the indicator. The more the indicator can be changed to a larger scale, the more likely it is that a jackpot will be given to the player.

Further, since the touch sensor 290 is provided on the player side of the frame button 22, the touch sensor 290 is configured to easily detect and turn on even when the player presses the frame button 22. .. Therefore, the touch sensor 290 can be turned on even when the frame button 22 is pressed.

Next, FIG. 9B shows the total number of fluctuations since the power was turned on when the player displays the standby screen (demo screen) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a display example when it is displayed on 81. In this way, the player can check how much the game is being played.

Next, FIG. 9C is a diagram showing a setting switch 291 provided on the back side (see FIG. 3) of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 3, the setting switch 291 is provided below the RAM erasing switch 122 so as to be exposed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9C, the setting switch 291 is composed of a dip type changeover switch. It is configured so that the input can be switched by rotating it, and it is possible to switch from setting "1" to setting "4". A display window for confirming the setting is provided on the outer cover so that the set value can be confirmed, and the set value can be visually recognized from the display window by rotating the setting switch 291. As shown in FIG. 15, the setting switch 291 is electrically connected so that a setting signal is input to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, each setting is arranged so that it switches when it is rotated every 90 degrees, and a lock mechanism is provided which locks lightly so that it is harder to rotate than other regions when it is rotated to each set value. ..

Note that FIG. 26B shows the control contents set by each setting of the changeover switch 291. If the setting is 1, the effect using the RTC292 is effectively set, and the display of the total number of fluctuations shown in FIG. 9B is effectively set. Similarly, setting 2 is set so that RTC292 is invalid and the display of the total number of fluctuations is displayed, setting 3 is set so that RTC292 is valid and the total number of fluctuations is hidden, and setting 4 is set so that RTC292 is invalid. , The display of the total number of fluctuations is set to non-display.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10, the time effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 10A is a timing chart showing a period during which the time effect is executed from the power-on of the pachinko machine 10 to the power-off in the second embodiment. In the present embodiment, an RTC (real-time clock) 292 for time measurement, which will be described later, is provided in the voice lamp control device 113, and it is possible to measure the time after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. Has been done.

When 54 minutes (period A in FIG. 10A) elapses from the power-on, a preparation period (period B in FIG. 10A) for executing the time effect of 1 minute thereafter is set. After that, the time effect period (the period C in FIG. 10A) in which the time effect is executed is set. Here, when the preparation period is set, as shown in FIG. 10B, a background image in which the characters "Soon, super fish school time starts" is set, and the time production is started soon for the player. Notification indicating that is executed. Further, the variation time of the special symbol selected in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state) is 30 seconds at the longest, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 22, and the variation pattern executed before the preparation period ends. It is configured to do.

Further, although the details will be described later, as shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 22 (a), "super reach" is not set for the fluctuation pattern that starts to fluctuate during the preparation period, and a notice is given. The display mode is also not displayed. In the time production period, when the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit, a special school of fish that notifies that the big hit is confirmed is more easily displayed than in the normal time, and a super reach or a notice display is displayed during the preparation period. By configuring so that it is not displayed, it is possible to enhance the freshness of the notice display during the time production period.

After one minute, which is the preparation period, has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 10 (c), a background image displaying the characters "during super fish school time" indicating that the time production period is in progress is displayed as the third symbol. It is displayed on the device 81. In the background image of this time production period, an image of a plurality of small fish swimming is displayed so that the player can be given an impression different from the normal time. Then, when the time production period of 5 minutes elapses, the background image is changed to the normal background image (background image corresponding to the mode selected before the preparation period), and a lottery of special symbols is continuously executed. Will be done. After that, when 54 minutes have passed, the preparation period is set again, and then the time production period is set. In this way, it is repeatedly executed at the same time interval.

If the jackpot game is started before the preparation period, or if the jackpot game is started during the preparation period, the period corresponding to the time after the jackpot game is completed (periods A to C). Is set. In that period, for example, if the jackpot game is started during the preparation period and the jackpot game ends for the remaining 1 minute of the time production period, the time production for 1 minute is executed.

With this configuration, the power cable is connected to the power supply outlet in the hall while the power switch (not shown) of the pachinko machine 10 is kept on. The other pachinko machine 10 of the same type is also connected to the power supply outlet in the same manner. Then, by providing a switch such as a breaker capable of switching whether or not to supply electricity to the power supply outlet, the power can be turned on to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 at the same time.

Therefore, by simultaneously turning on the power to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the present embodiment, the timing at which the time effect is executed can be matched by the plurality of pachinko machines 10. Further, in the present embodiment, before the time production period is set, the preparation period composed of a time longer than the longest fluctuation time of the special symbol is set, so that the start of the time production period can be started. Can be matched.

In the present embodiment, the timing at which the preparation period and the time production period are executed is set as described above, but the timing is not limited to this and may be set as appropriate. In addition, a lottery for whether or not to execute the time effect on each pachinko machine 10 is executed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and only the pachinko machine 10 that wins the lottery executes the time effect. You may. Further, it may be configured so that the player can select whether or not to execute the time effect by operating the frame button 22 or the like at the timing when the time effect is executed, during standby, or the like.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11, a notice effect display using the touch sensor 290 will be described. FIG. 11A is a diagram showing a state in which a notice effect display using the touch sensor 290 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the special symbol is fluctuating. When this notice effect display is determined and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is reduced to the upper right side of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the notice effect display using the touch sensor 290 displays an indicator as shown in FIG. 11A. Before reacting (detecting) the touch sensor 290, the indicator is displayed with a scale "0", and "charging with the touch sensor" indicating to the player that the touch sensor 290 reacts and raises (charges) the scale of the indicator. The characters "!!" are displayed. Then, when the player holds his / her hand over the touch sensor 290 (touches the touch sensor 290) and turns the touch sensor 290 on (reacted state), the scale of the indicator is raised. There is. FIG. 11A shows a state in which the indicator is raised to the scale “1”. FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a state in which the indicator is raised to the scale “2”.

In this embodiment, although the details will be described later, the change of the indicator that operates based on the touch sensor 290 being turned on is determined in advance by lottery. The lottery of the indicator is executed based on the result of determining whether or not the special symbol that starts to fluctuate, the fluctuation pattern, and the value of the effect count 223k. It is configured so that a larger scale is more easily set when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a hit than when the result is a hit. Further, when the selected fluctuation pattern is a “super reach” fluctuation pattern, a scale larger than that in the case of “normal reach” is easily selected. In the present embodiment, the notice effect display using the touch sensor 290 is not selected for "short-time disconnection" and "long-term disconnection" in which the fluctuation pattern does not reach.

With this configuration, when the notice effect display using the touch sensor 290 is displayed at the start of the change of the special symbol, the player identifies that the change that has started the change display is the reach display mode. Next, the photo sensor 290 can be activated, and the game can be enjoyed to see how far the scale of the indicator goes up. When the scale of the indicator is raised to the large scale, the player can increase the expectation for the big hit and can enjoy the game more.

FIG. 11 (c) shows the lower right (small area Ds3) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated a predetermined number of times (10 times in this embodiment) during the variable display of the special symbol. A notice effect display (special notice display) that imitates a placard is displayed. In this way, by displaying the advance notice effect based on the specific operation of the player, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored during the game. This notice display is a notice display set in the process of S1913 of the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 59, S1307) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

An example of the variable display mode of the background mode A and the background mode B displayed by the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 13. FIG. 12A is a diagram showing a state in which the reach display mode is set when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is selected and the background mode A is selected. FIG. 12B shows a display mode on the third symbol display device 81 when the same fluctuation pattern as in FIG. 12A is selected and the background mode B is selected at the same timing. It is a figure. In this way, even when the same fluctuation pattern is selected, the displayed contents differ due to the different selected background modes, and the timing of display in the reach display mode also differs. .. In the background mode B shown in FIG. 12B, the pseudo symbol configured in the same manner as the main symbol is stopped and displayed, and the actual main symbol is reduced to the lower right of the third symbol display device 81. It is displayed in a variable manner. With this configuration, in the background mode B, it is possible to recognize that the display is stopped in a display mode indicating the deviation. After that, as shown in FIG. 13A, in the background mode A, an effect display as to whether or not to develop into a special reach is executed. On the other hand, in the background mode B, as shown in FIG. 13 (b), the pseudo symbol imitating the main symbol starts to fluctuate again and is displayed in a fluctuating manner, and the actual main symbol is on the right as shown in FIG. It is reduced to the bottom and displayed in a variable manner.

Next, FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a timing chart of the variation display mode in each background mode shown in FIGS. 12 to 13 described above. According to the background mode selected by the player with the frame button 22, the variation display of the special symbol is started based on the variation start timing. The timing of the start of fluctuation is the same regardless of whether the background mode A is selected or the background mode B is selected.

In this embodiment, although details will be described later, when the variation pattern (variation time) is determined from the variation pattern selection table, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection table. In addition to the type, a fluctuation pattern command indicating a fixed time and an addition command indicating an addition time in which the time specified in the fluctuation pattern is added are output to the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the command output from the main control device 110 for determining the fluctuation pattern is composed of two commands, a fluctuation pattern command and an addition command indicating the addition time. It should be noted that the total of the fixed time and the addition time indicated by the fluctuation pattern is configured to be the fluctuation time determined by the lottery. The MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can select an effect with a high degree of freedom by this addition command.

As shown in FIG. 14, after the fluctuation starts, the fluctuation display set at a fixed time is executed. In the case of this example, the fixed time is set to 8000 ms, and is composed of the same time as the fluctuation time of a short time deviation. Therefore, based on this fixed time, the voice lamp control device 113 fluctuates with respect to the display control device 114 in the background mode A in the same manner as the short-time deviation, and then the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row. Stop display is performed in a reach display mode in which Z3 is stopped and displayed with the same symbol (see FIG. 12A). On the other hand, in the background mode B, after displaying the same fluctuation as the short-time off, a pseudo symbol similar to the main symbol is displayed, and the stop symbol indicating the deviation in the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed, and the actual main symbol is displayed. The design is reduced and displayed in the small area Ds3 (see FIG. 12B). The SW valid period, which is the period during which the background mode can be changed, is also set to 4000 ms in the same manner as the short-time deviation.

The MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is indicated by an addition command received from the main control device 110 when the SW valid period has elapsed and the background mode cannot be changed by the player. Based on the addition time, the effect after the lapse of the fixed time is determined based on the selected background mode, and the display command is output to the display control device 114. In the example shown in FIG. 79, in the background mode A, an effect for notifying the player whether or not to develop into the super reach shown in FIG. 13A is displayed after the lapse of the fixed time.

On the other hand, when the background mode B is selected, after the fixed time elapses, the pseudo symbol starts to fluctuate, and the fluctuation display similar to the short-time deviation is executed. It should be noted that the actual main symbol continues to be variablely displayed at high speed in a state of being reduced to the small area Ds3. After that, while the fluctuation display (fluctuation time) similar to the short-time deviation is displayed again, specifically, while the fluctuation is at high speed, the pseudo symbol is replaced with the actual main symbol, and the main symbol is replaced. Is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating reach display. After that, the background mode A and the background mode B execute the same super reach display mode at the same timing.

In this way, in a configuration in which a player can enjoy different variable displays by selecting a plurality of background modes in one variable display of a special symbol, a plurality of effects are reproduced and used as a background. In a configuration in which playback processing is executed from that timing based on switching by changing the mode or switching the background mode, a problem occurs in which the control load of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 increases. .. However, as in the present embodiment, by configuring the command for selecting the fluctuation pattern with a command indicating a fixed time and a command indicating an addition time, a similar special symbol is obtained based on the command indicating the fixed time. By controlling to execute the variable display (only the variable display over time and the background are different) and determining the effect based on the command indicating the addition time when the period during which the background mode can be changed has elapsed, The control process for determining only one effect is sufficient, and the control load can be reduced. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 does not need to calculate the remaining fluctuation time and determine the effect, etc., and can reduce the load required for control.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 fluctuates by indicating whether or not the lottery of ordinary symbols performed as the ball passes through the through gate 67 is being executed by the lighting state, and stops after the fluctuation ends. As a symbol, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, a variable display that alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the second symbol is displayed. Will be done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 64c attached to the second starting port 64b operates for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in a state (opened), and as a result, a ball can easily enter the second starting port 64b. The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 described above and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol holding lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, as in the case of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and the ball passes through the through gate 67 three times or less, or five times or more. The number of times (for example, 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first starting port 64a and a second starting port 64b through which a ball can enter are arranged. When a ball enters the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b, the first ball entry switch and the second ball entry switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 are turned on. Due to the turning on of the first ball entry switch and the second ball entry switch, the main control device 110 draws a lottery for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, and the display according to the lottery result is the first symbol display device 37. It is indicated by LED37a of. Further, the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls when the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b are entered is the same, but the number of prize balls may be different. For example, when the ball enters the first starting port 64a, the number of prize balls for the second starting port 64b is set as three prize balls, and when the ball enters the second starting port 64b, the number of prize balls is set as four prize balls. It may be set more than the number of prize balls for one starting port 64a. With this configuration, more prize balls can be given to the player when the normal symbol is hit for a long time, and the value of the normal symbol for a long time can be further increased. Therefore, the player can play the game with expectation other than the big hit of the special symbol, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game. In addition, the player can obtain more prize balls during the time reduction and the probability change period, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player's balls are extremely reduced during the time reduction and the probability change period.

On the other hand, when the prize balls of the second start port 64b are set smaller than those of the first start port 64a, it is possible to design so that more game balls are won in the second start port 64b during the probability variation period and the time reduction. Therefore, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 can be maintained at a larger number, and an efficient game can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the game time during the probabilistic change period during the time reduction, and it is possible to increase the sales on the game store side.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the second starting opening 64b, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (16 rounds of jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are temporarily formed. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening port provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 15) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 15). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 16, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like can be used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, in order to select the special hit random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol. The special hit type counter C2 to be used, the initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the fluctuation pattern are used. Further, the ordinary hit random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 42). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a composed of four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas) for storing the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 and a reserved ball of the special symbol 2. The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of the four reserved areas (holding 1st to 4th areas) is provided, and the special symbol holding ball execution area common to the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is provided. It is provided. In each area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the values of the special hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the first starting port 64a. Similarly, in each area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, similar values are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the second starting port 64b.

Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and the balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The special hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), reaches the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return. In particular, when the special hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1.

Further, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the special hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 42).

The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the RAM 203 reaches the timing when the ball wins the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b. It is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the special symbol jackpot random number counter C1 is the special symbol. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special symbol) with a higher probability of becoming a jackpot of a special symbol than the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (the period during which it is in a high probability state), and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the high probability of the special symbol and the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the low probability of the special symbol are in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided in.

The special hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). , The maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99) is reached and then returns to 0. The value of the special hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol 1 hold ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first start port 64a. It is stored in the storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the display corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. The mode is that of a big hit with a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In the present embodiment, two types of jackpots, "big hit A" and "big hit B", are set, and one of "big hit A" and "big hit B" is set by the special hit type counter C2. It is determined. Then, the display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

The special hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this special hit random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that serve as jackpots for special symbols when the probability of special symbols is low, and the random number values "7,107,282" are special symbol jackpots for low probability. It is stored in the random number table. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 3 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/100".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a special symbol, there are 30 random numbers that are big hits for the special symbol, and the values are "4,11,28,38,45,52,64,78,83,99,106, 112,122,134,140,151,168,176,183,197,207,218,222,231,249,256,263,270,285,299 "is a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. It is stored in. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that become the jackpot is 30 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol becoming the jackpot is "1/10".

In this embodiment, a random number value that is a jackpot stored in a special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability and a random number value that is a jackpot stored in a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. So, the random number values that are the jackpots for each are set so that the values do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random value for the jackpot regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random number value may be input from the outside and the jackpot may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random value that becomes the jackpot is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in the special hit type counter C2 set in the jackpot type selection table (not shown), when the random number value is "0 to 59", the jackpot type is "big hit A". Further, when the value is "60 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B".

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special hit type counter C2. From the value (random number value) of the special hit type counter C2, the random number value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot type table (not shown), and this table is mainly used. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the control device 110.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 17B), which stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, is the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided inside.

In the variation pattern selection table 202b, variation pattern selection tables for selecting a variation pattern dedicated to the special symbol 1 are set for each game state (normal game state, time-saving game state, probability variation game state). Although the selection of the fluctuation pattern in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described in more detail later, the main control device 110 is based on the hit / fail determination result, the number of reserved balls, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Then, the content of the rough fluctuation pattern (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and the fluctuation time are determined, and the fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined content is set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 18 to 22, the main controller 110 selects a variation pattern, and in the voice lamp control device 113, a detailed variation pattern is generated based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110. The mechanism to be decided will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 18 to 22, a variation pattern selection table for determining the variation pattern between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is set in the variation pattern selection table 222a of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, respectively. Has been done. In the present embodiment, the variable pattern selection table selected in the normal gaming state is shown, but it is also set in the time-saving gaming state and the probabilistic gaming state, respectively.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the time after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 is measured by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the timekeeping data measured by the RTC 292, and is normally 54 minutes. When the production period (mode A) is set and the normal production period elapses, a 1-minute preparation period (mode B) is set, and after the preparation period, a 5-minute time production period (mode C) is set. To. Details of each of these periods will be described later, but depending on the set period, even if the variation pattern command from the main controller 110 is the same, the variation pattern selected will differ depending on the period. Set. Here, even if different effects are set, the effect is composed of the variation time indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the variation time of each effect, the result of determining whether the result is correct, or the rough variation. The contents (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) are configured to be the same. With this configuration, the main control device 110 does not need to determine individual fluctuation patterns, and control addition can be reduced. Further, the amount of data in the variation pattern selection table stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 can also be suppressed.

A special figure 1 variation pattern selection table, which is a part of the variation pattern selection table 202b, will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, each fluctuation pattern is set based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 according to the hit / fail determination result of the special symbol 1 at the start of fluctuation and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 at the start of fluctuation. It is configured to be selected. Here, as the fluctuation pattern to be determined, the rough type and fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern are determined. Various types of "normal reach" and "super reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns selected when the hit / fail judgment result common to "big hit A" and "big hit B" is a big hit. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is assigned to each fluctuation pattern, and if the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. If the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 regardless of the value of the number of reserved pieces. Here, when the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the fluctuation pattern that becomes "super reach" is set to be easier to select than "normal reach". Therefore, when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, the fluctuation pattern of "super reach" is executed and the frequency of becoming a big hit increases, and the player hits the jackpot when the fluctuation pattern of "super reach" is selected. Easy to have expectations.

In the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern A, which is the jackpot fluctuation pattern of the "normal reach", the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed for a predetermined time through the reach display mode in which the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed with the same symbol. After the variable display, the variable display mode is stopped and displayed with the same symbol as the main symbol of the reach display mode. The fluctuation pattern of the jackpot of "normal reach" is composed of a relatively short fluctuation time as compared with the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot of "super reach" described later.

The super reach jackpot fluctuation patterns A to C, which are the jackpot fluctuation patterns of the "super reach", are displayed in the reach display mode as in the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern A, and then the characters and the like are displayed to display the reach display mode. The effect of whether or not the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed is executed with the same symbol as the symbol displayed in. The "super reach" fluctuation pattern is composed of a relatively longer fluctuation time than the "normal reach" fluctuation pattern.

Next, as the fluctuation pattern selected when the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol 1 is wrong, the fluctuation pattern for the miss is "short-time off (for short-time)" and "long-time off (for short-time)". ) ”,“ Normal reach off ”, and“ Super reach off ”are stipulated. The short-time deviation fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern of "short-time deviation", is composed of a fluctuation time (800 ms) shorter than other fluctuation patterns, and is not displayed in the reach display mode, but is a main symbol for a predetermined time. After the variable display, the display mode in which the main symbol is stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2 is executed. The long-term deviation fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern of "long-time deviation", is composed of a fluctuation time (12000 ms) longer than that of the short-time deviation fluctuation pattern. The normal reach deviation variation pattern, which is a variation pattern of "normal reach deviation", has a different display mode in which the middle symbol row Z2 is finally stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the symbol of the reach display mode with respect to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern. It is a display mode which shows that the constructed lottery result is out of order. This normal reach deviation variation pattern is configured to be easier to select than the super reach deviation variation pattern, which will be described later, when the hit / fail determination result is incorrect. Further, the super reach deviation variation pattern, which is “super reach deviation”, is a different display mode in that it is finally displayed in a display mode indicating the deviation with respect to various super reach jackpot fluctuation patterns.

If the result of determining whether the special symbol 1 is correct or not is incorrect, the variation pattern selected depending on whether the number of reserved special symbols 1 at the start of the variation is 0 to 2 or 3 to 4. The fluctuation type counter CS1 is assigned to each fluctuation pattern so that the ratio of

When the number of holdings is 0 to 2, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is not assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "short-time deviation" and is not selected. As a result, when the number of holdings is 0 to 2, the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern becomes relatively long, and during that time, it becomes easy to insert the game ball into the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a period in which the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (a period in which the lottery for the game is not executed) occurs.

Further, when the number of reserved items is 3 to 4, a large proportion of the variation pattern of "short-time deviation" is set. As a result, when the number of reserved balls is close to the upper limit of 3 to 4, a short fluctuation pattern is easily selected, so that even if the ball enters the first starting port 64a, the number of invalid balls is equal to or greater than the number of reserved balls. It is possible to suppress the problem of becoming.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12B, the special figure 2 variation pattern selection table A selected when the variation of the special symbol 2 is started in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state) will be described. When the hit / fail determination result is a big hit, it is configured in the same manner as the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table (see FIG. 18).

On the other hand, when the hit / fail judgment result is incorrect, each fluctuation pattern is divided into a case where the number of holdings of the special symbol 2 is 0 and a case where the number of holdings is 1 to 4, and each fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation type counter. It is allocated and set according to the value of CS1. When the number of holdings is 0, only the variation pattern that becomes the reach is set. Therefore, when the number of holdings of the special symbol 2 is 0, when the special symbol 2 starts to change, the reach is always set. The fluctuation pattern is configured to be selected. As a result, when the ball wins the second starting port 64b in a long-time hit or a normal hit, a variation pattern that reaches even if the number of holdings is 0 is selected. Therefore, the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 is likely to result in reach, and the player can play the game with the expectation of a big hit rather than the fluctuation of the special symbol 1.

Further, in a long time hit, a plurality of balls are likely to win a prize, and a reserved ball is likely to be generated, and a special notice display effect is executed for each change of the reserved ball. Then, in the final fluctuation of the reserved ball, the fluctuation pattern that becomes the reach is always selected, so that it is possible to provide the player with a more fresh effect.

On the other hand, when the number of pending items is 1 to 4, if the hit / fail judgment result is incorrect, only the variation pattern of short-time deviation and long-term deviation is set, and the variation pattern to reach is set. It has not been. With this configuration, the effect of whether or not the fluctuation when the number of reserved pieces becomes 0 is a big hit is performed during the display of the fluctuation pattern which starts to fluctuate when the number of reserved pieces is 1 to 4. It is possible to make multiple fluctuations appear to the player as related effects. In addition, despite the fact that the fluctuation is out of the ordinary, it is possible to have expectations for a big hit against the previous fluctuation.

FIG. 12C shows a special figure 2 variation pattern selection table B for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol 2 during the time saving or high probability gaming state (during probability variation).

The normal hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239), the counter returns to 0. Further, when the normal hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. At that time, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 17 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is set. If it matches the value of the random number to be the hit set by the normal hit random number table 202c, it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol. Further, the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 17A) has a probability of hitting a normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability (a period during which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and when the probability is low. It is divided into two types, one for high probability time (the period during which the time is shortened for a normal symbol), and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. Further, the hit type of the normal symbol is set to normal hit and long-time hit, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is set for each.

Here, in the normal game state (low probability game state) for the normal hit of the normal symbol, and in the big hit game state, the operation in which the electric accessory 64c is operated in the open state with an open time of 0.2 seconds is executed once. It is a hit to be done. Further, during the time saving and the probability variation period, the operation of operating the electric accessory 64c in the open state with the opening time of 2 seconds is repeated twice. On the other hand, the long-time hit is a hit in which the operation of operating the electric accessory 64c in the open state with an open time of 2 seconds is repeated twice regardless of the gaming state.

In the present embodiment, the opening operation of the electric accessory 64c, which is executed in the probabilistic period during the short time in the normal hit, and the opening operation in the long-time hit are set to be the same, but the opening operation is not limited to this, and the long-time hit is different. It may be an opening operation of. Specifically, for example, the operation of being in the open state may be performed once for 3 seconds. With this configuration, it is possible to allow the ball to enter the second starting port 64b more when hit for a long time, and it is possible to facilitate the execution of the variable display with the special symbol 2 during the normal game. It is possible to entertain the player with the change of the game production by the variable display of the special symbol 2 in which the fresh notice display and the like are displayed.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17A, if the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is any of 5 to 20 at the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the normal hit of the normal symbol is achieved. Is determined to be. Further, if it is any of 21 to 28, it is determined that it is a long-time hit of a normal symbol. On the other hand, when the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is any of 5 to 204 at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, it is determined that the normal symbol is a normal hit. In addition, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the long-time hit of the normal symbol is not set, but when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the opening operation of the electric accessory 64c is the same as the long-time hit. The hit is virtually the same as the long hit.

By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol. Therefore, when the probability is low, the frequency with which the electric accessory 64c is operated can be reduced, and the frequency with which the ball enters the second starting port 64b can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the profit of the game store side by increasing the consumption of the game ball of the player by mainly entering the ball into the first starting port 64a. On the other hand, during the time reduction and the probability variation period, which have a high probability, the opportunity for the electric accessory 64c to operate can be given with a probability of "1 / 1.2", which increases the chance of entering the second starting port 64b. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the game ball of the player and set the game state advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can play the game aiming at the game with a high probability, and can play the game for a longer time.

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. It runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the winning symbol is won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) The symbol "○" is lit and displayed. Then, if the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is "5 to 20", the second starting port 64b is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" as a normal hit. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the second starting port 64b is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times". Further, if the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is "21 to 28", the second starting port 64b is opened only "2 seconds x 2 times" as a long-time hit.

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 17A) for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Run for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning symbol is won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second starting port 64b is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and the release period of the second starting port 64b is further reduced. Is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", so that the ball can easily enter the second starting port 64b. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second starting port 64b is opened only "2 seconds x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but the opening time And the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32). , It is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 42).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 15, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 16, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 42) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 41) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 27) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 17C, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number. It has a counter 203d, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, an opening number counter 203h, a long-time opening flag 203i, a time-saving / medium-time counter 203j, and another memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the special symbol 1 and four hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area), and each of these areas is special. Each value of the hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64a (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. Judgment such as lottery of special symbols is performed based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 which is shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having the smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored. Further, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the special symbol 2.

The ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A random number counter C4 is normally stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through either the left or right through gate 67, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ) Is vacant, and the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes vacant. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a, the winning prizes stored in the other hold areas The shift process is performed to pack the data into the holding area that is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d displays fluctuations (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry of balls into the first starting port 64a (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to 4 times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first starting port 64a and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 It is added (see S404 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 33).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (holding number N of the variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 33 and S405 in FIG. 35). .. The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts the reserved balls based on winning the second starting port 64b, and the other configurations are the same as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. A detailed description will be omitted.

The voice lamp control device 113 holds the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the balls in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 ( See S704 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 38).

When the sphere passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings M of the fluctuation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4. Is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (Fig.). 39 S703: No).

The opening number counter 203g is a counter for counting the opening times of the electric punctuation marks 64c.

The opening time counter 203h is a counter for counting the opening time of the electric punctuation mark 64c.

The long-time open flag 203i is a flag indicating that the product is hit for a long time. This long-time open flag 203i is set to ON in the process of S629 executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Although not shown, it is usually set to off based on the end of long-term hitting of the symbol. Specifically, in the process of S1105 of the electric accessory opening process (FIG. 43, S1005) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the release number counter 203 g is set to off when it is determined to be 0. ..

The time saving medium counter 203j is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving counter 203j is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110 and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Will be done. That is, when a special symbol becomes a big hit, a new value is set according to the big hit type regardless of the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including switch groups and sensor groups (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 27) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content of the above, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 23A, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a variation pattern selection table 222a, a hold effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 24A), and a look-ahead effect lottery table 222c (FIG. 24 (c)). ), Look-ahead effect selection table 222d (see FIGS. 24 (c) to (d)), notice selection table 222e (see FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (b)), touch notice selection table (see FIG. 26 (a)). ) Is stored. Further, as shown in FIG. 23 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and a variable start. Flag 223d, Stop type selection flag 223e, Winning information storage area 223f, Normal winning information storage area 223g, Sub long-time open flag 223h, Opening effect flag 223i, Hold effect counter 223j, Effect counter 223k, Time effect execution flag 223m, Setting Time storage area 223n, preparation period flag 223o, start period flag 223p, SW effective time counter 223q, sensor effective time counter 223r, touch counter 223s, background mode storage area 223t, fluctuation number counter 223u, SW number counter 223v, effect mode storage At least an area 223w, an addition command storage area 223x, an addition command reception flag 223y, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 47) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. It controls the production). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 27).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by 1. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged consecutively on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the interest of the player.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation for.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting it, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be enabled in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 61) executed after the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 61) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the NAND flash memory 234a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 31) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 63 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for reading the data can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, since it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to the 235e and the error message image area 235f, at least the variable image area 235b and the third symbol area 235d when the power is turned on are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first starting port 64a is detected. In this case, it is an area for storing image data corresponding to the fluctuating image at power-on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the fluctuating effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see FIG. 61).

Here, the fluctuation image when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (not shown). 3 Display on the symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position when facing the screen and the fluctuation image of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. Medium, alternate and repeat display. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image showing it is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image showing it is stopped. It will be displayed for a certain period later.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, if the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the fluctuating image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images showing "○" and "×" are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If an entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Returning to FIG. 27, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b, the change effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, but the change is caused in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the production is not started immediately.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first framebuffer 236b and the second framebuffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table and display data in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

Further, since the first starting port 64a is a winning port in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is opened as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball becomes the second starting port. The easier it is to enter 64b, the more prize balls. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 plays a game, the number of balls held is difficult to decrease, or the number of balls held is not reduced. Therefore, the player is in a state where the number of balls held is difficult to decrease, or the number of balls held is reduced. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a big hit of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a boy image and a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Information on effects and characters is defined as one or more according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table.

When it is specified that the MPU 231 displays one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (underwater, beach, background of preparation period, background dedicated to time production) depending on this back type, the player of the background The back image corresponding to the specified stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. During that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 28). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 31) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 30). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data meaning (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 30).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

In addition, in "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 30, in the example of FIG. 30). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 31) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 30, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Null data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is displayed. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before being used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display an image at power-on (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) on the third symbol display device 81 (not shown). The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 61) (see S2005 in FIG. 61). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S3505 in FIG. 71 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. 63 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 63 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 63B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 63 (b), see S2309). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command is determined so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 37 to 41) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 69 to 70 (b)) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3401 in FIG. 71 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 71 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 72) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 31), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of instructions for drawing an image are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 31), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 31) described later that describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 63 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S3105 in FIG. 70B) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 31) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 31, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and various image controllers 237 are used. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing by the method specified by that information according to filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image and the warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 creates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 63 (b). ) Is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3107 in FIG. 69). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S2002 in FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 72) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3517 in FIG. 72). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3518 in FIG. 72). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 73).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, displays the image on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 63 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see S3602 in FIG. 73).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 32 to 43. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated to RAM203. Store in the corresponding buffer area of.

Further, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values become the maximum values (299, 99, 239, respectively in this embodiment). When it reaches, it clears to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C2 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then a special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with the winning of the first starting port 64a (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 33 to 36.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the sphere at the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through-gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 37 and 39. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (S201: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e (the number of hold counts N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 ( S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation is set. (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After the process of S207 is executed, the process of S213 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203d is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is acquired. (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d acquired in the process of S208 is 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is set to 1. Subtract (S210), and set the hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation (S211). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After the hold ball number command is set by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S213). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time is determined. If (S214: No) has not elapsed, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 34. When this special symbol change start process is executed, it is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area commonly provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , A lottery of special symbols will be held. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the special hit random number counter C1, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it is a big hit according to the value of the special hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be A or jackpot B.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The LED display is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S216). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S216: Yes), it is determined what type of jackpot is among the two types of jackpots of special symbols (big hit A, jackpot B) (S217), and the jackpot type. If is a jackpot B, 100 is set in the time reduction / medium counter 203j of the RAM 203 (S218). After that, the process of S220 is executed. If the jackpot type is jackpot A, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability of the probability variation period (S219). Then, the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S220), and this process ends.

In the process of S216, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 1 or more (S221), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 1. If the above is the case (S221: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S222), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is 0 (S221: No), the processing of S222 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

Next, a special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 33) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), and includes the special symbol retention 1 retaining ball storage area 203a. Special symbol 2 Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common with the reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (win / fail judgment) for "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing (S213), first, each of the special hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Get the value (S301).

Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is currently in the probability variation period (high probability gaming state) (S302). It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not it is the probability variation period is executed by determining whether or not the probability variation flag (not shown) is on. This probability variation flag is set to on based on the end of the jackpot game based on jackpot A. On the other hand, it is set to off based on the start of the jackpot game.

If it is determined that the probabilistic change is in progress (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol, so the process proceeds to the process of S303. In the processing of S303, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability (S303). ). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 30 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. As described above, as the random number value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol, "4,11,28,38,45,52,64,78,83,99,106,112,122,134,140,151,168" , 176,183,197,207,218,222,231,249,256,263,270,285,299 "are set, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and these hits are set. If it matches the random number value, it is determined that it is a big hit of a special symbol. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (S302: No), the process of S304 is executed. In the processing of S304, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability (S304). ). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random number value of 3 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. Three random numbers "7,107,282" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and when the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number values to be hits match, Judged as a big hit of a special symbol. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In the processing of S305, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes), based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and the jackpots of the two types of special symbols (big hit A, jackpot). Among B), it is determined what kind of jackpot is. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 59", it is determined that the jackpot is A (16R jackpot, the probability variation period until the next jackpot after the jackpot game), and "60 to 99". If it is within the range of ", it is determined that the jackpot is B (16R jackpot, 100 times in a short time period of a normal symbol).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

In the fluctuation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the fluctuation time of the third symbol for notifying the hit / fail determination result, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the fluctuation time. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content (fluctuation pattern) of the variation display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the fluctuation time and the result of the hit / fail determination. The main control device 110 is configured so that even if the display mode is the off-reach, the voice lamp control device 113 can switch between the reach display mode and the non-reach display mode within the same fluctuation time. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and the production can be diversified.

For example, as the fluctuation pattern for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", and "disengagement special reach" are defined. ing. As the fluctuation pattern shared by jackpot A and jackpot B, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off-symbol, and is stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. The fluctuation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S308, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is confirmed based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. To determine.

Next, the addition command set in the variation pattern selection table 202b is set corresponding to the selected variation pattern (S310). As shown in FIG. 82, this addition command is determined based on the hit / fail determination result, the number of reserved balls, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As shown in FIG. 19, the addition command comprises a variable time composed of a fixed time and an addition time, and indicates the addition time. In the present embodiment, for the fluctuation pattern that becomes super reach, the fixed time is configured by the fluctuation time similar to the short-time deviation, and the addition time is configured by the time other than the fixed time. With this configuration, in the fixed time, the fluctuation time until the reach display mode is reached can be set with the same fluctuation time as the short-time deviation, and the addition command can be used for the display of characters, etc. that become the super reach from the reach display mode. Can be set based on. Therefore, since the display can be set separately for the fluctuation display mode having a long fluctuation time, the control load at the start of the fluctuation can be reduced.

Next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S311). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S312). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 42). To. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S312 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 64a, and if there is a starting winning, This is a process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and for executing the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the various held random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first starting port 64a (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first starting port 64a is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the sphere has won the first starting port 64a (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d (the number of reserved variability displays N1 in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first starting port 64a (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first starting port 64a, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first starting port 64a (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N) of the number counter 203d is added by 1 (S404). Then, the reserved ball number command of the special symbol 1 indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the special symbol of the RAM 203. 1 The reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, with respect to S407 to S413, for each of the processes S401 to S406 described above, the process for winning the first start port 64a is only changed to the process for winning the second start port 64b. Since the same processing is executed, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. When a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 64b, even if it is stored as a reserved ball, the values of the special hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 are acquired, and the corresponding special symbol 2 is obtained. It is stored in the empty hold area of the hold ball storage area 203b.

In this way, by acquiring each value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 similar to the special symbol 1 for the special symbol 2 based on the entry into the second starting port 64b, it is special. Since the lottery can be executed using a common random number for the symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, the winning probability can be made constant for both the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

After executing the process of S413, the look-ahead process is executed (S414). The details of the look-ahead process (S414) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 36, but are based on the values of various counters acquired for entering the ball into the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. Then, a process of determining in advance the result of each lottery executed at the start of fluctuation is executed.

In the present embodiment, the value of each counter is configured to be selected based on the incoming ball, but it may be configured to be selected at the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, the storage area for storing the value of each counter is not required until the start of fluctuation, and the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 can be suppressed. Further, among the counters, some counters (for example, only the fluctuation type counter CS1) may be configured to be acquired at the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, the counter related to the hit / miss judgment can be acquired at the time of entering the ball, and the counter not related to the hit / miss judgment can be obtained later, and the amount of data to be stored can be stored while maintaining the fairness of the game. It can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a look-ahead process (S414), which is one process in the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S414).

In the look-ahead processing (FIG. 36, S414), first, the hit / fail determination at the start of fluctuation is determined based on the acquired value of the special hit random number counter C1 (S421). The hit / fail judgment at the start of fluctuation indicates whether the gaming state at the start of fluctuation is the normal gaming state (low probability) or the probabilistic gaming state (high probability gaming state). 203a, special symbol 2 The value of each counter stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is variable and displayed, and the value is determined by the hit / fail judgment and the hit type.

In the process of S422, it is determined whether or not the determination result executed in the process of S421 is a hit (S422). When it is determined that the determination result is a hit (S422: Yes), it is determined whether the hit type is the jackpot A or based on the special hit type counter C2 (S423). When it is determined that the hit type is jackpot A (S423: Yes), a winning command indicating jackpot A is set (S424). On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot B (S423: No), a winning command indicating that the jackpot is B is set (S425). Further, in the process of S422, when it is determined that the result of the determined hit / fail determination is incorrect (S422: No), the incorrect winning command is set (S426).

In this way, the result of the hit / fail determination in advance before the start of fluctuation is output as a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the reserved ball is established, so that the voice lamp control device 113 can be used. The hit / fail judgment result and the hit type can be recognized in advance. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 may change the color of the reserved symbol to a color that notifies the winning / failing judgment result in advance based on the winning command to notify the player of the winning / failing judgment result for the reserved ball. , An effect such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the hit / fail determination result in the reserved ball) can be executed. Further, since one winning command is output for the reserved ball each time the reserved ball is established, the voice lamp control device 113 can also recognize the establishment of the reserved ball.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the electric motor attached to the second starting port 64b. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory 64c.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c attached to the second starting port 64b is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. Includes monaka. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, the normal symbol variation start process is executed (S608), and this process is terminated. The normal symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S609). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S637 or the process of S638 of FIG. 38 before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S609, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S609: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S609, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S609: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S610). In the processing of S610, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of S627 or S631 of FIG. 38, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is displayed as the second symbol. It is set so that the stop display (lighting display) is displayed in the device 83. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S635 of FIG. 38, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). When the stop display is set by the process of S610, the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 42) is executed next. After completion, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S627, the process of S631 or the process of S635 of FIG. 38.

Next, when the variable display being executed by the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result of the normal symbol (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process a hit of the normal symbol? Is determined (S611). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S611: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64c attached to the second starting port 64b is set (S612), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64c is set by the process of S612, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 42) is executed, the electric accessory 64c The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S630 or the process of S634 of FIG. 38 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S611, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S611: No), the process of S612 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol variation start processing (S608) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation start processing (S608). This normal symbol variation start process (S608) sets the setting at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol executed in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 37) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32). It is a process to be executed.

It is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit (S621). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (S621: Yes), the process proceeds to S624.

In the process of S621, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S621: No), it is determined whether or not it is in the probability change or the time reduction (S622). If there is neither a probability change nor a time saving (S622: No), the process proceeds to S624.

If the probability change or the time reduction is in progress (S622: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time reduction state of the normal symbol. Based on the value of the random number counter C4 and the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 17 (a)) for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S623). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 17A) for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 17 (a)).

In the processing of S624, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 of FIG. Based on the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 17 (a)) for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S624). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 17A) for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 20", it is determined that it is a normal hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "21 to 28", it is the normal symbol. It is determined that the hit is for a long time, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 17 (a)).

In the present embodiment, the lottery of ordinary symbols is less likely to be won during the jackpot of special symbols. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory 64c attached to the second starting opening 64b is opened. This is to prevent the ball trying to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the second starting opening 64b as much as possible. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the second starting opening 64b, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the second starting opening 64b during the jackpot of the special symbol, the second starting opening Many balls enter 64b. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the second starting port 64b becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S623 or S624 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S625), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S625: Yes). , It is determined whether the type of hit of the normal symbol is a long-time hit (S626). When it is determined that the hit type of the normal symbol is a long-time hit (S626: Yes), the display mode for the long-time hit is set (S627). In the process of S627, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). Next, a long-time hit start command is set (S627), and the long-time release flag 203i is turned on (S629). Then, the process proceeds to S630.

When it is determined in the process of S626 that the type of hit of the normal symbol is normal hit (S626: No), the display mode at the time of normal hit is set (S631). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability change or the time is shortened (S632).

Then, if the probability change or the time is shortened (S632: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit of the special symbol (S633). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S633: Yes), the process proceeds to S634. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the second starting port 64b as much as possible, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is off. , The number of times the electric accessory 64c is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S633, unless the special symbol is a big hit (S633: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 64c attached to the second starting port 64b is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 2. Then (S630), the process proceeds to S636. In the process of S630, 2 is set in the opening number counter 203g, and a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the opening time counter 203h.

In the process of S632, if there is neither a probability change nor a time saving (S632: No), the process proceeds to the process of S634. In the processing of S632, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 64c attached to the second starting port 64b is set to 0. . Set to 2 seconds, set the number of times of opening to 1 (S634), and shift to the process of S636. In the process of S634, 1 is set in the opening number counter 203g, and a value corresponding to 0.2 seconds is set in the opening time counter 203h.

In the process of S625, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S625: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S635). In the process of S635, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S636.

In the process of S636, it is determined whether or not the probability change is in progress (S636), and if the probability change is in progress (S636: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S637). , End this process. On the other hand, if the process of S636 is not in the process of probabilistic change (S636: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S638), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the release period of the second starting port 64b is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", the ball can easily enter the second starting port 64b.

In the present embodiment, the opening time and the number of times of opening in a long time are set to the same operation as in the case of hitting a normal symbol in the probabilistic state and the short time state, but the operation is not limited to this, and different opening times and the number of times of opening It may be configured to be set.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and if the ball has passed, a random number per normal hit. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the counter C4.

In the through-gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the through-gate 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the sphere at the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

If the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S701: No), or if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S703). : No), the process proceeds to S706. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f The value (M) is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area (S705), and the process proceeds to S706. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

In the processing of S706, based on the acquired value of the random number counter C4, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is correct or not at the start of fluctuation (S706), and the process proceeds to S707. In the process of S707, it is determined whether or not the hit / fail determination result of the normal symbol is a hit (S707).

When it is determined in the process of S707 that the hit / fail determination result of the normal symbol is a hit (S707: Yes), it is determined whether the hit type of the hit / fail determination result of the normal symbol is a long-time hit (S708). When it is determined that the hit type of the hit / fail judgment result of the normal symbol is a long-time hit (S708: Yes), a long-time hit general figure winning command is set (S709), and this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S708 that the hit type of the hit / fail determination result of the normal symbol is a normal hit (S708: No), the hit normal figure winning command is set (S710).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S707 that the result of the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol is out of order (S707: No), the out-of-order general figure winning command is set (S711), and this process is terminated.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S913. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is shifted to S913 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S913 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 42, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 are correctly saved.

In the process of S913, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S913). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S914, S915) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S914, S915) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S914, S915) is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S914, S915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S915). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S911.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), a status command is transmitted based on the long-time open flag 203i (S908). Next, the power outage occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S909). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of shutting off the drive power is transmitted (S910), and the process proceeds to S911. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S911, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S912), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command to do. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 33) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 35) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the starting winning processing and the look-ahead processing (see FIG. 36) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 64c attached to the second starting port 64b is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64c is set by the process of S612 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 37), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S630 or the processing of S634 in FIG. 38 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed. The details of the electric accessory opening / closing process (S1005) will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 34), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed on the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 34) ends, the first symbol display device The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 34) after ending the variation display executed in 37. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S637 or the process of S638 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 38), the variation display is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the “◯” symbol and the “x” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S610 of the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 37), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S627 or the process of S631 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 38) after ending the variable display. (Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001, and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009: No), the initial time is reached within the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process. The value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special hit random number counter C1). (Initial value of, initial value of random number counter C4 per ordinary) can be updated randomly, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

Further, in the process of S1008, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 40 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1014), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process (S1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this electric accessory opening process (S1005). This electric accessory opening process (S1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42), and the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64c is set by the process of S612 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 37). In this case, it is a process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 64c.

In the electric accessory opening process, first, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 64c is being opened (S1101). When it is determined that the electric accessory 64c is being opened (S1101: Yes), it is determined whether or not the closing timing of the electric accessory 64c is based on whether or not the opening time counter 203h is 0 (S1102). When it is determined that the closing timing of the electric accessory 64c is determined (S1102: Yes), the closing of the electric accessory 64c is set (S1103), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S1102 that the closing timing of the electric accessory 64c is not (S1102: No), the opening time counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S1104), and this process is terminated. As a result, 1 can be deducted at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), so that the time can be accurately measured from the value set in the process of S1109.

When it is determined in the process of S1101 that the electric accessory 64c is not being opened (S1101: No), it is determined whether the opening count counter 203g is larger than 1 (S1105). When the number of times of opening counter 203g is 0 (S1105: No), this process ends. When the opening count counter 203g is larger than 1 (S1105: Yes), it is determined whether or not the opening timing of the electric accessory 64c is set (S1106). When it is determined that the opening timing of the electric accessory 64c is not reached (S1106: No), this process ends.

When it is determined in the process of S1106 that it is the opening timing of the electric accessory 64c (S1106: Yes), the opening number counter 203 g is subtracted by 1 (S1107), and the release of the electric accessory 64c is set (S1108). A value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the open time counter 203h (S1109), and this process ends.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 60, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1318 (see FIG. 46) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 46, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power off command from the main control device 110 (see S1315 in FIG. 46), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power off process of S1318. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1318 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1202: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1318. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1318 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the data shifts to S1208.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1202: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process in S1318, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1206). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

In the process of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1318 is executed (see S1317 in FIG. 46). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1318 is executed, the process of S1208 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1318 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1211) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the process of S1208 is reached with the power off flag turned off because the start-up process of this time was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off, so that the process of S1208 via the processes of S1204 to S1206 was started. This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1209, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1211), the process proceeds to the main process. After that, it is determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1212). In addition, this state command indicates whether or not the normal symbol is hit for a long time based on the long-time open flag 203i in the process of S908 of the start-up process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. It is a command. If it is determined in the process of S1212 that the status command has been received (S1212: Yes), the sub-long-time release flag 223h is set based on the received status command (S1213). Here, when the received state command indicates that it is hit for a long time, the sub long-time open flag 223h is turned on, and when it is shown that it is not a long-time hit, the sub long-time open flag Set 223h to off.

In this way, when the power is turned on, the main control device 110 outputs a command that can determine whether or not the normal symbol has been hit for a long time, so that the voice lamp control device 113 also determines the state. Can be done.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1209 is that when the processing of S1208 is reached via the processing of S1204 to S1206, the processing of S1204 has already cleared all the storage areas of the RAM 223. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

In the process of S1214, the time setting process is executed (S1214). The time setting process (S1214) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 45.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a time setting process (S1214), which is one of the start-up processes (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this time setting process (S1214). In the time setting process (FIG. 45, S1214), the setting of the setting switch 291 is determined to determine whether or not to execute the time effect, and if the setting is to execute the time effect, the time information is acquired from the RTC292. Then, based on the time information, the process of setting the preparation period and the time production period in the set time storage area 223n is executed.

In the time setting process (FIG. 45, S1214), first, it is determined whether the setting of the setting switch 291 is the setting "1" or the setting "3" (S1221). When it is determined that the setting of the setting switch 291 is not the setting "1" or the setting "3" (S1221: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting of the setting switch 291 is the setting "1" or the setting "3" (S1221: Yes), the time information is acquired from the RTC292 (S1222).
As the time information acquired here, the values of "hours and minutes" are acquired. The RTC292 is a timekeeping means having a battery inside, and when the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the same current time is initially set in the pachinko machine 10 by a predetermined jig. The capacity of the internal battery is about three and a half years of operating time. In addition, the RTC292 also has a calendar function, and has a configuration in which the "date" can be determined. Therefore, for example, on Christmas day, it is possible to change the background image for Christmas and to control the display of a special character such as Santa.

It is determined whether the acquired time information is within the deadline data (S1223). Here, the deadline data is set to 3 years within 3 and a half years, which is the capacity of the internal battery of the RTC292 in the present embodiment. A date three years after the date set in advance at the time of manufacturing is set as the deadline data, and when it is determined that the date is after that date, the time effect setting is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a problem that the start timing of the time production cannot be synchronized between the pachinko machines 10 due to a time delay or the like due to insufficient battery capacity or the like.

In the present embodiment, it is determined whether the date is three years after the date set in advance at the time of manufacture, and the time effect execution flag 223 m, which will be described later, is set to be turned on. The voltage value of the battery supplying power to the RTC292 is determined, and when the voltage value is equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage (for example, 3.3V or higher), the time effect execution flag 223m is set to ON. May be good. Here, it is desirable to set the RTC292 to a voltage value or higher that allows normal operation.

In the process of S1223, when it is determined that the acquired time information is out of the deadline data, that is, three years or more have passed (S1223: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired time information is within the deadline data, that is, within 3 years (S1223: Yes), the time effect execution flag 223m is set to ON (S1224). Based on the acquired time information, the preparation period and the time production period are calculated and set in the set time storage area 223n (S1225).

In the present embodiment, the preparation period and the time production period for 24 hours are calculated based on the acquired time information and set in the set time storage area 223n, but the present invention is not limited to this, and first, the normal 54 minutes for executing the game may be set in, the period may be measured by countdown or countup, and the preparation period may be set based on the elapse of 54 minutes. In addition to that, the time after 54 minutes may be set, and the time for the next period may be set when the time is reached. With this configuration, the required capacity of the storage area can be reduced. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be configured at a lower cost.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1301 this time was executed (S1301), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1310. In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1302 to S1310 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1311, the variation display setting process of S1312, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1311 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1312 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1314 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process shifts to the process of S1305 without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. The details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307) will be described later with reference to FIG. 59.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to the process of S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1311, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1311). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47. After the process of this command determination process (FIG. 47, S1311) is executed, the variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 54.

When the process of S1312 is completed, the look-ahead effect selection process is executed (S1313). The details of this look-ahead effect selection process (S1313) will be described later with reference to FIG. 55. After executing the look-ahead effect processing (S1313), the process of the synchronous effect management process (S1314) is executed. The details of this synchronous effect management process (S1314) will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

When the processing of S1314 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1315). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1315 (S1315: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1317), and the power-off process is executed (S1318). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1319), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. It also erases the memory of information on the occurrence of power failure.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1315: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1316), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1316: No), the process returns to the process of S1301 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1316: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1311). This command determination process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. ..

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S1401). When the variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the variation pattern reception process is executed (S1402). After that, this process ends.

Here, the details of this variation pattern reception process (S1402) will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation pattern reception process.

In the variation pattern reception process (S1402), first, the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1421), and the variation pattern selection process is executed (S1422). In this variation pattern selection process (S1422), a process of selecting a variation pattern or a notice effect is executed based on the set effect mode.

Here, the fluctuation pattern selection process (S1422) will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process (S1422). In the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 49, S1422), first, the value of the effect counter 223k is acquired (S1431). It is determined whether or not the effect mode set in the effect mode storage area 223w is the effect mode A (S1432). When it is determined that the effect mode A is set (S1432: Yes), the hit / fail determination result, the number of pending items, and the variation type counter CS1 are displayed from the variation pattern selection table A (FIG. 18 or 21) of the corresponding special symbol. A variation pattern is selected and set based on the value (S1433). After that, the advance notice effect display is selected and set from the advance notice selection table A (see FIG. 25 (a)) based on the result of the hit / miss determination result and the value of the effect counter 223k (S1434). It is selected and set from the touch notice selection table 222f (see FIG. 26A) (S1435).

On the other hand, in the process of S1432, when it is determined that the effect mode A is not set (S1432: No), it is determined whether the effect mode B is set (S1436). When it is determined that the effect mode B is set (S1436: Yes), the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table B (see FIG. 20A or FIG. 22A) of the corresponding special symbol. And set (S1437).

On the other hand, in the process of S1436, when it is determined that the effect mode B is not set, that is, the effect mode C is set (S1436: No), the variation pattern selection table C of the corresponding special symbol (FIG. 20 (b) or FIG. 22 (b)) to select and set a fluctuation pattern (S1438). The notice effect display is selected and set from the notice selection table C (S1439). The notice effect display is selected and set from the touch notice selection table 222f (see FIG. 26A) (S1440).

In this way, it is possible to switch and configure the selected fluctuation pattern based on the set effect mode. Further, the selected variation pattern is the same as the variation time specified by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 by the variation pattern command and the hit / fail determination result, and the content of the effect display and the reach display mode displayed in the variation time. (Normal reach, super reach, or a type thereof) is changed and selected by the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the hit / fail judgment result related to the profit of the player and the fluctuation time related to the gambling are not changed according to those determined by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and therefore, according to the predetermined design value of the pachinko machine 10. You can play pachinko games.

In addition, the advance notice effect is also determined based on the result of the hit / fail judgment at the start of the change, the content of the change pattern (normal reach, super reach, etc.), and the value of the effect counter 223k, so the timing of the display start is determined and selected. There is no need for processing, and the control load can be reduced. Further, in the present embodiment, the timing for displaying the notice is predetermined according to the fluctuation pattern, and by setting the display notice display command indicating the timing, the display control device 114 displays at that timing. Is set to be done.

Here, the description will be continued by returning to FIG. 48. After the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 49, S1422) is executed, the hold effect selection process is executed (S1423). In the hold effect selection process (S1423), a process of setting a notice effect to be displayed for the start of fluctuation of the hold ball that has won the second start port 64b for a long time is executed.

Here, the hold effect selection process (S1423) will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this hold effect selection process (S1423).

In the hold effect lottery process (FIG. 50, S1423), first, it is determined whether the value of the hold effect counter 223j is larger than 0 (S1451). When it is determined that the value of the hold effect counter 223j is 0 or less (S1451: No), is the hold ball that starts to fluctuate the change start of the hold ball for which the release effect flag 223i is set to ON? Determine (S1452). When it is determined that the holding ball with the opening effect flag 223i set to on has started to fluctuate (S1452: Yes), the holding ball corresponding to the number of holding balls with the opening effect flag 223i set to on is held. The value of the effect counter 223j is set (S1453). Here, the opening effect flag 223i is set so that the reserved ball established by opening the electric accessory 64c and entering the second starting port 64b can be discriminated based on the long-time hit of the normal symbol. It is a flag to be set to on corresponding to the reserved ball. In the process of S1453, for example, if the number of reserved balls for which the open effect flag 223i is set to be ON is 3, the value of the hold effect counter 223j is set to 3. On the other hand, in the process of S1452, when it is determined that the opening effect flag 223i is the start of fluctuation of the reserved ball set to off (S1452: No), this process is terminated.

When it is determined in the process of S1451 that the value of the hold effect counter 223j is larger than 0 (S1451: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223k is acquired (S1454). Based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223k, the advance notice effect display mode corresponding to the value of the hold effect counter 223j is selected and set from the hold effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 24A) (S1455).

Here, as shown in FIG. 24A, the hold effect selection table 222b shows the hold effect according to the result of the hit / fail determination of the start of fluctuation or the result of the hit / miss determination of the hold ball in which the open effect flag 223i is set to ON. Corresponding to the value of the counter 223j, each notice effect display is set by the value of the effect counter 223k. Therefore, each advance notice effect display mode is determined based on the result of the hit / fail determination, the value of the effect counter 223k, and the value of the hold effect counter 223j.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 21), even when the hit / fail judgment result is wrong, when the number of reserved balls is 0, it is always necessary. Since the fluctuation pattern of "out of reach" is set to be selected, if the hold effect counter 223j is "1" indicating the case where there are 0 hold balls, a notice display mode such as "great chance" is displayed. Is configured to be easier to select than when the value of the hold effect counter 223j is "2-4", and is configured to give the player more expectations for a big hit.

Therefore, when the player enters the second starting port 64b due to a long hit, a continuous effect is executed between the reserved balls, and the reach display mode is always set in the final fluctuation. The game can be played with a higher expectation of a big hit than the lottery for entering the first starting port 64a (lottery for entering the first starting port 64a in the normal gaming state). Therefore, the player can play the game with a higher expectation of the occurrence of a long time hit, and can prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

When the process of S1455 is executed, a display notice display command instructing the third symbol display device 81 to display the notice effect display set in the process of S1455 is set (generated) (S1456). After that, the value of the hold effect counter 223j is subtracted by 1 (S1457), and this process ends.

Here, the description will be continued by returning to FIG. 48. After the hold effect selection process (FIG. 50, S1423) is executed, the hold quantity transfer process is executed (S1424). In the hold quantity transfer process (S1424), if the special symbol 2 is displayed in a variable manner, it is indicated that the hold ball is established based on the opening of the electric accessory 64c based on the long-time hit of the normal symbol. For the reserved ball for which the open effect flag 223i is set to on, the process of shifting the open effect flag 223i to the area indicating the number of the previous hold is executed.

Next, the reserved quantity transfer process (S1424) will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the hold quantity transfer process (S1424). In the hold quantity transfer process (FIG. 51, S1424), first, it is determined whether or not it is the trigger for the start of fluctuation of the special symbol 2 (special diagram 2) (S1461). When it is determined that it is the trigger for the start of fluctuation of the special symbol 2 (S1461: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a reserved ball in which the open effect flag 223i is set to ON (S1462). When it is determined that there is no reserved ball for which the open effect flag 223i is set to ON (S1462: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reserved balls for which the open effect flag 223i is set to be turned on are stored (S1462: Yes), the open effect flag 223i corresponding to each number of reserved balls is held one before each. The area corresponding to the number of balls is shifted and stored (S1463). On the other hand, in the process of S1461 when it is determined that it is the trigger for the start of fluctuation of the special symbol 1 (S1461: No), this process is terminated.

The open effect flag 223i is individually set corresponding to each of the reserved balls 1 to 4 of the special symbol 2 and the execution area, and is set to ON for the reserved balls established during a long period of time. The flag. Then, when the advance notice effect display corresponding to the digestion of the reserved ball is set along with the digestion of the reserved ball, the open effect flag 223i is also shifted to the area corresponding to the previous reserved ball. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the ball is a reserved ball that has been established during a long period of time.

Here, the description will be continued by returning to FIG. 48. After executing the hold quantity transfer process (S1424), the fluctuation count counter 223u is added by 1 (S1425), and this process ends. The fluctuation count counter 223u is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol since the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, and is reset to 0, which is an initial value, when the power is turned off.

In the present embodiment, the number of fluctuations since the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 is counted, but the number of fluctuations is not limited to this and is maintained by providing a dedicated backup power supply even if the power is turned off. It may be configured so that the timekeeping data can be acquired by RTC292 and the number of fluctuations on a daily basis can be identified. When the timekeeping data is periodically acquired from RTC292 and the date is updated, the value of the fluctuation count counter 223u is saved in the storage area corresponding to the date, and then the value of the fluctuation counter 223u is the initial value. A configuration that resets to 0 can be considered.

Here, the description will be continued by returning to FIG. 47. In the process of S1401, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1403). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1403: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1404), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1405), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 54) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1403: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1406). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1406: Yes), the hold ball number command reception process is executed (S1407). In this hold ball number command reception process (S1407), based on the received hold ball number command, the hold ball number is stored in the corresponding special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b, respectively. Is executed to determine whether the normal symbol is hit for a long time, and if it is hit for a long time, the open effect flag 223i is turned on for the newly stored reserved ball of the special symbol 2. Execute the process set to. Further, in the process of S1407, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1407 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the reserved ball number command reception process (S1407) will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the hold ball number command reception process (S1407).

In the hold ball number command reception process (FIG. 52, S1407), first, each hold ball number is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b are used, respectively. The number of reserved balls is set (S1471). Next, it is determined whether the sub-long-time open flag 223h is on (S1472). When it is determined that the sub-long-time open flag 223h is on (S1472: Yes), it is determined whether or not the reserved ball number command of the special symbol 2 has been received (S1473). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command of the special symbol 2 has been received (S1473: Yes), the release effect flag 223i of the corresponding reserved ball number is set to ON (S1474). On the other hand, in the processing of S1472, when it is determined that the sub-long-time open flag 223h is off (S1472: No), or when it is determined in the processing of S1473 that the reserved ball number command of the special symbol 2 is not received. (S1473: No) ends this process.

Here, the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Therefore, every time a start winning prize is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 are processed by S1407. Can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110, respectively. Therefore, due to the influence of noise and the like, the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 are the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol of the main control device 110. Even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of detecting the start winning or drawing the special symbol. Can be modified to match the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. When the process of S1407 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b is issued. Set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description will be continued by returning to FIG. 47. In the process of S1406, if the reserved ball number command has not been received (S1406: No), then it is determined whether or not a special symbol winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1408). Then, when the winning command is received (S1408: Yes), the winning command receiving process is executed (S1409), and the winning information indicated by the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223f (S1410). After that, it returns to the main process. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (starting winning), the main control device 110 acquires each value of each counter C1 to C3, and the value thereof is acquired. Each value of each of the acquired counters C1 to C3 is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number storage area 203b, respectively. Further, as soon as the respective values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 are acquired in the main control device 110, the original values of the acquired counters C1 to C2 are selected separately from the original special symbol jackpot lottery. Various information obtained when the lottery is held is pre-read (predicted). Then, when the pre-reading is completed in the main control device 110, a winning command including various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113.

Here, the winning command reception process (S1409) will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the winning command reception process (S1409). In the winning command receiving process, first, it is determined whether the sub long-time open flag 223h is on, that is, whether it is hit for a long time (S1481). When it is determined that the sub-long-time open flag 223h is off (S1481: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-long-time open flag 223h is on (S1481: Yes), it is determined whether or not the winning command of the special symbol 2 has been received (S1482).

If it is determined in the process of S1482 that the winning command of the special symbol 2 has not been received (S1482: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning command of the special symbol 2 has been received (S1482: Yes), the opening effect flag 223i of the corresponding number of reserved balls is set to ON (S1483).

Here, the open effect flag 223i is set with a flag corresponding to each holding area and execution area. Therefore, the opening effect flag 223i corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the winning command of the received special symbol 2 is set to ON. This makes it possible to distinguish and distinguish between the reserved spheres stored for a long time and the other reserved spheres.

Here, the description will be continued by returning to FIG. 47. In the process of S1408, if the special symbol winning command has not been received (S1408: No), then it is determined whether or not the normal symbol winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1411). When it is determined that the winning command of the normal symbol is received (S1411), the winning information of the normal symbol indicated by the received winning command is set in the normal winning information storage area 223g (S1412). After that, it returns to the main process. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is acquired in the main control device 110, and the acquired value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is normal. It is stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203f. Further, as soon as the value of the ordinary hit counter C4 is acquired in the main control device 110, the original lottery is performed from the acquired value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4 separately from the original winning lottery of the ordinary symbol. Various information obtained in this case is pre-read (predicted). Then, when the pre-reading is completed in the main control device 110, a winning command of a normal symbol including various information (whether or not, hit type) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113.

On the other hand, in the process of S1411, when the winning command of the normal symbol is not received (S1411: No), it is determined whether the addition command is received (S1413). When it is determined that the addition command has been received (S1413: Yes), the information indicated by the received addition command is set in the addition command storage area 223x (S1414). The addition command reception flag 223y is set to on (S1415).

On the other hand, in the process of S1413, when it is determined that the addition command has not been received (S1413: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed. (S1416), the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114.

Next, the variation display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S1312). This variation display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process (FIG. 54, S1312), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1501). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1505 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S1501: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S1502), and then the fluctuation pattern selection process (see FIG. 49) of S1433, S1437, and S1438. In any of the processes, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1503).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1504). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1505.

In the process of S1505, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1505). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1505: No), the process of S1510 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1505: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1506), and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is set from the RAM 223. Acquire (S1507). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509.

In the process of S1509, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1509). .. By receiving this display stop type command, the display control device 114 stops and displays the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the process of S1509 is executed, the process proceeds to the process of S1510.

In the process of S1510, it is determined whether the addition command reception flag 223y is on (S1510). It is determined whether the value of the SW effective time counter 223q is 0 (S1511). When it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223q is 0 (S1511: Yes), the display effect content is determined based on the received addition information based on the set background mode (S1512). ). After that, the display addition command is set based on the set display effect content (S1513).

Here, in the process of S1512, the information indicated by the received addition command and the display effect content corresponding to the set background mode are selected and set. The display content is set in the variation pattern selection table 222a. Specifically, when it is the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol 1, the hit / fail judgment result is wrong, the number of reserved pieces is 2, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 160, as shown in FIG. 19, the main control device. From 110, "A1B4" is output as a fluctuation pattern command, and "B0B2" is output as an addition command. The voice lamp control device 113 determines a display mode at a fixed time corresponding to each background mode based on the fluctuation pattern command, and outputs a command to the display control device 114. Then, after the SW effective time has elapsed, only the display mode corresponding to the set background mode is output to the display control device 114 so as to be set at the start of the addition time.

In the above example, if the underwater background mode is selected when the SW effective time becomes 0, the variation display mode after the reach display mode of the super reach out-of-reach variation pattern A1 (after the addition time) is set. .. In detail, as shown in FIG. 18, a chance effect (see FIG. 13A) is set. When the beach background mode is selected, the display modes after the reach display mode of the super reach out-of-reach variation pattern A2 are set. In detail, as shown in FIG. 18, a continuous effect (see FIG. 13B) is set.

With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the process of setting the data required for the start of fluctuation of the special symbol set at the start of fluctuation. Further, even when it is necessary to set different display modes corresponding to a plurality of background modes, display data corresponding to each background mode is set for a period including a time that the player can switch. However, in the period after that, since the display data corresponding to the set background mode may be set, the control processing required for the variable display of the special symbol can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a look-ahead effect selection process (S1313), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead effect selection process (S1313). In this look-ahead effect selection process (FIGS. 55 and S1313), a process for selecting (determining) the advance notice effect display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the look-ahead results of the normal symbol and the special symbol.

In the look-ahead effect selection process (FIG. 55, S1313), first, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead effect of a normal symbol is set (S1601). The determination of whether or not the pre-reading effect of the normal symbol is set is executed by determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is selected and the display period is reached. In addition, a dedicated flag is set, and the flag is set to on based on the selection of the look-ahead effect, and the look-ahead effect is controlled to be turned off when the display of the look-ahead effect is completed. It may be configured to determine whether or not the effect is set.

If it is determined in the process of S1601 that the pre-reading effect of the normal symbol is set (S1601: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pre-reading effect of the ordinary symbol is not set (S1601: No), it is determined whether the hold of the ordinary symbol, which is a long-time hit, is stored in the ordinary winning information storage area 223 g (S1602). .. When it is determined that the hold of the ordinary symbol that hits for a long time is stored in the ordinary winning information storage area 223 g (S1602: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing of the long-time open effect (S1603).

The long-time open effect is a symbol schematically showing the electric accessory 64c by opening the door displayed in the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 5A. It is a notice effect that is displayed to notify in advance that the electric accessory 64c will be opened due to a long hit. The timing to start this long-time open effect is 3 seconds before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed at the hit of a long time. In this way, by configuring the opening effect to be displayed for a long time from 3 seconds before the hit for a long time, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the opening time of the electric accessory 64c. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the opportunity to easily enter the second starting port 64b. In addition, the player can play the game with the expectation that the open effect will be executed for a long time, and can prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

If it is determined in the process of S1603 that it is not the timing to execute the open effect for a long time (S1603: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the timing to execute the open effect for a long time (S1603: Yes), the start of the open effect is set (S1604). A display opening effect command for instructing the display control device 114 to display the long-time opening effect shown in FIGS. 5A to 6A on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S1605). ..

On the other hand, in the processing of S1602, when it is determined that the hold of the ordinary symbol, which is a long-time hit, is not stored in the ordinary winning information storage area 223g (S1602: No), it is determined whether the look-ahead effect is the executable period. (S1606). Here, the pre-reading effect executable period is a period during which the open effect is not being executed for a long time and is not in the jackpot game state. In the present embodiment, the pre-reading effect execution period is set as described above, but the period is not limited to this, and other settings may be made as appropriate.

In the process of S1606, when it is determined that the pre-reading effect execution period is not (S1606: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the look-ahead effect can be executed (S1606: Yes), it is determined whether the hold of the special symbol or the normal symbol is stored, the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223a, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter. It is determined from the values of 223b and the normal hold ball number counter 223c (S1607). When it is determined that there is no reservation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol (S1607: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a hold of a special symbol or a normal symbol (S1607: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223k is acquired and the look-ahead effect is executed from the look-ahead effect lottery table 222c (see FIG. 24 (b)). A lottery for whether or not to do so is executed (S1608). Here, in the look-ahead effect lottery table 222c (FIG. 24 (b)), when the reserved ball that becomes a big hit is stored in the reserved ball of the special symbol, the reserved ball that becomes a big hit is stored in the reserved ball of the special symbol. The probability of being drawn with a look-ahead effect is set higher than when there is no reserved ball with a special symbol (special symbol). Therefore, the player can predict in advance the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct or not depending on the frequency with which the look-ahead effect is executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy not only the content of the look-ahead effect but also the frequency of the pre-reading effect.

It is determined whether the lottery result of S1608 has a look-ahead effect (S1609). If it is determined that the lottery result has no look-ahead (S1609: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result has the look-ahead effect (S1609: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223k is acquired and from the look-ahead effect selection table 222d (see FIGS. 24 (c) to (d)). The look-ahead effect is selected (S1610). A display look-ahead effect command indicating the selected look-ahead effect is set (S1611).

Here, the look-ahead effect selection table 222d has only a look-ahead effect lottery table (FIG. 24 (c)) for selecting a look-ahead effect when there is a hold ball of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2, and a hold of a normal symbol. It is composed of a look-ahead effect lottery table (FIG. 24 (d)) for selecting a look-ahead effect in the case. When there is a reserved ball with a special symbol, as shown in FIG. 24 (c), the door displayed on the third symbol display device 81 indicating a sign (notice) of whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed is displayed. The number of small trembling effects is set, after which the door is opened and a comment is displayed in it. This comment is a notice display mode for the player to predict the lottery result of the reserved ball with a special symbol, and indicates that the lottery result is a win (big hit), such as "I did it !!" or "Congratulations! , And characters such as "Chance !!" and "Great chance !!", which are easier to select than in the case of a hit or a miss, are selected based on the value of the production counter 223k. Has been done.

With this configuration, the player can predict and determine the lottery result of the special symbol in advance by the comment display displayed when the door is opened. Therefore, even if the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has a low degree of expectation for a big hit, it can be enjoyed with the content displayed by the look-ahead effect, and the game can be played early. You can prevent getting bored.

Further, when there is no hold of the special symbol (when only the normal symbol is held), as shown in FIG. 24 (d), only the vibration effect of the door is selected. When the opening effect is executed for a long time, the door tremor effect is executed twice. Therefore, when the production of the two door vibrations is selected, the player expects that the door will be opened and the production of opening for a long time will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the opportunity for the player to have a feeling of expectation for the long-time open production. Further, as shown in FIG. 24C, the door opening effect is executed and a comment is displayed whenever the door tremor effect is executed three or more times. When the door trembles continuously, the number of times is counted and the door is expected to open. In addition, when the door tremor is executed four times, it is configured to be executed only when the hold ball that is a big hit is stored in the hold ball of the special symbol, so that the player can perform the door tremor four times. By being executed, the jackpot can be predicted at an early stage. In addition, when the door tremor is executed, the player can be expected to tremble four times to give the player an uplifting sensation (a feeling of excitement).

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the synchronous effect management process (S1314), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this synchronous effect management process (S1314). In this synchronous effect management process (S1314), a process of acquiring time information from RTC292, determining whether it is a preparation period or a time effect period based on the time information, and setting an effect mode indicating it is performed. Execute.

In the synchronous effect management process (FIG. 56, S1314), first, it is determined whether or not the time effect execution flag 223m is set to ON (S1701). When it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223m is off (S1701: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223m is on (S1701: Yes), the time information of "hours and minutes" is acquired from RTC292 (S1702). It is determined whether the preparation period flag 223o indicating that the preparation period is in progress is on (S1703). When it is determined that the preparation period flag 223o is on (S1703: Yes), it is determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1702 is the time production period set in the set time storage area 223n (S1704). ). If it is determined that it is not the time production period (S1704: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the time production period is set (S1704: Yes), the preparation period flag 223o is set to off (S1705). The start period flag 223p is set to on (S1706). The effect mode C is set in the effect mode storage area 223w (S1707). After that, the effect variation process is executed (S1708), and this process is terminated.

Here, the effect change process (S1708) will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this effect change process (S1708). In this effect change process (FIG. 57, S1708), when the preparation period shifts to the time effect period, the special fish school is displayed as the third symbol if the result of the hit / fail judgment is correct for the changing special symbol. This is a process for executing a process of displaying on the device 81 and notifying in advance that it is a big hit. Here, the special school of fish is a notice effect display in which red fish form a school and swim from the right to the left of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the notice effect display of a normal school of fish is composed of blue fish, and notifies the player that the expectation of a big hit is high.

In the effect changing process (FIG. 57, S1708), first, it is determined whether the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) is changing (S1721). If it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S1721: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S1721: Yes), it is determined whether the result of determining whether the special symbol is changing is a big hit (S1722). When it is determined that the result of the hit / fail determination of the changing special symbol is a big hit (S1722: Yes), a display notice display command indicating the display of the special school of fish is set (S1723). On the other hand, in the process of S1722, when it is determined that the result of the hit / fail determination is incorrect (S1722: No), this process is terminated.

In this way, when the preparation period shifts to the time production start period, the result of the hit / fail judgment of the changing special symbol is notified in advance by the special school of fish. Therefore, the time production period can be used by the player. It is possible to display a notice effect that is advantageous to the user. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the time production period is an advantageous period for the player, and it is possible to enjoy the time production period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the present embodiment, the hit / fail judgment is notified in advance by shifting from the preparation period to the time production period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in the case of a big hit, the judgment result is notified. In addition, it may be configured to execute a process of switching so as to always display a stop display with a symbol that notifies the jackpot B. Then, during the jackpot game executed in the time effect period, the effect of whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot A may be executed. With this configuration, even if the time production period becomes a big hit game, a special production can be provided to the player, and the player can be more entertained.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, a hold quantity display update process (S1306), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the hold quantity display update process (S1306).

In the hold quantity display update process (FIG. 58, S1306), first, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the number of hold symbols (S1801). If it is determined that there is no change in the reserved symbol (S1801: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a change in the number of reserved symbols (S1801: Yes), it is determined whether there is a reserved ball of the special symbol 2 in which the open effect flag 223i is set to ON (S1802). When it is determined that there is a reserved ball of the special symbol 2 in which the open effect flag 223i is set to ON (S1802: Yes), the corresponding special reserved symbol (in the present embodiment, the star-shaped reserved symbol) and others. A display hold command indicating the hold symbol of (hold ball other than the open effect flag 223i turned on) is set (S1803). On the other hand, in the processing of S1802, when all the open effect flags 223i are off (S1802: No), the values are set to the set special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Based on this, a display hold command indicating a hold symbol to be displayed is set (S1804).

In this way, by determining whether or not there is a reserved ball for which the open effect flag 223i is set to ON, the reserved symbol of the reserved ball can be changed to a special symbol different from the usual one and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the ball is a reserved ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 64b for a long time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307), which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307).

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 59, S1307), first, it is determined whether or not the demo screen is displayed in the standby state (S1901). When it is determined that the standby state is in the standby state (S1901: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) (S1902). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1902: Yes), it is determined whether the setting of the setting switch 291 is the setting "1" or "2" (S1903). When it is determined that the setting switch 291 is set "1" or set "2" (S1903: Yes), the fluctuation for display for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of fluctuations indicated by the value of the fluctuation counter 223u. Set the number of times command (S1904). After that, the process of S1905 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1901 when it is determined that the state is not in the standby state (S1901: No), the process of S1905 is executed.

In the process of S1905, the sensor input process is executed (S1905). Here, the sensor input process (S1905) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a sensor input process (S1905), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 59, S1307) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

In the sensor input process (FIG. 60, S1905), first, it is determined whether the sensor effective time counter 223r is set to a value larger than 0 (S1921). When it is determined that the sensor effective time counter 223r is a value of 0 or less (S1921: No), it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect display is set (S1922). When it is determined that the notice effect display is set (S1922: Yes), the sensor effective time set as the notice effect display is set in the sensor effective time counter 223r (S1923). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1922 that the notice effect display is not set (S1922: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1921, when it is determined that the sensor effective time counter 223r is a value larger than 0 (S1921: Yes), the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r is subtracted and updated by the elapsed time (S1924). ). It is determined whether the touch sensor 290 is on, that is, whether the player operates the touch sensor 290 with his or her hand close to it (S1925). When it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is on (S1925: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r is 10 seconds or more (S1926). When it is determined that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r is 10 seconds or more (S1926: Yes), it is determined whether the current effect mode is the effect mode C (during the time effect period) (S1927). If it is determined that the effect mode is C (S1927: Yes), the process of S1928 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect mode is other than the effect mode C (S1927: No), this process ends.

In the process of S1926, when it is determined that the sensor effective time counter 223r is 10 seconds or less (S1926: No), the process of S1928 is executed. In the process of S1928, the value of the touch counter 223s is updated by +1 (S1928), and a display notice display command corresponding to the updated value of the touch counter 223s is set (S1929). It is determined whether the value of the touch counter 223s is the upper limit value set in the selected touch notice effect display (S1930). When it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223s is the upper limit value (S1930: Yes), the value of the touch counter 223s is reset to the initial value 0 (S1931). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223s is not the upper limit value (S1930: No), this process ends.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 59. After the sensor input process (S1905) is executed, it is determined whether the value of the SW effective time counter 223q is larger than 0, that is, whether the SW effective time is in progress (S1906). When the SW effective time counter 223q is a value of 0 or less, that is, when it is determined that the SW is not in the effective time (S1906: No), it is determined whether the special symbol is changing (S1907). If it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S1907: No), the process of S1914 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is changing, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1908).

When it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed in the process of S1908 (S1908: No), the value of the SW count counter 223v is added by 1 (S1909). The value of the sensor effective time counter 223r is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1910). After that, it is determined whether the SW count counter 223v is larger than the upper limit value (S1911). When it is determined that the value of the SW count counter 223v is equal to or less than the upper limit value (S1911: No), the process of S1914 is executed.

When it is determined that the value of the SW count counter 223v is larger than the upper limit value (S1911: Yes), the special effect lottery is executed (S1912). A display notice display command indicating the notice effect determined by the lottery is set (S1913). After that, the process proceeds to S1914. In the process of S1914, it is determined whether or not a new fluctuation pattern is set (S1914). When it is determined that a new fluctuation pattern has been set (S1914: Yes), the SW effective time is set in the SW effective time counter 223q based on the set fluctuation pattern (S1915). On the other hand, if it is determined in S1914 that no new fluctuation pattern has been set (S1914: No), this process ends.

In the process of S1906, when it is determined that the SW effective time counter 223q is a value larger than 0 (S1906: Yes), the value of the SW effective time counter 223q is updated by subtracting the value corresponding to the elapsed time. (S1916). After that, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1917). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S1917: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1917: Yes), it is determined whether the preparation period flag 223o is on (S1918).

If it is determined that the preparation period flag 223o is on in the process of S1918 (S1918: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the preparation period flag 223o is off (S1918: No), the background mode is added by 1 and set in the background mode storage area 223t (S1919). A display switching command for a variation pattern corresponding to the set background mode is set (S1920). Then, this process ends.

<Control processing in the display control device 114>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 73, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 61, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2001) will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released is performed. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S2103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S2001 in FIG. 61) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 61) (S2105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S2001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, the display control device 114 High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 62, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S2102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2103 to S2105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2101. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S2102 and S2102, the processes of S2103 to S2105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes S2103 to S2105 may be executed without performing the processes S2101 and S2102. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 61. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings such as the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2003, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S2004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 71 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S3402 in FIG. 71 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIG. 11 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 63 (b)). The determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 63 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 63 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the NAND flash memory 234a can be stored. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that this is the case, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entering the first starting port 64a (starting prize), and the main control device 110 issued a voice lamp control device to instruct the start of the variation effect. When the display variation pattern command is received, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on, which is not shown, can be immediately displayed during the variation effect period to perform a simple variation effect. it can. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S2005, the interrupt permission is set (S2006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 63 (a). FIG. 63A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing or the simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing described later, and the processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 63 (b). FIG. 63 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 31) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 63B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, it is not the image at power-on shown in FIG. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S2302) is executed, and then the display setting process (S2303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the image. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 64 to 68.

In the display setting process (S2303), one frame of images to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 69 to 70.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2303) or the simple display setting process (S2309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous warning command (not shown) is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305), which are determined in the task process (S2304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 31 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 73.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type (big hit A, big hit B) indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop type counter. Then, the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2309) is executed to process S2304. Move to.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 to 68, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process (FIG. 64, S2302), as shown in FIG. 64, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2401), and if there is no unprocessed new command, there is no unprocessed new command. (S2401: No), the command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2402), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2405), the process returns to the process of S2401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2405) will be described with reference to FIG. 65 (a). FIG. 65A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, it is determined whether the received variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a plurality of background modes are set (S2501). A plurality of background modes are set in the variation pattern selected in the effect mode A, and only one type of background mode is set in the variation pattern selected in the effect mode B and the effect mode C. ..

In the present embodiment, the effect mode B and the effect mode C have one type of background mode, but the background mode is not limited to one, and a plurality of background modes may be set as in the effect mode A.

In the process of S2501, when it is determined that the received fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern in which a plurality of background modes are not set (S2501: No), the display data table corresponding to the command is determined and the display data table is determined. Set in the buffer (S2502). On the other hand, in the process of S2501, when it is determined that the received fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern in which a plurality of background modes are set (S2501: Yes), a display data table corresponding to each background mode is determined. And set it in the display data table buffer (S2503). The display data table corresponding to the background mode stored in the background mode storage area 233k is actively set (S2504). After that, the process of S2505 is executed.

Here, the display data table buffer 233d is configured so that a plurality of display data tables can be set, and it is possible to synchronize the set display data tables and transfer pointers for processing. Therefore, even when different displays are executed corresponding to a plurality of background modes, it is possible to switch to a plurality of display contents by actively setting and switching one of the plurality of display data table buffers.

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed in the display data table buffer. Set to 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2502 or S2503 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2505). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the set fluctuation display data table is turned on, and other fluctuation display data tables are displayed. The corresponding data table determination flag is set to off (S2506). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S2506, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2507), and the pointer 233f is set to 0. Initialize (S2508). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S2509), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2508, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is changed to the pointer 233f. The drawing content defined at the indicated address is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the content is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing of S2505. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 in the image storage area of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, when the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2507, the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 64. In the processing of S2404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2406). If there is a display variable type command (S2406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2407), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2407) will be described with reference to FIG. 65 (b). FIG. 65B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, before big hit B) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S2601), and the stop type table and V interrupt processing are performed. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set by comparing with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time (see FIG. 63B) is executed. (S2602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set to off (S2603). After that, the process returns to the process of S2401 in FIG.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2406: No), then it is determined whether there is a display notice display command among the unprocessed commands (S2408). When it is determined that the display notice display command has been received (S2408: Yes), the notice effect display process is executed (S2409). The details of the advance notice effect display processing (S2409) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 66 (a), but the degree of expectation for the jackpot to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the variable display of the special symbol. The setting of the notice display mode for notifying the player of the notification of a big hit or the like is executed.

Here, the notice effect display process (S2409) will be described with reference to FIG. 66 (a). FIG. 66A is a flowchart showing this advance notice effect display process (S2409).

In the notice effect display process (FIG. 66 (a), S2409), first, the display data table corresponding to the received display notice display command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S2701). The transfer data table corresponding to the set advance notice display data table for displaying at the display timing based on the display timing of the notice display indicated by the received display notice display command is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (S2702).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S2703), and the time data representing the fluctuation time is clocked based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d. The counter is set to 233h (S2704), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2705).

In this way, the notice display is set based on the display notice display command output from the voice lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even if the same variation pattern is used, it can be shown to the player as if the display modes are different.

In the present embodiment, the content of the notice display and the display timing are selected by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is configured to execute the selection of the notice display. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table for advance notice is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table that has already been set may be set to be overwritten by setting the advance notice display. Good.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 64. When it is determined that there is no display notice display command in the processing of S2408, it is determined whether or not there is a display switching command among the unprocessed commands (S2410). If it is determined that there is a display switching command (S2410: Yes), the mode switching process is executed (S2411). The mode switching process (S2410) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 66 (b), but a process of switching to a display mode corresponding to the background mode is executed based on the operation of the frame button 22.

Here, the mode switching process will be described with reference to FIG. 66 (b) (S2411). FIG. 66B is a flowchart showing this mode switching process (S2411). In the mode switching process (S2411), first, the background mode corresponding to the received command is set in the background mode storage area 233k (S2801). It is determined whether the special symbol is changing (S2802). When it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S2802: Yes), the display data table buffer of the background mode corresponding to the background mode corresponding to the received command is actively set (S2803). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S2802: No), the background data is changed to the background data corresponding to the received command and set (S2804).

In this way, if the special symbol is changing, the display mode is switched to the change pattern corresponding to the background mode. On the other hand, if the special symbol is stopped, the background of the display mode in the standby state is set to be displayed with the set background.

The process of changing the background or the like corresponding to the background mode may be configured as follows.

Set the back image change flag to turn on to notify the normal image transfer setting process of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the back on state. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images are displayed. Set the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type to off, end this back image change command processing, and return to the command judgment processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the set back image change flag is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the set back image discrimination flag. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display any of the back images A to C according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the set back image discrimination flag is used at that time. The back image type to be displayed is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident video) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored is specified. RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. When it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command may be turned on, or later. The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the received back image command may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 64. In the process of S2410, when it is determined that there is no display switching command (S2410: No), it is determined whether there is a display addition command (S2412). When it is determined that there is an addition command for display (S2412: Yes), the addition command process is executed (S2413).

Here, the addition command processing (S2413) will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing this addition command processing (S2413).

In the addition command processing (FIG. 67, S2413), first, the display data table of the display effect corresponding to the received command is determined, and the display data table is added to the display data table set in the display data table buffer and set (S2901). ). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233d currently actively set). To. The position to be added is additionally set before the END data.

The changing symbol information is added and set in the set display data table (S2902). By setting the changing symbol information in this way, it is possible to suppress a problem that a symbol different from the displayed symbol is displayed when the display content is switched to correspond to the addition time.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is determined, and the transfer data table is added to the transfer data table buffer 233e and set (S2903). Based on the data table, the time data is added to the time counter 233h and set (S2904).

When the addition command is received, the display mode of the fluctuation pattern set corresponding to the addition time is specified based on the time data indicated by the addition command, the set fluctuation pattern, and the background mode. , Set the display data table. With this configuration, even if it is necessary to switch between different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode after the addition time may be set according to the set background mode, and the display mode may be set. The control load of the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the display data table is added to the set display data table for setting, but the display data table may be newly set.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 64. In the processing of S2412, if it is determined that there is no display addition command (S2412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2417), and there is an error command. If (S2417: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2418), and the process returns to the processing of S2401.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2418) will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3001). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S3002). The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3001, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S3002 is determined, and the error type is supported. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S3002 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 64. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2417 (S2417: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2419), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

In the processing of S2401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes). ), The processing of S2402 to S2419 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2401 to S2419 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 63B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands required to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 11 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Only the type commands are extracted, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 65 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 65 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and other processes are executed. For a command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 65A) executed in this case, in the processing of S2301, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on required in that case are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 70, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 69, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3101), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3101: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S3102 to S3104 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3105. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3101: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S3102), S3103 to S3104 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S3103, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3103). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3103: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3104).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 70A. FIG. 70A is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to and all the error determinations set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3201).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various parameters required.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3201, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3202), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 69. After the warning image setting process (S3104) or in the process of S3103, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3103: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3105.

In S3105, the pointer update process is executed (S3105). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 70 (b). FIG. 70B is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3301). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the actual data of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3301, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S3302). As a result, if it is End information (S3302: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3303), and if it is a demo display data table (S3303: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S3304), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3305), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S3303, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3303: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3303: No). S3306), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3302, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3302: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 69 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3106). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S3106 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinates are displayed for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3107), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3108). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3108: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3108: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S3109).

As a result, if the definite display flag is off (S3109: No), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to produce the definite display effect. The contents are cleared (S3111) by setting (S3110) and then writing Full data to the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3112), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3113). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S3114), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3115), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing contents can be set as described above. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3115 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2304), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S3115, and the stop symbol thereof By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3109, if the confirmation display flag is off instead of on (S3109: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S3116). If the demo display flag is off (S3116: Yes), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S3117) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3118). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3119). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3120), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S3121), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In the process of S3116, if the demo display flag is on (S3116: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2309), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 63B), also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. A process is performed in which a display data table that specifies that the image (not shown) is stopped and displayed is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72, details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 71A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3401). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3401: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S3402), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 71 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S3401 (S3401: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3403), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 72.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3402), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 71 (b). FIG. 71B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3402).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S3501), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3501: Yes). ), Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3502). In the process of S3502, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S3502 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3502: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3502: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3503. Further, as a result of the processing of S3501, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3501: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3503.

In the processing of S3503, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3503), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3503: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3504), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3503 (S3503: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S3505), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 63 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 63 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 63 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 64 to 68) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 69 to 70 (b)) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device An image at the normal time is displayed on 81. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 72) (see S3401: No in FIG. 71 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 contains image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by the above, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a normal image transfer setting process (S3403), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3403).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3105) of the display setting process (S2303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S3601). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3602), and if it is transfer data information (S3602: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3603) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3604), and the process proceeds to S3605.

Further, in the process of S3602, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S3602: No), the processes of S3603 and S3604 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3605. In the process of S3605, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3605), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3605: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3606).

In the process of S3606, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S3606 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3606: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3606: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3607. Further, as a result of the processing of S3605, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3605: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3607.

In the process of S3607, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3607), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3607: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3608), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3603 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3609. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3607: No), this process ends.

In the process of S3609, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3609). The discrimination in the processing of S3609 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S3609, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3609: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3609 (S3609: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3610). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S3610, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3611), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. The image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 31 (S3701). That is, in the processing of S3701, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2304). Then, the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3702). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including information instructing the first frame buffer 236b to expand the image drawn as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the process of S3702 (S3703). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 63B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

Further, in the above embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but instead, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

Further, in the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the voice lamp control device 113. The command to be to be determined is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. After that, the display control device 114 may be configured to send a command to the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read the image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the image data read from the character ROM 234 by the MPU 231 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

In this case, the image controller 237 is accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. A resident video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (that is, it is in use) and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown). ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may confirm the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM of the transfer destination.

Alternatively, the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and resident from the state of the signal. It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts to access the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, or when the access is terminated, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time, so that the MPU 231 can perform the access. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether or not the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scanning is in the blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. As a result, the image controller 237 confirms only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be easily performed.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 is the transfer data that is not the Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be started according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is specified for a predetermined address, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to a display data table or the like by transferring image data according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, the drawing of the sprite is drawn. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, which is necessary for the resident video RAM 235, can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

The process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process or the loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. As a result, in the MPU 231, the image data transfer processing can be executed by utilizing the time when the important processing in the display control device 114 such as the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing is not performed. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are processes that are executed with priority over the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 is used for image data without affecting the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process. Transfer processing can be executed.

In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM by using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but is commonly used by the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address at that address. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236. That is, when the MPU 231 specifies the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply specified. The structure of the instruction that specifies it can be simplified. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as the information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data, the address set in the common address system is simply used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is provided as the image controller. It may be provided by directly connecting to 237. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. May be good.

By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the premise that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the character ROM 234 may be configured to be directly accessible from the MPU 231.

In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. May be done. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow read speed, but by adopting the display control device 114 having the configuration described in the above embodiment, the image can be displayed without any problem at the time to be displayed. be able to.

In the above embodiment, the case where the NOR type ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is provided in that area after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. It may be possible to store a part of the boot program executed in. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234, and after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. It may store a part of the boot program that is executed first.

Further, in the above embodiment, a first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in that area. However, the case is not limited to this, and a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a is stored in the internal bus (bus line 240). A first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program that is first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM), etc. are provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and MPU231 is provided. You may store a part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released.

In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then sets the boot program in the buffer RAM 234c. When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and the internal bus (bus line 240) is read. It may be output to MPU231 via 240). In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" for the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, is the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 already set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the display main process can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done.

Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified in the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b detects that the control program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read directly from the MPU 231 and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", so that the display main process can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done. Further, in this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, the power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the internal bus (bus) to which the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected is not necessarily limited. It may be provided by directly connecting to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video can be connected even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured so that the resident video RAM 235 can be directly connected. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

In the above embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more. A video RAM may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and a resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a 1-port type (1 port input / output port) DRAM is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the multi-port is not always limited. A type RAM may be used. As a result, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. Therefore, for example, the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn while being read from the character ROM 234. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and one RAM is divided into a resident area and a normal area. It may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, in order to prevent the input / output port of the memory from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write process. , It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. In this case, at least the image data corresponding to the image to be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident in response to the reception command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other external input. It is preferable to make it resident in the video RAM 235.

In the above embodiment, a case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident has been described, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. You may. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 does not exist, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is not overwritten and its contents are continuously retained during power-on is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 is not limited to this. Even if the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is overwritten and updated based on a predetermined opportunity, such as when the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is significantly different based on the command received from Good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as the transition period while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept in the resident video RAM 235. You may leave it. Further, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out new image data to be resident, and the read image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. It may be transferred while it is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). Image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information), and transferred to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may try to do it.

Further, when updating the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is transferred using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the newly resident image data, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the newly resident image data, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored when the power failure is resolved, and the power supply is supplied. In the display main process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power is turned on, the RAM determination value is confirmed before starting the transfer of the main image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on. If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored. Therefore, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. It may be configured to do so. In this case, by turning off the simple image display flag, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may not be executed. As a result, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and the display main process or the execution of the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data of the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If this is the case, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for recovery from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a having a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, if the data of the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to a momentary power failure or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, the normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Further, instead of this RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

In the above embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) where many data signals are exchanged. Transfers can be performed efficiently without being affected by.

In the above embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be appropriately set. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the buffer is being scanned during the period (blank period) of scanning on the blank area which is the scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. As a result, the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period. ..

In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. It may be configured. Further, another area in which the image data is stored while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written in the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since it can be processed, the time required for the processing can be shortened.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are input from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 from the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area. Although the case of transferring to 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the character ROM 234 displays the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the above is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. You may transfer directly to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. Further, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236. If the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the time main image or the like. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation of the resident video RAM 235. The case of transferring to the image area 235b has been described, but since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred, the power supply The image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the main image at power-on and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image, the resident video RAM 235 When the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a rear image change command or a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the rear image change command or the frame button. Although the case of changing the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of the super reach based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the game state of the game machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the game state, for example, in accordance with the change of the game state. A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the rear image and the super reach effect mode according to the game state based on the back image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the game state of the game machine 10 and change the rear image or the super reach effect mode according to the game state. Then, the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least a part of the range of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the back image can be immediately displayed by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c.

Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the provisions of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed rear image is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, or the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is transferred. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, and what is the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored? The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again, so that the processing of the display control device 114 The increase in load can be suppressed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected in the voice lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 to be main. A vibration error may be detected by the control device 110, and an error command notifying the error may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to either the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. Then, when an error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error. You may.

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. When a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 69). By executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 70A) when the above is determined, the warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, since it is not necessary to send and receive an error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game plate 13 has been described, but instead of the vibration sensor or together with the vibration sensor, the magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game plate 13. May be good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the sphere from being changed by a magnetic field such as a magnet and intentionally entering the sphere. Therefore, the output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. Then, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main control device 110, if it is determined that the main control device 110 has applied a magnetic field to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is generated. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 or directly. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, if it is determined by the voice lamp control device 113 that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field is determined. An error command that conveys an error may be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, in the error message image image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident. When an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error is received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, if it is determined by the display control device 114 that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113 May display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, or grasps the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the character ROM 234 is displayed. Even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used, the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is used to generate an error message image for notifying a magnetic field error without delay. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that the player behaves illegally. It can be deterred.

When the drawing contents necessary for changing the color tone of a part or all in one effect are specified by the additional data table or the display data table, the additional data table or the display data table is 1 in the third symbol display device 81. The type of sprite that changes the color tone at that time corresponding to the address expressed in units of the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for the frame is displayed, and the type of sprite after the change in the sprite. It may specify the color information that specifies the color tone. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. When the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing the color information specified by the additional drawing contents of the data table. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

Further, when the drawing content required for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. Corresponds to the address represented by the time when is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new sprite type. It may specify the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the MPU 231 sets the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the sprite type to be newly displayed at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing contents specified in the display data table has been described. The transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data required when drawing the image according to the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with the identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the effect that can be additionally displayed. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines the effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing contents and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. It may be configured as.

As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used in the drawing according to the additional drawing contents to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and surely displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, it is possible to transfer the necessary image data to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of the image based on the additional drawing contents. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various kinds of effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, and the player The case where only the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is specified has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. You may. Thereby, the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Further, since it is not necessary to specify the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress the increase in the data third of the display data table.

In the above embodiment, the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are included in the display data table has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the additional drawing contents of the effect to be additionally displayed may be specified in the additional data table. In this case, the work RAM 233 may be provided with an additional data table buffer, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. .. Further, even if the additional data table includes not only the additional drawing contents but also the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data necessary for drawing the image performed according to the additional drawing contents. Good. As a result, it is possible to specify the drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image required for the drawing, so that the additional data table and the additional transfer data table can be used. Compared with the case of specifying the drawing content and the transferred data information, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the case where the display control device 114 prepares the display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the variation effect can be described, for example. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "variable start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "notice effect", "normal reach", and "super reach", and the display data table is prepared according to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command. After identifying the elements required for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the paper required for the specified variation effect are put together into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do so. "Fluctuating start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach", etc. are often displayed in common with each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, by elementizing the variation effect in this way and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, the data table can be efficiently provided.

In the above embodiment, a case where a common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f has been described, but each data table has been described. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) of an image for one frame at which the drawing process is completed will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the driving of the third symbol display device 81 is performed so that the images for one frame are always displayed at equal time intervals (20 milliseconds intervals), the V interrupt signal is signaled for each display of the images for one frame. Can be kept accurate without timing the time interval by sending.

In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded first from the other frame buffer. The case where the image is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded each time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. May be alternately selected, and the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, every time the image controller 237 transmits the image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image information is output to the frame buffer for expanding the drawn image and the third symbol display device 81. It may be replaced with the frame buffer to be used.

In the above embodiment, after the final display data table corresponding to the final display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113 until the final display effect is completed. When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demo command (demo command for display) is received, the display data table for demo corresponding to the demo production is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. Further, in this case, the final display effect is displayed until either the fluctuation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) or the demo command (demo command for display) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. The final display data table corresponding to the final display effect may be reset to the display data table buffer 233d each time the command is completed. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can continue to display the final display effect until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110.

In the above embodiment, the case where the demonstration effect is to change the rear image and stop and display the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers “0” to “9” has been described, but it is not always the case. The present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol consisting of the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, in the display control means 114, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on and the power-on of the resident video RAM 235. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the display control means 114, only the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, and when the power is turned on after the transfer is completed. After displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be used for operation checks at players, hall personnel, factories, etc. at the time of manufacturing. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation is started without any problem by turning on the power.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. It is desirable that the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image at power-on is transferred to the fluctuating image area 235b at power-on immediately after the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to speed up the variation display by the variation image when the power is turned on.

In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table should correspond to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds, and the content of the image to be drawn (drawing content) at that time and should be transferred at that time. The case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is specified has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display content may be specified at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since one frame of image is displayed every second, the display data table may specify the display contents at 1/30 second intervals.

Further, in the display data table, the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is not specified as the sprite type to be drawn, which is defined at each predetermined time interval. May be specified. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is specified as the display content specified for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, instead of this, the work RAM 233 may store information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a. In this case, when the MPU 231 instructs to transfer the image data of the predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and refers to the predetermined image data. Is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, an instruction for transferring image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the transfer instruction of the image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores the information indicating the sprite type in which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and also stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

In the above embodiment, when the image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. The case where the MPU 231 performs a process of non-execution of the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 after determining whether or not the data is transferred has been described. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite is determined. You may memorize it. Further, the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer the image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 will be transferred to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to the “back surface A” among the plurality of back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the rear image used in some super reach may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by resident the back image of the super reach, which is expected to appear frequently or frequently, in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times.

In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines a transfer command for image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 specifies the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data instructed in the above from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data is at the top of the display data table. The information regarding the sprite type required in the table is described, and the MPU 231 is an image controller so as to transfer the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and normally outputs the image data of the image type from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled so as to transfer the data to the video RAM 236.

In the above embodiment, in the back surface C which is the back image of the “island stage”, the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time has been described, but even if the color tone of the entire image changes with time. Good. Further, as the rear image, not only the one that scrolls or the color tone changes with the passage of time, but also an object (for example, a person) that appears with the passage of time instead of such a rear image. It may be something that moves or changes.

In the above embodiment, the information of various counters (special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning, which the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113, is used as a hold ball number command. Although the case of including is described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the information of various counters (special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by another command. You may notify.

In the above embodiment, the case where all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot see them is displayed when the fluctuation effect is executed. However, instead of displaying the high-speed fluctuation , All symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In the above embodiment, the case where one first starting port 64a for starting the lottery for the big hit of the special symbol when the ball enters is arranged in the game board 13, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, a plurality of (for example, two) first entry ports may be arranged on the game board 13 in which the entry is detected independently and the lottery for the jackpot is started. In this case, when there is a hold at each first entry port, the hold ball number command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 indicates which first entry port is the hold. Information may be included. Further, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started includes information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by the first entry port. Good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a hold ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entry port, and when a hold ball number command is received, the first ball entry indicated in the hold ball number command is received. When the number of reserved balls is set in the hold ball counter for the mouth and a fluctuation pattern command is received, if the hold ball counter for the first entry port indicated in the fluctuation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entry port The number of reserved balls can be counted for each.

In the above embodiment, every time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main controller 110 (that is, when it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is mainly used. Although the case of transmitting from the control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 transmits the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, so that the main control device 110 and The control load on the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the winning of the first starting port 64a and the passage of the through gate 67 are each held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of reserved balls of the variable display based on the winning of the first starting port 64a is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81 or by the number of reserved balls in the area divided into four. It may be displayed in an aspect (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is vertically The symbol may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, and for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in various ways separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 79. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is won for a long time of the normal symbol, the game ball wins the second starting port 64b, and when the special symbol 2 starts to fluctuate, the special symbol 1 As with the fluctuation of, the case where the selected fluctuation pattern is displayed in fluctuation at the timing of the start of fluctuation has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is won for a long time and the variable display of the special symbol 2 based on winning the second starting port 64b is started, the third symbol display is displayed. The opening display mode is displayed on the device 81, and the player is given a special effect of the special symbol 2 (an effect of a variable display of the special symbol 2 based on winning a prize in the second starting port 64b for a long time of the normal symbol). It differs from the first embodiment in that it is configured to be notified that it will be started.

<About the display mode of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment>
With reference to FIGS. 74 to 75, a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and a timing chart thereof will be described.

FIG. 74 (a) shows the third symbol display device 81 when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 64b which is opened for a long time during the variable display of the special symbol 1 shown in FIG. 75 (a). It is a figure which showed the opening display mode displayed in. First, the timing chart will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (a).

In FIG. 75 (a), the special symbol 1 is changing when the game ball wins the second starting port 64b in a state where the normal symbol is won for a long time and the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 2 is 0. It is a figure which showed the timing chart until the special symbol 2 becomes the fluctuation start when (the remaining fluctuation time is 3 seconds or more).

As shown in FIG. 75 (a), when the special symbol 1 is in the variable display state, the normal symbol is hit for a long time, and the special symbol is 0 reserved balls, and the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 64b. When a prize is won, the opening display mode shown in FIG. 74 (a) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 within 3 seconds before the fluctuation stops on the changing special symbol 1. When the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is 3 seconds or less, the same processing as that of the special symbol 1 described later being won while the fluctuation is stopped is executed. A detailed description of this case will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (b).

While the opening display mode is displayed for 3 seconds, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the main symbol of the special symbol 1 is reduced to the upper left of the third symbol display device 81 and displayed in a variable manner. After that, the main symbol of the special symbol 1 is stopped and displayed in the usual size, and the main symbol of the special symbol 2 starts the variable display.

With this configuration, even if the game ball wins in the second starting port 64b, the variation of the special symbol 2 is changed even if the variation display of the special symbol 2 is not started until the variation of the special symbol 1 is stopped. The start time can be easily recognized.

Further, the variable display time of the special symbol 1 can be effectively used by executing the opening effect by using the variable time of the special symbol 1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75 (b), when the game ball wins the second starting port 64b by winning the normal symbol for a long time, the special symbol 1 does not change. The timing chart of the display mode displayed by the symbol display device 81 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 75 (b), when the fluctuation of the special symbol 1 is stopped (the state where there is no reserved ball of the special symbol 1, the stop timing of the special symbol 1), the game ball is placed in the second starting port 64b. When a prize is won and the variable display of the special symbol 2 starts, the opening display mode as shown in FIG. 74 (b) is applied to the third symbol display device for 3 seconds after the special symbol 2 starts to change. Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 74 (b), the special symbol 2 is reduced to the upper left of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 and displayed in a variable manner. The opening display mode is a "chance zone start" that notifies the player that the variable display of the special symbol 2 based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 64b is started after a long time of the normal symbol. The characters are displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 76, a display data table for an opening effect, which is executed when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 64b for a long time of a normal symbol in the second embodiment, will be described. In this display data table, the display mode of the opening effect as shown in FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (b) is set. The opening effect is stored in the moving image data, and the playback setting is set in this display data table. Then, it is set as an image in front of the background image. The fluctuating special symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. The winning command receiving process (FIG. 53, S1409) is changed to the winning command receiving process 2 (FIG. 77, S1409) with respect to the control process executed by the voice lamp control process 113 described in the first embodiment. It differs in that it is. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The winning command receiving process 2 (S1409) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the winning command reception process 2 (S1409). The winning command receiving process 2 (FIG. 77, S1409) of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is from S1484 to S1489 with respect to the winning command receiving process (FIG. 53, S1409) of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Processing has been added respectively. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed.

When the process of S1483 is executed, the process of S1484 is executed. In the process of S1484, it is determined whether the winning command received when the sub-long-time flag 223h is on is the winning command of the first reserved ball of the special symbol 2 (S1484). If it is determined that the command is not the first winning command of the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 (S1484: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is the first winning command of the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 (S1484: Yes), the process of S1485 is executed. In the process of S1485, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 is in the variable display (S1485).

If it is determined that the special symbol 1 is stopped (S1485: No), the process of S1489 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol 1 is in the variable display (S1485: Yes), it is determined whether or not the hit / fail determination result of the special symbol 1 in the variable is a hit (S1486). If it is determined that the result of determining whether or not the special symbol 1 is changing is out of order (S1486: No), the process of S1487 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit / fail determination result of the changing special symbol 1 is a hit (S1486: Yes), this process is terminated. In this way, when the changing special symbol 1 is a hit, the jackpot game is subsequently executed, so that the opening display mode is cancelled. Therefore, before the big hit game, it is canceled that the opening display mode indicating that the variable display of the special symbol 2 is started by winning the second starting port 64b based on the long-time hit of the normal symbol is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that confuses the player.

In the process of S1487, it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is 3 seconds or more (S1487). If it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is less than 3 seconds (S1487: Yes), the process of S1489 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is 3 seconds or more (S1487: Yes), when the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is 3 seconds before the remaining fluctuation time, as shown in FIG. A display opening effect command for instructing the display of the opening display mode is set (S1488).

In the process of S1489, a display opening effect command instructing to display the opening display mode shown in FIG. 74 (b) is set based on the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol 2. In this way, when the game ball wins the second starting port 64b due to a long hit of the normal symbol and the special symbol 2 starts to fluctuate, the special symbol 1 is fluctuating and the remaining time is 3 seconds or more. For example, the opening display mode is displayed at the timing 3 seconds before the remaining. On the other hand, when the special symbol 1 is stopped or the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is less than 3 seconds, the opening display mode is the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the fluctuation start of the special symbol 2. It is set to be displayed in.

Therefore, the timing for displaying the opening display mode can be appropriately determined according to the state when the game ball wins the second starting port 64b. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand and smooth effect.

In the present embodiment, the opening display mode is canceled when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the changing special symbol 1 is a hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol 2 started after the big hit game. The opening display mode may be set to be displayed at the timing of the start of fluctuation.

<Control processing executed by the display control device 114 in the second embodiment>
With reference to FIGS. 78 to 79, the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment is executed. In the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 64, S2302) is the command determination process 2 (FIG. 78, S2320) with respect to the control process in the first embodiment. ) Is changed. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination process 2 (S2320) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S2320). In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 78, S2320) in the second embodiment, each process from S2414 to S2415 is added to the command determination process (FIG. 64, S2302) in the first embodiment. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

If it is determined in the process of S2412 that the display addition command has not been received (S2412: No), it is determined whether or not the display general figure opening command has been received (S2414). When it is determined that the display general map opening command has been received (S2414: Yes), the general map opening process is executed (S2415). On the other hand, if it is determined that the display opening command has not been received (S2414: No), the process of S2417 is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 79, a normal drawing opening process, which is one process in the command determination process 2 (FIG. 78, 2320) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. (S2415) will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing this general drawing opening process (S2415).

In the normal figure opening process (FIG. 79), first, the display timing of the opening display mode set in the command is set (S2911). It should be noted that this display timing setting is set by setting a normal map opening flag (not shown) and overwriting the display data table for the normal map opening set by the timing indicated by the flag.

The offset data of the symbol is set in the display data table for the opening of the normal diagram (S2912). The display data table set by overwriting the display data table set in the display data table buffer is set by overwriting the display data table for the opening of the general drawing (S2913).

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 81. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a normal symbol is won for a long time, the variable display of the special symbol 2 based on the winning at the second starting port 64b is accompanied by a notice effect different from the normal display mode. The configuration in which the variable display mode is displayed has been described. However, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is configured so that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol after a long-time hit is set by one fluctuation, which is longer than the normal time, and the long-time hit is achieved. The difference is that even when the judgments are made continuously, the problem that a game ball equal to or larger than the reserved ball wins in the second starting port 64b and becomes an overflow ball is solved. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, the detailed configurations thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (b), the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is added, and the normal status storage area 203k is added to the RAM 203, respectively. Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment.

The normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d provided in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is a selection table for selecting (determining) the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. As shown in FIGS. 80 (c) to 80 (d), the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is dedicated to the normal status value (mode 1 or mode 2) set in the normal status storage area 203k described later. The normal fluctuation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 80 (c)) and the normal fluctuation pattern selection table B (see FIG. 80 (d)) are set respectively.

The normal status storage area 203k provided in the RAM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is a storage area in which the normal status is stored. Mode 1 and mode 2 are set as the normal status, and mode 1 is set in the normal state. Mode 2 is set based on the fact that the normal symbol is won for a long time. After being set to mode 2, once the normal symbol variation is selected, it is set to mode 1. That is, the normal status is a status for making it possible to identify that it is a fluctuation after winning for a long time.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. The difference is that the normal symbol variation start process (FIG. 38, S608) is changed to the normal symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 81, S640) with respect to the control process in the first embodiment. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 81, the normal symbol variation start processing 2 (S640) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation start processing 2 (S640). In the normal symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 81, S640) in the third embodiment, each process of S641 to S645 is added to the normal symbol variation start process (FIG. 38, S608) in the first embodiment. There is. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After the processes of S630, S634, and S635 are executed, the process of S641 is executed. In the process of S641, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is selected based on the normal status stored in the normal status storage area 203k (S641). It is determined whether the normal status is mode 2 (S642). When it is determined that the normal status is mode 2 (S642: Yes), the normal status is set to mode 1 and stored in the normal status storage area 203k (S643).

In this way, after selecting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, it is determined whether the normal status is set to mode 2, and if the normal status indicates mode 2 after a long hit, the mode Set to 1. Therefore, the first variation of the ordinary symbol per long time of the ordinary symbol is selected from the ordinary variation pattern selection table B (see FIG. 80 (d)). In this normal fluctuation pattern selection table B (see FIG. 80 (d)), the fluctuation time is set longer than that of the normal fluctuation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 80 (c)), so that the normal symbol is hit for a long time. The fluctuation time of the latter one fluctuation can be set longer.

Further, the fluctuation time set in the normal fluctuation pattern selection table B (see FIG. 80 (d)) is set to 70 seconds when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit (long-time hit, normal hit). There is. As a result, when four hold items are stored in the special symbol 2 and the fluctuations are displayed immediately, the total fluctuation time is 66 seconds when the longest fluctuation time is selected with the fluctuation pattern in which all the hit / fail judgment results are out of order. However, since a longer fluctuation time is selected, even if the hits are continuous for a long time, the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is not digested, and the game ball wins the second starting port 64b. However, it is possible to suppress the problem of becoming an overflow ball that does not become a hold ball.

In the present embodiment, 70 seconds is set as the case where the special symbol 2 is immediately changed and displayed, but in consideration of the fact that the special symbol 1 is changing, the result of determining whether the special symbol 1 is correct or not is out of order. It may be configured to be set to 100 seconds or more by adding 30 seconds, which is the longest fluctuation time selected in the case of. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the game ball from becoming an overflow ball when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 64b. Further, after all the reserved balls of the special symbol 2 are digested, the next long-time hit is likely to be established, so that the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be executed and the probability of winning the jackpot can be improved.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 90. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a configuration has been described in which the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 winning in the first starting port 64a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the first starting port 64a is won and the color of the reserved symbol displayed when the ball is stored as a reserved ball is changed according to the result of the hit / fail determination. It is different from the first embodiment. The detailed description of the same processing as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

<Regarding the period setting (setting of the production mode) in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (b), in the normal game period in the fourth embodiment, the setting of each period when the reserved symbol is displayed as a rainbow indicating a jackpot will be described.

In FIG. 82A, the reserved symbol is displayed in rainbow during the normal period, the special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball starts to fluctuate during the normal period, fluctuates and stops during the preparation period, and then the jackpot game is started. It is a timing chart which showed the processing of the case.

As shown in FIG. 82 (a), a game ball wins a prize in the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b in a normal period and becomes a hold ball, and the hit / fail judgment result is regarded as a big hit by pre-reading. , The pending symbol is displayed in rainbow color. In this case, if the special symbol has changed first, or if it has been put on hold first and the one with the higher priority of the change start timing stops changing, it is held as a hold period. After that, it is the timing of the start of fluctuation, and when the fluctuation starts, the fluctuation starts in the normal game period as shown in FIG. 82 (a). Then, at the start of the fluctuation, it is determined whether the preparation period is set at the time of stopping the fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 82 (a), when it is determined that the fluctuation is stopped within the preparation period, the setting of the preparation period is set to be canceled at this time. As a result, if the player is notified that the jackpot game will start at the start of the fluctuation, the player is worried that the jackpot will not start due to the change in the background set in the preparation period. It is possible to suppress the trouble that makes you think. In addition, since the background screen is changed to the background of the preparation period during the variable display of the special symbol that becomes a big hit, it is possible to prevent the special hit effect from being impaired.

Next, FIG. 82B is a timing chart in the case where the fluctuation starts in the preparation period, the fluctuation is displayed over the time production period, and the fluctuation stops in the time production period. Since the preparation period is not set to the period when the notice display is not selected, the notice display displayed in the preparation period is not set at the start of the fluctuation, but it is dedicated to the time production period based on the switching to the time production period. It is set so that the notice effect is displayed. As a result, it is possible to make other players think that a big hit is likely to occur when it comes to time production. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is dissatisfied with the fact that the notice display (special fish school) dedicated to the time production that notifies the jackpot is not displayed even though the player is recognized as a jackpot at the start of the fluctuation. ..

<About the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 83. In the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment, the mode B prohibition flag 223α is set in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 with respect to the first embodiment. Notice delay flags 223β have been added respectively. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The mode B prohibition flag 223α is a flag indicating that the setting of the preparation period is prohibited. When the reserved symbol is displayed in the rainbow display color indicating that the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol 1 indicated by the reserved symbol is a big hit, the variation display of the special symbol 1 corresponding to the reserved symbol is stopped and displayed in the preparation period. When determined, the mode B prohibition flag 223α is set to ON (FIG. 86, S1553). Although not shown, the mode B prohibition flag 223α is set to off based on the start of the jackpot game.

The advance notice delay flag 223β is a flag indicating that the advance notice display mode of the special school of fish that notifies the player that it is a big hit during the time effect period is delayed until the start of the opening effect of the big hit game. This notice delay flag 223β is set to ON in the process of S1734 in the process of the effect change process 2 (FIG. 90, S1730) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Here, when the time effect period is set, it is set to ON when the hit / fail determination result of the changing special symbol is a big hit and the remaining fluctuation time is 3 seconds or less.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the notice display when the remaining variable display is already small. Furthermore, by delaying the advance notice display mode of the special school of fish until the start of the jackpot game, it is possible to inform the player that the jackpot game has started in an easy-to-understand manner, and during the time production period, if the jackpot is a special It is possible to inform in an easy-to-understand manner that the notice display mode of the school of fish is displayed.

The notice delay flag 223β is set to off in the processing of S1546 of the opening processing (FIG. 88, S1540) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

<Regarding the control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 84 to 90, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described. The processing different from that of the first embodiment will be described, and the detailed description of the same processing will be omitted.

The command determination process 2 (S1320) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S1320). In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 84, S1320) in the fourth embodiment, the variation pattern reception process (FIG. 48, S1402) receives the variation pattern with respect to the command determination process (FIG. 47, S1311) in the first embodiment. In the process 2 (S1529), the winning command receiving process (FIGS. 53 and S1409) is changed to the winning command receiving process 3 (FIG. 84 and S1530), and the processes S1539 to S1540 are added respectively.

In the variation pattern reception process 2 (S1529), the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 49, S1422) is different from the variation pattern command reception process (FIGS. 48, S1402) in the first embodiment. Since it was only changed to S1428), the illustration is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1428) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (S1428). In the variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 85, S1428) in the fourth embodiment, the processes S1434 to S1435 are deleted from the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 49, S1422) in the first embodiment, and the advance notice selection process is performed. (FIG. 86, S1550) has been added. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

Next, the advance notice selection process (S1550), which is one process in the variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 85, S1428), will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this advance notice selection process (S1550).

In the advance notice selection process (FIG. 86, S1550), first, it is determined whether the color of the reserved symbol of the special symbol that starts to fluctuate is rainbow (S1551). When it is determined that the color of the reserved symbol is rainbow (S1551: Yes), it is determined whether the period during which the special symbol whose fluctuation starts is the preparation period (S1552). When it is determined that the period during which the fluctuation is stopped is the preparation period (S1552: Yes), the mode B prohibition flag 223α is set to ON (S1553). After that, the process of S1554 is executed.

In this way, when the color of the reserved symbol is a big hit (the lottery result of the reserved ball indicated by the reserved symbol), the fluctuation stop time is determined, and if it is the preparation period, the preparation period The mode B prohibition flag 223α indicating that the prohibition is set is set to on. Therefore, before the big hit, the background image is changed to show the preparation period, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the variable display of the special symbol cannot be concentrated. Further, since the other pachinko machine 10 is set to the preparation period, the pachinko machine 10 in which the player is playing cannot be set to the preparation period, so that it can be recognized that the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit. You can play the game with confidence.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1551 when it is determined that the color of the reserved symbol is not rainbow (S1551: No), in the processing of S1552, when it is determined that the period at the time of suspension of fluctuation is not the preparation period (S1552: No), The process of S1554 is executed.

In the process of S1554, the notice effect display is selected from the notice selection table A, and the selected notice effect display is set (S1554). After that, the notice effect is selected and set from the touch charge notice selection table (S1555).

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the winning command receiving process 3 (FIG. 87, S1530) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the winning command reception process 3 (S1530). In the winning command receiving process 3 (FIG. 87, S1530) in the fourth embodiment, each process from S1534 to S1538 is added to the winning command receiving process (FIG. 53, S1409) in the first embodiment. .. Since each process from S1531 to S1533 in the fourth embodiment is the same process as each process from S1481 to S1483 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After the process of S1553 is executed, the process of S1534 is executed. In the process of S1534, it is determined whether or not the winning command of the special symbol 1 has been received (S1534). When the winning command of the special symbol 1 is received (S1534: Yes), it is determined whether the received winning command is a winning command indicating that the winning / failing determination result is a big hit (S1535). When it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is a big hit (S1535: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223k is acquired (S1536).

It is determined whether the value of the acquired effect counter 223k is any of "0 to 30" (S1537). When it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223k is any of "0 to 30" (S1537: Yes), the color of the corresponding reserved symbol is set to rainbow (S1538).

Here, the color of the reserved symbol is output to the display control device 114 by generating a display pending command indicating the color and the number of the reserved symbol in the reserved number display update process (FIG. 46, S1306). ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the opening process (S1540) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this opening process (S1540).

In the opening process (FIG. 88, S1540), first, it is determined whether or not it is 1 minute or less until the time production start period (S1541). When it is determined that it is 1 minute or less until the start period of the time effect (S1541: Yes), the volume in the jackpot game is set to a low volume (S1542).

In this way, when the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot game is received and it is less than 1 minute before the time production period is set, the volume of the jackpot game is set low, so that the jackpot game is in progress. This can be obscured by other players. Further, as will be described later, when the time production period is set after that, the volume of the jackpot game is set to the normal volume. Therefore, it is possible for other players to think that the jackpot game has started due to the time production period, and to make the player think that the jackpot game is likely to start during the time production period. Can be done.

On the other hand, in the process of S1541, if it is determined that there is a time longer than 1 minute until the time effect period (S1541: No), the process of S1543 is executed. In the process of S1543, it is determined whether the advance notice delay flag 223β is on (S1543). When it is determined that the advance notice delay flag 223β is on (S1543: Yes), a display advance notice display command for setting the advance notice display of the special school of fish is set (S1544). Set the display opening command (S1545). The notice delay flag 223β is set to off (S1546). On the other hand, in the process of S1543, when it is determined that the advance notice delay flag 223β is off (S1543: No), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the synchronous effect management process 2 (S1330) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the synchronous effect management process 2 (S1330). In the synchronous effect management process 2 (FIG. 89, S1330) in the fourth embodiment, the processes S1730 and S1731 are added to the synchronous effect management process (FIGS. 56, S1314) in the first embodiment. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed.

After executing the process of S1707, the effect change process 2 (S1730) is executed. The effect change process 2 (S1730) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the effect change process 2 (S1730).

In the effect change process 2 (FIG. 90, S1730), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing (S1731). When it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S1731: Yes), it is determined whether the result of determining whether the special symbol is changing is a big hit (S1732). When it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is a big hit (S1732: Yes), it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time is 3 seconds or less (S1733).

When it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is 3 seconds or less (S1733: Yes), the advance notice delay flag 223β is set to ON (S1734). After that, this process ends. on the other hand. If it is determined in the process of S1733 that the remaining fluctuation time is larger than 3 seconds (S1733: No), a display notice display command indicating the display of the special school of fish is set (S1735).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1731 when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S1731: No), or in the processing of S1732, when it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is incorrect (S1732: No), S1736. Executes the processing of. In the process of S1736, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (S1736). When it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S1736: Yes), the volume setting in the jackpot game is set to the normal volume (S1737). After that, the process of S1735 is executed.

In this way, when the time production period is set and it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress, the volume setting is set to the normal volume, so that the start of the jackpot game is 1 minute of the time production period setting. If it is within the front, the volume is set to low volume, so the volume will be returned to the normal volume, and other players started the jackpot game based on the time production period being set. Can make you think. Therefore, it is possible to make other players think that the jackpot game is likely to be started when the time production period is set, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the jackpot for the time production period. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the time production period will be set, and can prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

On the other hand, in the process of S1736, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S1736: No), this process is terminated.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 99. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the display mode of each mode displayed in the fixed time of each background mode is set based on the fixed time, and then, based on the elapse of the SW effective time, at that time. The case of setting the display mode indicated by the addition command corresponding to the set background mode has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the display mode of each background mode displayed in the fixed time is set based on the number of reserved pieces, and then the addition time is set until the fixed time elapses. It is different from the first embodiment in that it is configured to set the table mode corresponding to each background mode. The illustration and description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment>
In the fifth embodiment, the contents of the special figure 1 variation pattern selection table of the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. As shown in FIGS. 91 to 92, in the fifth embodiment, the addition command is not set when the addition time is 0 seconds with respect to the first embodiment. Further, it differs from the first embodiment in that the fluctuation time, SW effective time, fixed time, and addition time of the super reach jackpot fluctuation patterns B1 to B2 and the super reach deviation fluctuation patterns B1 to B2 are changed. Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment. Further, an addition data transfer flag 233m is added to the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 according to the fifth embodiment. Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment.

The addition data transfer flag 233m is a flag for determining whether or not the transfer of display data corresponding to the addition time has been started. The addition data transfer flag 233m is set to ON in the process of S2432 of the addition command process 2 (FIG. 99, S2430) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment. Further, it is set to off in the process of S2441.

<Regarding the control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described.

The command determination process 3 (S1340) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 3 (S1340). In the command determination process 3 (FIG. 94, S1340) in the fifth embodiment, the process of S1560 is added to the command determination process (FIG. 47, S1311) in the first embodiment. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed.

After the process of S1414 is executed, the process of S1560 is executed. In the process of S1560, a display addition command for notifying the display control device 114 of the information indicated by the received addition command is set (S1560).

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the variation display setting process 2 (S1350) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process 2 (S1350). In the variation display setting process 2 (FIG. 95, S1350) in the fifth embodiment, each process from S151 to S1513 is deleted from the variation display setting process (FIG. 54, S1312) in the first embodiment. .. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (FIG. 96, S1360) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S1360). In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (FIG. 96, S1360) in the fifth embodiment, the processing of S1920 is S1940 with respect to the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 59, S1307) in the first embodiment. It has been changed to processing.

After the process of S1919 is executed, the process of S1940 is executed. In the process of S1940, a display background command indicating the set background mode is set (S1940).

<Control processing by the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the command determination process 3 (S2320) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 99. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 3 (S2320). In the command determination process 3 (FIG. 97, S2320) in the fifth embodiment, the variation pattern command process (FIG. 65, S2405) is the variation pattern command with respect to the command determination process (FIG. 64, S2302) in the first embodiment. The addition command processing (FIG. 67, S2413) is changed to the addition command processing 2 (FIG. 99, S2430) in the processing (FIG. 98, S2420), respectively. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed.

Next, the variation pattern command process 2 (S2420) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process 2 (S2420). In the variation pattern command process 2 (FIG. 98, S2420) in the fifth embodiment, the processes of S2503 and S2504 are S2510 and S2510, respectively, as opposed to the variation pattern command process (FIGS. 65 (a) and S2405) in the first embodiment. It has been changed to each process of S2511. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed.

In the process of S2510, the display data table corresponding to the fixed time of each background mode is determined based on the number of reserved items and set in the display data table buffer (S2510). The variable display data table corresponding to the background mode stored in the background mode storage area is actively set (S2511).

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the addition command process 2 (FIG. 99, S2430) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the addition command process 2 (S2430).

In the addition command process 2 (FIG. 99, S2430), first, it is determined whether or not the addition data transfer flag 233m is on (S2431). When it is determined that the addition data transfer flag 233m is on (S2431: Yes), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the fixed time (S2435). When it is determined that the end timing of the fixed time is reached (S2435: Yes), the determined display data table is set in the display data table buffer (S2436). The transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer (S2437). The data table determination flag is set to on (S2438). Time data is set in the timekeeping counter based on the data table (S2439). Initialize the pointer (S2440). The data transfer flag 233m for addition is set to off (S2441).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2431 that the data transfer flag 233m for addition is off (S2341: No), the display data table is determined based on the received command and the fluctuation pattern, and the symbol information is set. (S2432). The transfer of the moving image data set in the display data table is started (S2433). The data transfer flag 233m for addition is set to ON (S2434).

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the fixed time variable display, the variable display data is set for each background mode based on the number of reserved pieces, and then, in the addition time until the fixed time elapses. Since the variable display data to be set is set, the amount of data set at the start of the variable display can be reduced. Therefore, the control load at the start of fluctuation can be reduced, and problems such as processing omission can be suppressed.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 102. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an RTC 292 that is operated by a built-in battery, time is timed, and a variation display effect selected for each time is produced based on the timed data. The case where it was configured to be different was explained. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is configured to input the power supplied from the pachinko machine 10 to the RTC 292, and when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the power is supplied to the RTC 292. It was configured to. Further, the setting switch 291 is configured to be rotatable and driven by a motor so that the setting can be switched by controlling the pachinko machine 10, which is different from the first embodiment.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment>
The electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 101. FIG. 100A is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the RTC 292 connected to the voice lamp control device 113. A voltage of 5 V from the power supply device 290 is connected to the power input unit of the RTC 292 via the diode D1. Further, the 5V battery 292a of the RTC 292 is also connected to the power input unit via a predetermined resistor. With this configuration, when voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115, power is supplied to the RTC292 from the pachinko machine 10, and when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is off, the battery is used. It is switched so that the required power is supplied from 292a.

Therefore, the operating time of the battery 292a can be reduced, and the power consumption of the battery 292a can be further suppressed. Therefore, the RTC292 can be operated for a long period of time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (b), the setting switch 291 is rotatably configured by a changeover motor 293 composed of a stepping motor. With this configuration, when the power of the battery 292a of the RTC 292 falls below a predetermined value, the setting switch 291 can be rotated to automatically change the setting to prohibit the use of the RTC 292. Therefore, it is possible to save the trouble of setting appropriately on the game store side, and it is possible to reduce the maintenance work.

Next, the time setting process 2 (S1230) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the time setting process 2 (FIG. 102, S1230).

In the time setting process 2 (FIG. 102, S1230), first, it is determined whether the setting switch 291 is 1 or 3 (S1221). If the setting of the setting switch 291 is 1 or 3, time information is acquired from RTC292 (S1222). It is determined whether the acquired time information is within the deadline data (in the present embodiment, within 6 years from the predetermined date).

When it is determined that the acquired time data is within the deadline (S1223: Yes), the time effect execution flag 223m is set to ON (S1224). Based on the acquired time information, the preparation period and the time production period are calculated and set in the set time storage area 223n (S1225).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired time information is not within the deadline data, that is, 6 years or more have passed (S1223: No), the switching motor 293 is operated so that the setting switch 291 becomes 2. Set (S1226). Here, specifically, since the setting switch 291 is set so that the setting is switched one by one every time the setting switch 291 is rotated 90 degrees, when switching from the setting 1 to the setting 2, the setting switch 291 is rotated 90 degrees forward. The stepping motor, which is the switching motor 293, is operated. Further, in order to switch from the setting 3 to the setting 2, the stepping motor, which is the switching motor 293, is operated so as to rotate 270 degrees forward.

As a result, the setting 2 is set so that the function of the RTC292 is disabled as shown in FIG. 26B and the variable display number is switched to the display. Therefore, when the expiration date of the battery 292a of the RTC292, 6 years, has passed, the function of the RTC292 is automatically disabled, so that the time production period and the like can be set in a state where the timekeeping data is not accurate due to insufficient power. It is possible to suppress a problem that the pachinko machine 10 is executed and cannot be synchronized with the other pachinko machine 10.

In the present embodiment, when the setting 1 or the setting 3 is set, the setting 2 is automatically set when the deadline data elapses, but the setting is not limited to this, and the setting 1 is not limited to the setting 1. The switching motor 293 may be operated to switch to the setting 2 and the setting 3 when the setting 3 is set. With this configuration, it is possible to configure only the function of RTC292 without changing the setting of the display of the total number of fluctuations.

In addition to the configuration of this embodiment, if the setting switch is changed on the hall side, a retry is performed to adjust to the correct setting (matching the setting using RTC292 even though 6 years or more have passed). A process of executing the operation by the switching motor 293 may be added. In this case, it may be configured to operate immediately by constantly monitoring that the setting has been changed at predetermined time intervals (for example, every hour). With this configuration, it is possible for the hall side to easily notice that the expiration date of RTC292 has passed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the expiration date data of the date when 6 years have passed from the preset setting period is determined, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a determination means for determining the voltage value of the battery 292a is provided. The setting switch 291 may be automatically switched when the voltage value becomes equal to or less than a predetermined predetermined voltage (for example, 3.3 V or less). With this configuration, the state of the battery 292a of the RTC 292 can be discriminated and switched.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 112. The pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment describes a configuration in which the player can change the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the touch switch 290 provided on the upper plate 17 of the pachinko machine 10. did. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the variable display device unit 80 provided on the game board 60 is provided with a board-side touch sensor 294 composed of an optical touch sensor. The board-side touch sensor 294 is provided above the third symbol display device 81, and is provided on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 on the left side of the board and on the right side of the pachinko machine 10. It is composed of a touch sensor 294b.

The board-side touch sensor 294 turns on the board-side left touch sensor 294a when the player holds his hand over the left side of the main display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 through the glass unit 16, and displays the third symbol. When a hand is held over the right side of the main display area Dm of the device, the panel side right touch sensor 294b is turned on. As will be described in detail later, the board-side touch sensor 294 brings the hands close to each other so as to point the display modes of the cards and the like displayed on the left and right sides of the third symbol display device 81 through the glass unit 16 with a finger or the like. You can choose. Further, by holding a hand over the glass unit 16, either the panel-side left touch sensor 294a or the panel-side right touch sensor 294b of the panel-side touch sensor 294 is turned on, as shown in FIG. 104 (b). Performs a production that moves a school of fish from right to left.

<About the display effect using the touch sensor in the seventh embodiment>
A display effect using the frame-side touch sensor 290 and the board-side touch sensor 294 displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 105.

A notice of fish school charge using the frame-side touch sensor 290 and the board-side touch sensor 294 will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 (a) to 104 (c). Normally, when the main symbol is in the reach display mode, the fish school notice display mode in which the school of fish (school of fish) is displayed so as to swim from right to left of the third symbol display device 81 is the notice shown in FIG. As set in the selection table A222e (see FIG. 25A), this is a notice display mode that is easily selected when the hit / fail determination result is a big hit. Here, the fish school charge notice is also configured so that it is easier to select when the result of the hit / miss judgment is a big hit than when it is a miss. Although not shown, the fish school charge notice effect may also be set to be selected by replacing the fish school notice with the fish school charge notice in the notice selection table A222e (see FIG. 25A).

When the fish school charge notice is selected as shown in FIG. 104 (a), the main symbol of the changing special symbol 1 is reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the third symbol display device 81. Then, the text "Collect fish with the touch sensor on the frame! Reach with 5 or more fish !!" is displayed, and the player holds his hand over the touch sensor 290 on the frame to turn it on and collect the fish. Then, when the number is 5 or more, a character notifying that the reach is reached is displayed.

After that, when the player holds his / her hand over the touch sensor 290 of the frame as shown in FIG. 104 (b), a display mode in which the fish gather at the right end of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed based on the holding time. .. When the number of fish is 5 or more, the main symbol is displayed in the reach display mode. In that state, when the hand is held over the board-side touch sensor 294 (either the board-side left touch sensor 294a or the board-side right touch sensor 294b) to turn it on, a school of fish gathered as shown in FIG. 3 The symbol display device 81 is displayed in a variable manner as if swimming from right to left.

In the present embodiment, when the board-side touch sensor 294 is turned on, the school of fish gathered is varied and displayed from right to left, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the board-side touch sensor 294 is turned on. The value of the effect counter 223k may be acquired based on the above, the winning / failing determination may be executed, and when the winning is won, the school of fish may be variablely displayed from the right to the left of the third symbol display device 81. In this case, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol being changed is a hit, it is configured so that it is more likely to be judged as a hit than a hit, and the school of fish is displayed in a variable manner to increase the degree of expectation for a big hit. It is possible to notify the player.

The player can also turn on the board-side touch sensor 294 by moving the school of fish to the third symbol display device 81 so as to fluctuate from right to left with his / her own hand, as if he / she were himself / herself. Based on the movement of the hand, it can be made to appear as if the school of fish fluctuated. In addition, by executing a lottery to change the display of the school of fish each time the board-side touch sensor 290 is turned on, the player moves his / her hand many times to turn on the board-side touch sensor 294. After turning on the times, the player can be surprised by winning the lottery and displaying the school of fish in a variable manner.

Next, with reference to FIG. 105, a display mode of the card notice, which is a notice effect using the frame-side touch sensor 290 and the board-side touch sensor, will be described. In FIG. 105A, the card notice is selected, and the changing special symbol is reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the third symbol display device 81. Two cards are displayed on the left and right, and a triangular cursor is displayed below one of them. In addition, the characters "Move the cursor with your finger and select a card !!" are displayed, and a notification is executed to urge the player to move the cursor with his finger. Here, the card A displayed in FIG. 105A is arranged below the board-side left touch sensor 294a, and the card B is arranged below the board-side right touch sensor 294b.

As a result, when the card A is pointed through the glass unit 16, the left touch sensor 294a on the board side is turned on and the cursor moves below the card A. on the other hand. When the card B is pointed through the glass unit 16, the right touch sensor 294b on the board side is turned on and the display is controlled so that the cursor moves below the card B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105 (a), the character "determined by the frame side touch sensor" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the selected card is turned on by turning on the frame side touch sensor 290. The card is determined, the selected card is turned over, and the message written on the card is displayed, as shown in FIG. 105 (b). In the example shown in FIG. 105 (b), the characters "reach!" Notifying that the changing special symbol is in the reach display mode are displayed.

It should be noted that a plurality of notification contents are set, for example, it is set to be a "big hit" for notifying that the hit / fail judgment result of the changing special symbol is a big hit, or to be easily selected when it is a big hit. , Characters such as "Intense heat !!" are displayed to notify the player that the expectation for the big hit is high. This character is selected in advance when the card notice is selected, and the same notice display mode is displayed regardless of whether the card A or the card B is selected. In the card notice, if the player does not select the card, the card notice is erased after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed without displaying the contents of the card.

Further, in the present embodiment, the contents of the card are not displayed when the card notice is not selected, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the contents of the card on which the cursor is located are automatically displayed to the player after a predetermined time has elapsed. It may be configured to be displayed.

<About the electrical configuration in the 7th embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 107. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, a panel-side touch sensor 294 electrically connected to the input / output port of the voice lamp control device 113 is added, and a frame-side time counter is added to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. 223γ and the board side time counter 223δ are added respectively. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 103, the panel-side touch sensor 294 is provided with transmissive sensors on the left and right sides of the center frame 86 of the variable display unit 80 toward the glass unit 16. The board-side touch sensor 294 is a board-side left touch sensor 294a arranged on the upper left side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and a board-side right arranged on the upper part on the right side of the display area on the third symbol display device 81. It is composed of a touch sensor 294b. When the panel side touch sensor 294 holds a hand over the left side portion of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 through the glass unit 16, the panel side left touch sensor 294a turns on and holds the hand over the right portion of the display area. The right touch sensor 294b on the board side is arranged so as to turn on. Further, the panel-side left touch sensor 294a and the panel-side right touch sensor 294b are configured to be turned on when a hand is held over the central portion of the display area.

Next, referring to FIG. 107, the frame-side time counter 223γ of the RAM 203 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment is a counter for measuring the time when the touch sensor 290 on the frame side is turned on. is there. The frame-side time counter 223γ is added one by one by the processing of S1967 of the sensor execution processing (FIG. 110, S1954) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The board-side time counter 223δ is a counter for measuring the time when the board-side touch sensor 294 is turned on. The board-side time counter 223δ is added one by one by the processing of S1974 of the sensor effect processing (FIGS. 110, S1954) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment.

<Regarding the control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 108 to 112, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment will be described.

The frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1370) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1370). The frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (FIG. 108, S1370) in the seventh embodiment is a sensor input process (FIG. 60) with respect to the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 59, S1307) in the first embodiment. , S1905) has been changed to sensor input processing 2 (FIG. 109, S1950), and special operation processing (FIG. 112, S1960) has been added. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 109, in one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (FIG. 108, S1370) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment. A certain sensor input process 2 (S1950) will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the sensor input process 2 (S1950).

In the sensor input process 2 (FIG. 109, S1950), first, it is determined whether the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r is larger than 0 (S1951). When it is determined that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r is 0 (S1951: No), it is determined whether the advance notice effect display using the frame side touch sensor 290 or the board side touch sensor 294 is set (S1952). ). When it is determined that the notice effect display using the frame side touch sensor 290 or the board side touch sensor 294 is set (S1952: Yes), the frame side touch sensor 290 or the board set for the notice effect The sensor effective time of the side touch sensor 294 is set in the sensor effective time counter 223r (S1953). On the other hand, when it is determined that the advance notice effect display using the frame-side touch sensor 290 or the board-side touch sensor 294 is not set (S1952: No), this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S1951 that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r is greater than 0 (S1951: Yes), the sensor effect process is executed (S1954).

Next, the details of the sensor effect processing (S1954) will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing this sensor effect processing (S1954).

In the sensor effect processing (FIG. 110, S1954), first, is the effective time of the touch sensor 290 on the frame side, that is, is the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r corresponding to the touch sensor 290 on the frame side 0? Determine (S1961). When it is determined that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r corresponding to the touch sensor 290 on the frame side is 0 (S1961: No), the process of S1969 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r corresponding to the touch sensor 290 on the frame side is larger than 0 (S1961: Yes), the sensor effective time counter corresponding to the touch sensor 290 on the frame side is determined. 223r is subtracted and updated (S1962). Here, the time corresponding to the elapsed time, in the present embodiment, is subtracted by 1.

It is determined whether the touch sensor 290 on the frame side is on (S1963). When it is determined that the touch sensor 290 on the frame side is on (S1963: Yes), it is determined whether the selected (set) advance notice effect is a card advance notice effect (S1964). On the other hand, when it is determined that the touch sensor 290 on the frame side is off (S1963: No), the process of S1969 is executed. When it is determined that the card advance notice effect is produced (S1964: Yes), the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r corresponding to the touch sensor 290 on the frame side is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1966).

On the other hand, in the process of S1964, when it is determined that the selected advance notice effect is not the card advance notice effect (S1964: No), the frame side time counter 223γ is added by 1 (S1967). A display notice display command (shown) corresponding to the value of the frame-side time counter 223γ is set (S1968). Here, when the display control device 114 receives this display notice display command, a notice display data table corresponding to the value of the frame side time counter 223γ indicated by the display notice display command is set. For example, when the fish school charge notice shown in FIGS. 104 (a) to 104 (c) is selected, the display data in which the fish are displayed up to the upper limit of the number of fish preset in the fish school charge notice. The table is set. For example, when the fish school charge notice in which the upper limit of the number of fish is set to 3 is selected, the number of fish is increased by 1 every time the value of the frame side time counter 223r is increased by 1 second. When the number reaches the upper limit of three, a display data table is set in which the number is maintained.

In the process in S1969, it is determined whether the panel-side touch sensor 294 is in the effective time, that is, whether the sensor effective time counter 223r corresponding to the panel-side touch sensor 294 has a value greater than 0 (S1969). If it is determined that the panel side touch sensor 294 is not in the effective time (S1969: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the panel-side touch sensor 294 is in the effective time (S1969: Yes), the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r corresponding to the panel-side touch sensor 294 is subtracted and updated (S1970). It is determined whether the panel side touch sensor 294 is on (S1971). When it is determined that the panel side touch sensor 294 is off (S1971: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the board-side touch sensor 294 is on (S1971: Yes), it is determined whether the selected advance notice effect is a card advance notice effect (S1972). When it is determined that the card advance notice effect is selected (S1972: Yes), the sensor selection process is executed (S1973). The sensor selection process (S1973) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 111, but a process for selecting a card is executed in the card advance notice effect.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1972 that the card advance notice effect is not selected (S1972: No), the board-side time counter 223δ is added by 1 (S1974). A display notice display command corresponding to the value of the board-side time counter 223δ (indicating the value of the board-side time counter 223δ) is set. Here, the value of the board-side time counter 223δ is reset to the initial value of 0 based on the setting of the display notice display command. When the display control device 114 receives this display notice display command, the display control device 114 is set to move and display the school of fish from the left to the right of the display area (S1975).

Next, the sensor selection process (S1973) in the sensor effect process (FIG. 110, S1954) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing this sensor selection process (S1973).

In the sensor selection process (FIG. 111, S1973), first, it is determined whether or not the panel-side right touch sensor 294b is on (S1981). When it is determined that the right touch sensor 294b on the board side is on (S1981: Yes), a display command for displaying the cursor on the right side is set (S1982). On the other hand, in the process of S1981, when it is determined that the board-side right touch sensor 294b is off (S1981: No), it is determined whether the board-side left touch sensor 294a is on (S1983). When it is determined that the left touch sensor 294a on the board side is on (S1983: Yes), a display command for displaying the cursor on the left side is set (S1984). On the other hand, in the process of S1983, when it is determined that the left touch sensor 294a on the panel side is off (S1983: No), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 112, a special operation process (S1960) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing this special operation process (S1960). The special operation process (FIG. 112, S1960) in the seventh embodiment is the same as the process of S1907 to S1913, S1916 of the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 59, S1307) in the first embodiment. Since it is executed, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by performing the effect using the plurality of touch sensors, the player can be made to move and the boredom can be suppressed. Further, by configuring the touch sensor, the player can operate the display screen by pointing a finger or the like, and it is possible to enhance the feeling of participating in the game.

Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for displaying a variable display of a sequence of symbols consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is not provided. Things can be mentioned. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

Further, the configuration of each of the above embodiments may be configured to be implemented in whole or in combination.

Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments will be shown.

<Characteristic A group>
A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information necessary for executing a game lottery based on an entry port where a game ball can enter and a game ball entering the entry opening, and a lottery information acquisition means thereof. A winning / failing determination means that executes a winning / failing determination when the lottery condition is satisfied based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means, and a storage means that stores the lottery information at least until the lottery condition is satisfied. , A display means for displaying an identification symbol capable of identifying the number of lottery information stored by the storage means, a first state in which a game ball is likely to enter the ball entrance, and a game ball rather than the first state. The ball entry assisting means that can be changed to the second state that makes it difficult to enter the ball, and the ball entry assisting means are changed from the second state to the first state when the first condition is satisfied. When the first opening and the second condition are satisfied, the second opening in which the ball entry assisting means is changed from the second state to the first state so as to be more advantageous to the player than the first opening. At least the variable control means that is variable, and while the variable control means is variable to the second opening, the game ball enters the ball entry port, and the lottery information is stored in the storage means. If this is the case, the identification symbol different from the identification symbol due to the game ball entering the entry port while the number of lottery information is changed to the first opening by the player is displayed. A game machine A1 characterized by having a display control means capable of being displayed by the means.

According to the game machine A1, the lottery information necessary for executing the lottery of the game is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball enters the entrance where the game ball can enter. .. Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, the winning / failing determination is executed by the winning / failing determination means when the lottery condition is satisfied. The lottery information is stored by the storage means at least until the lottery conditions are satisfied. An identification symbol capable of identifying the number of lottery information stored by the storage means is displayed by the display means. It is varied by the ball entry assisting means into a first state in which the game ball is easy to enter into the ball entry port and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. When the first condition is satisfied, the first opening which is changed from the second state to the first state, and when the second condition is satisfied, the ball is entered so as to be more advantageous to the player than the first opening. The ball entry assisting means is changed by the variable control means from the second state to the first state. If a game ball enters the entry port and the lottery information is stored in the storage means while the variable control means is variable to the second opening, the number of the lottery information is given to the player. An identification symbol different from the identification symbol due to the game ball entering the entry port while being changed to the first opening is displayed on the display means by the display control means. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner of the number of game balls that have entered the ball entrance at the second opening and the lottery information is stored. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the second opening has been performed, and there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In order to determine the establishment of at least the first condition and the second condition based on the detection means capable of detecting the passage of the game ball and the detection means determining the passage of the game ball in the game machine A1. Discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the discrimination information of the above, a discrimination means for discriminating the discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination means for discriminating the establishment of the first opening or the second opening, and the acquisition means. The discrimination information storage means that stores the discrimination information acquired by the discriminant information at least until the discriminant condition is satisfied, and the discriminant information acquired by the discriminant information acquisition means is discriminated in advance before the discriminant condition is satisfied. When the establishment of the second opening is determined by the pre-determining means and the pre-determining means, the information is notified to the player before the ball entry assisting means is changed to the second opening. A game machine A2 characterized by having a notification means.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, the passage of the game ball is detected by the detecting means. Based on the detection means determining the passage of the game ball, the determination information acquisition means acquires at least the determination information for determining the establishment of the first condition and the second condition. Based on the establishment of the determination condition, the determination information acquired by the acquisition means is determined by the determination means whether the first opening or the second opening is established. The discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the discrimination information storage means at least until the discrimination condition is satisfied. Prior to the determination condition being satisfied, the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is discriminated in advance by the pre-discrimination means. When the establishment of the second opening is determined by the prior determination means, the information is notified to the player by the notification means before the ball entry assisting means is changed to the second opening. As a result, it is possible to know in advance about the second opening and prepare for the second opening. Therefore, there is an effect that the second opening can be effectively used.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the notification means is the same until the period when the ball entry assisting means is in the first state based on the determination of the establishment of the second opening by the prior determination means. It is characterized in that the first notification mode indicating the first state is notified, and the second notification mode indicating that the second state is changed is notified based on the change to the second state. The game machine A3.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machines A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the fact that the establishment of the second opening is determined by the prior determination means, the first notification mode indicating the first state is notified by the notification means until the period when the ball entry assisting means is in the first state. To. Further, based on the change to the second state, the notification means notifies the second notification mode indicating that the change has been made to the second state. As a result, the player can recognize the state of the ball entry assisting means by notifying the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can suppress the problem of overlooking that the old / new assisting means is the second opening.

In the game machine A3, as the first notification mode, the notification means displays a first notification symbol indicating that the ball entry assisting means is in the first state on the display means, and as the second notification mode. The gaming machine A4, characterized in that the display means displays a second notification symbol indicating that the ball entry assisting means is in the second state.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A3, the following effects are played. That is, as the first notification mode, the first notification symbol indicating that the ball entry assisting means is in the first state is displayed on the display means by the notification means. Further, as a second notification mode, a second notification symbol indicating that the ball entry assisting means is in the second state is displayed on the display means by the notification means. As a result, the player can recognize whether the ball entry assisting means is in the first state or the second state by the display means. Therefore, there is an effect that more information can be obtained than the display means and the game can be facilitated.

In any of the game machines A1 to A4, based on the determination of the establishment of the second opening by the advance determination means, the notification means before the information is notified by the notification means. The gaming machine A5, characterized in that it has a prior notification means for notifying an advance notification mode for notifying that notification is to be performed.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A4, the information is not notified by the notification means based on the determination of the establishment of the second opening by the prior determination means. In advance, since the advance notification mode for notifying that the notification is performed by the notification means is notified by the advance notification means, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player overlooks that the second opening has been made. ..

<Characteristic B group>
A hit / fail determination means for executing a hit / fail judgment based on the establishment of a start condition, a display means for displaying an identification symbol indicating a hit / fail judgment result by the hit / miss judgment means, and a dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol. Timekeeping is performed on a gaming machine having a dynamic display mode determining means for determining and a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player based on the hit / fail determination result. When the timekeeping means capable of discriminating the timekeeping means, the timekeeping data discriminating means for discriminating the timekeeping data by the timekeeping means, and the timekeeping data discriminating means determine that the value is a predetermined set value, the dynamic display mode determining means The dynamic display mode to be determined is different from other periods. The effect period setting for setting the specific period in which the dynamic display mode is determined and the preparation period for starting the specific period before the specific period. The dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode, which has the means and can be determined by the dynamic display mode determining means outside the specific period, is set to be shorter than the preparation period. A game machine B1 characterized by this.

According to the game machine B1, the hit / fail determination is executed by the hit / miss determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. An identification symbol indicating the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / miss determination means is displayed by the display means. The dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. Based on the hit / fail determination result, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. The timed data by the timed means capable of measuring is determined by the timed data discriminating means. When it is determined by the timekeeping data discriminating means that the value is a predetermined setting value, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is determined to be a dynamic display mode different from other periods. A specific period and a preparation period for starting the specific period before the specific period are set by the effect period setting means. The dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode, which can be determined by the dynamic display mode determining means outside the specific period, is set to be shorter than the preparation period. Thereby, in the preparation period before the specific period is started, the dynamic display mode started before the preparation period can be ended. Therefore, there is an effect that the specific period can be prepared and the specific period can be started.

In the game machine B1, the timekeeping means measures the elapsed time since the power is turned on to the game machine, and the timekeeping data discriminating means means that the timekeeping data by the timekeeping means is turned on to the game machine. The game machine B2 is characterized in that it is determined that the set value is obtained when it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B1, the following effects are played. That is, in the timekeeping means, the elapsed time since the power is turned on to the game machine is timed by the timekeeping means. When it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the power of the timekeeping means was turned on to the game machine, it is determined by the timekeeping data discrimination manual judgment that it is a set value. As a result, by turning on the power to a plurality of game machines at the same time, the game machines can time the same elapsed time. Therefore, it is possible to set a specific period in synchronization with a plurality of the same gaming machines. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to determine the dynamic display mode synchronized between the game machines.

In the game machine B1, the timekeeping means is configured to be able to time the time even when the power is not turned on to the game machine, and the timekeeping data discriminating means obtained from the timekeeping means. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that when it is determined that the data is at a predetermined set time, it is determined that the data is the set value.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B1, the following effects are played. That is, even when the power of the game machine is not turned on, the time is timed by the timekeeping means. When it is determined that the timekeeping data acquired from the timekeeping means has a predetermined set time, the timekeeping data discriminating means determines that it is a set value. As a result, by setting the same time as a set value between the same game machines in advance, the game machines can be synchronized with each other and set to a specific period. Therefore, there is an effect that the dynamic display mode synchronized between the game machines can be determined.

In any of the game machines B1 to B3, when the identification symbol is dynamically displayed, a notice effect executing means for executing a notice effect based on the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / fail determination means, and a notice effect executing means thereof. The preparation period is based on the advance notice effect determining means for determining the advance notice effect to be executed from among a plurality of advance notice effects based on the result of the hit / fail determination and the preparation period set by the period setting means. The gaming machine B4 is characterized by having a prohibition means for prohibiting the execution of the advance notice effect.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B3, the following effect is played. That is, when the identification symbol is dynamically displayed, the notice effect is executed by the notice effect execution means based on the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / fail determination means. The advance notice effect to be executed by the advance notice effect execution means is determined by the advance notice effect determining means from among a plurality of advance notice effects based on the result of the success / failure determination. Based on the fact that the preparation period has been set by the period setting means, the prohibition means is set to prohibit the execution of the advance notice effect during the preparation period. As a result, since the advance notice effect is not determined during the preparation period, it is possible to provide the player with an effect different from the normal time. Therefore, in the preparation period before the transition to the specific period, it is possible to provide the player with an effect different from the normal time, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the specific period is about to start. There is.

In the game machine B4, at least a specific advance notice effect is set for the plurality of advance notice effects, and the advance notice effect determining means is easier to determine the specific advance notice effect in the specific period than outside the specific period. A game machine B5 characterized by being.

According to the game machine B5, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects of the game machine B4. That is, at least a specific advance notice effect is set for the plurality of advance notice effects. In the specific period, the specific advance notice effect is more likely to be determined by the advance notice effect determination means than outside the specific period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the specific period is reached by the specific advance notice effect.

A game machine B6 in any of the game machines B1 to B5, wherein the set value is a plurality of set values set in advance.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects played by the game machines B1 to B5, since a plurality of set values are set in advance, there is an effect that a specific period can be set a plurality of times.

<Characteristic C group>
Based on the establishment of the starting condition, the winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination, and when the winning / failing determination means determines the winning, a privilege more advantageous to the player than the first hit and the first hit is given. The hit type determining means for determining at least the second hit, the display means for displaying the identification symbol indicating the hit / fail determination result by the hit / fail determination means, and the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine having a dynamic display mode determining means for determining, and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the hit / fail determination result is displayed with an identification symbol indicating a hit. , The timekeeping means capable of timing, the timekeeping data discriminating means for discriminating the timekeeping data by the timekeeping means, and the dynamic display mode when it is determined by the timekeeping data discrimination that the value is a predetermined set value. The dynamic display mode determined by the determining means is different from other periods. Period setting for setting a specific period in which the dynamic display mode is determined and a preparation period for starting the specific period before the specific period. A dynamic display determining means for determining whether or not the dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed on the display means when the specific period is set by the means and the period setting means, and a dynamic display determining means thereof. A second hit determination means for determining whether or not the dynamically displayed hit / fail determination result is the second hit based on the determination that the dynamic display is performed, and the second hit determination means. It has a notification means for notifying the player of the notification mode indicating that the second hit is obtained before the identification symbol is stopped and displayed when the second hit is determined. A game machine C1 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine C1, the hit / fail determination is executed by the hit / miss determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. When it is determined to be a hit by the hit / fail determination means, at least the first hit and the second hit in which the player is given a privilege more advantageous than the first hit are determined by the hit type determining means. An identification symbol indicating the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / miss determination means is displayed by the display means. The dynamic display mode of the identification symbol displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. When the hit / fail determination result is displayed with an identification symbol indicating a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. The timed data by the timed means capable of measuring is determined by the timed data discriminating means. When it is determined by the timekeeping data discrimination that it is a predetermined set value, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is specified so that the dynamic display mode different from other periods is determined. The period and the preparation period for starting the specific period before the specific period are set by the period setting means. When a specific period is set by the period setting means, the dynamic display determining means determines whether the dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed on the display means. Based on the fact that the dynamic display is determined to be dynamically displayed by the dynamic display determination means, the second hit determination means determines whether the dynamically displayed hit / fail determination result is the second hit. .. When the second hit determination means determines that the second hit is achieved, the notification means notifies the player of the notification mode indicating that the second hit is obtained, before the identification symbol is stopped and displayed. To. As a result, by setting the specific period, the player can determine whether or not it is the second hit earlier than usual. Therefore, the specific period can be made more advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that it will be set in a specific period, and there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the game machine C1, the game machine C2 is characterized in that the notification means displays a symbol indicating that it is the second hit on the display means.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C1, a symbol indicating that the second hit is displayed on the display means is displayed by the notification means, so that the player can easily understand the second hit. It has the effect of being able to be recognized.

In the game machine C1 or C2, at least a common hit identification symbol indicating that the identification symbol is the first hit or the second hit and a dedicated hit identification symbol indicating that the identification symbol is the second hit are set. When the common hit identification symbol is stopped and displayed, the determination notification mode indicating the hit type determined by the hit type determining means is notified during the privilege game executed thereafter. A game machine C3 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1 or C2, the following effect is played. That is, at least a common hit identification symbol indicating that it is a first hit or a second hit and a dedicated hit identification symbol indicating that it is a second hit are set in the identification symbol. When the common hit identification symbol is stopped and displayed, the determination notification mode indicating the hit type determined by the hit type determining means is notified during the privilege game executed thereafter. As a result, even during the privilege game, the game can be played with the expectation for the second hit. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

<Feature D group>
The main control means for executing the control of the game, the sub-control means for executing the control of the game based on the control signal from the main control means, and the display means, and the main control means is a start condition. Based on the establishment, the pass / fail determination means for executing the pass / fail determination and the dynamic display time for determining the dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol indicating the pass / fail determination result by the pass / fail determination means on the display means. A dynamic display time determining means for determining, and a dynamic display information generating means for generating a dynamic display information signal for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means. , A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the stop display of the identification symbol indicating that the result of the success / failure determination by the hit / fail determination means is a hit. The slave control means determines the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol based on the dynamic display information signal, and the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. In a gaming machine having a display control means for displaying, the slave control means is identified by an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation determination means that determines whether the operation means has been operated, and the operation determination means. When the symbol is dynamically displayed, it has a switching means for switching the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol to another dynamic display mode based on the determination that the operation means has been operated. The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means of the slave control means includes a switchable period set to be switchable to another dynamic display mode by the switching means and another dynamic display mode. A switching prohibition period during which switching is prohibited is set, and the dynamic display information signal sets the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means to the first time and the first time thereof. The dynamic display mode determining means is determined based on the first dynamic display mode and the second time, which are determined based on the first time, and are composed of signals separately shown by the second time to be added. The second dynamic display mode is determined, and the switchable period is set within the period during which the first dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed. Machine D1.

According to the game machine D1, the control of the game is executed by the main control means. The control of the game is executed by the subordinate control means based on the control signal from the main control means. In the main control means, the hit / fail determination is executed by the hit / fail determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. The dynamic display time is determined by the dynamic display time determining means for determining the dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol indicating the result of the hit / fail determination on the display means. The dynamic display information generating means generates a dynamic display information signal for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means. The privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the stop display of the identification symbol indicating that the result of the success / failure determination by the hit / fail determination means is a hit. In the slave control means, the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the dynamic display information signal. The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is displayed by the display control means. Whether or not the operating means that can be operated by the player has been operated is determined by the operation determining means. When the identification symbol is dynamically displayed by the operation determination means, the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol is switched to another dynamic display mode by the switching means based on the determination that the operation means has been operated. .. An operation in which a switchable period set to be switchable to another dynamic display mode by the switching means and a switching prohibition period in which switching to another dynamic display mode is prohibited are determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. Each is set to the target display mode. The dynamic display information signal is a signal showing the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means separately for the first time and the second time added to the first time, and is a dynamic display information signal. Is configured. In the dynamic display mode determining means, the first dynamic display mode determined based on the first time and the second dynamic display mode determined based on the second time are determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, respectively. .. As the switchable period, the switchable period is set within the period in which the first dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed. Therefore, since the first dynamic display mode set within the switchable period is configured to be set separately, there is an effect that the control load for setting the first dynamic display mode to be switched can be reduced. ..

In the game machine D1, the switching means switches a plurality of preset setting modes based on the determination that the operating means has been operated by the operation determining means, and corresponds to the switched setting modes. The process of switching to the dynamic display mode is executed, and the dynamic display mode determining means switches to the setting mode switched by the switching means as the first dynamic display mode based on the first time. The corresponding dynamic display mode is determined respectively, and the second dynamic display mode is determined based on the set setting mode and the second time based on the end of the switchable period. A game machine D2 characterized by being.

According to the game machine D2, based on the determination that the operation means has been operated by the operation determination means, a plurality of preset setting modes are switched, and a dynamic display mode corresponding to the switched setting modes is used. The process of switching to is executed by the switching means. The dynamic display mode determining means determines, as the first dynamic display mode, the dynamic display mode corresponding to the setting mode switched by the switching means based on the first time, and the switchable period has expired. Based on this, the second dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the set setting mode and the second time. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load for setting the second dynamic display mode at the start of fluctuation can be reduced.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the switching means switches the setting modes in order in a predetermined order based on the operation of the operating means by the operation determining means. Machine D3.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machines D1 or D2, the setting modes are sequentially switched by the switching means in a predetermined order based on the operation of the operating means by the operation determining means. By operating the player, there is an effect that it is possible to easily understand which setting mode is to be switched to next.

<Feature E group>
A plurality of effect determining means for executing a hit / fail determination based on the establishment of a start condition, an effect executing means for executing an effect based on the result of the hit / fail determination by the pass / fail determination means, and a plurality of effects executed by the effect executing means. In a gaming machine having a production determining means determined from the production and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning / failing determination by the hit / fail determination means being a hit. While the effect is being executed by the effect executing means, a plurality of notice effect executing means for executing the notice effect based on the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / fail determination means, and a plurality of notice effects executed by the notice effect executing means. The notice effect determination means determined from the notice effect, the first operation means that can be operated by the player, the second operation means different from the first operation means, and the first operation means and the second operation means. The operation discriminating means for determining that the operation has been performed is provided, and the plurality of advance notice effects are operations in which the content of the advance notice effect is changed based on the operation by the first operation means and the second operation means. A notice effect is included, and at least a first period in which the operation by the first operation means is possible is set in the operation notice effect, and the operation by the second operation means is performed during the first period. A game machine E1 characterized by having an invalidating means for invalidating.

According to the game machine E1, the hit / fail determination is executed by the hit / miss determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. An effect based on the result of the hit / miss determination by the hit / miss determination means is executed by the effect execution means. The effect executed by the effect executing means is determined by the effect determining means rather than a plurality of effects. Based on the result of the winning / failing determination by the winning / failing determination means, the privileged game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privileged game executing means. While the effect is being executed by the effect executing means, the advance notice effect based on the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / fail determination means is executed by the notice effect execution means. The notice effect executed by the notice effect execution means is determined by the notice effect determination means from the plurality of notice effects. It is determined by the operation determining means that the first operating means that can be operated by the player and the second operating means that is different from the first operating means have been operated. The plurality of advance notice effects include an operation advance notice effect in which the content of the advance notice effect changes based on the operation by the first operation means and the second operation means. At least a first period during which the operation by the first operating means can be performed is set in the operation notice effect, and the operation by the second operating means is invalidated by the invalid means during the first period. As a result, the operation is set to be invalid, so that the player can easily understand that the correct operation has not been performed. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

In the game machine E1, the first operating means has a pressing portion that can be pressed by the player, and the second operating means can detect that a part of the player's body is in contact with or close to each other. The game is characterized in that the player is arranged at a position where the detection unit can detect the player by pressing the pressing unit of the first operating means. Machine E2.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, the following effects are played. That is, the first operating unit is provided with a pressing portion that can be pressed by the player. In addition, the second operation unit is provided with a detection unit capable of detecting that a part of the player's body is in contact with or close to each other. When the player presses the pressing unit of the first operating means, the second operating means is arranged at a position where the player can be detected by the detecting unit. As a result, it is possible to detect both the first operating means and the second operating means, and it is possible for the player to perform an effect on the condition that both are detected. Therefore, there is an effect that a game machine that is easy for the player to play can be provided.

In the game machine E2, in the operation notice effect, the content of the notice effect changes based on the determination by the operation determination means that the detection unit of the second operation means has detected the detection for a predetermined time or longer. A game machine E3 characterized in that a notice production is included.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, the content of the advance notice effect changes based on the fact that the detection unit of the second operation means has detected the detection for a predetermined time or more by the operation determination means. Since the specific advance notice effect is included in the operation advance notice effect, it is possible to provide a novel effect by the player, and there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

In any of the game machines E1 to E3, the operation notice effect does not teach the instruction notice effect in which the instruction effect for teaching the operation timing of the first operation means is executed and the operation timing of the first operation means. A game machine E4 characterized in that at least a non-teaching notice effect is included.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E3, a teaching notice effect for instructing the operation timing of the first operating means is executed, and an operation timing of the first operating means is provided. Since the non-teaching notice effect that is not taught is included in at least the operation notice effect, the more the game is played, the easier it is to be able to display the non-teaching notice effect, and it is possible to make the player play the game more. It has the effect of being able to do it.

<Characteristic F group>
Based on the establishment of the start condition, the hit / fail determination means for executing the hit / fail judgment, the effect execution means for executing the effect indicating the result of the hit / fail judgment by the pass / fail determination means, and the effect content determination for determining the effect content by the effect execution means. A state in which power is not supplied to the game machine in the game machine having the means and the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game which is advantageous to the player based on the hit / fail determination result. However, a timekeeping means that has a power supply means that can supply power for a predetermined period and can measure time even when power is not supplied, a timekeeping data acquisition means that acquires timekeeping data from the timekeeping means, and a timekeeping data acquisition means. Based on the timekeeping data acquired by the timekeeping data acquisition means, the timekeeping control means that executes the control process related to the predetermined game and the acquisition data acquired by the timekeeping data acquisition means in a period shorter than the predetermined period. When the operating period determining means for determining whether or not the set operating period has passed and the operating period determining means determine that the operating period has elapsed, the control process by the timekeeping control means is prohibited. A gaming machine F1 characterized by having a prohibition setting means for the purpose of performing.

According to the game machine F1, the hit / miss determination is executed by the hit / miss determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. An effect indicating the result of the hit / miss determination by the hit / miss determination means is executed by the effect execution means. The effect content by the effect execution means is determined by the effect content determining means. Based on the hit / fail determination result, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. It has a power supply means capable of supplying electric power for a predetermined period even when the power is not supplied to the game machine, and the time is measured by the timing means even when the power is not supplied. Timekeeping data is acquired from the timekeeping means by the timekeeping data acquisition means. Based on the timekeeping data acquired by the timekeeping data acquisition means, the control process related to the predetermined game is executed by the timekeeping control means. The operating period determining means determines whether or not the operating period set for a period shorter than a predetermined period has elapsed from the acquired data acquired by the timekeeping data acquiring means. When it is determined by the operating period determining means that the operating period has elapsed, the control process by the timekeeping control means is prohibited by the prohibition setting means. As a result, the control process can be set to be prohibited by the timekeeping control means before the period during which the power supply means of the timekeeping means cannot supply power elapses. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that an erroneous control is executed based on an inaccurate timekeeping information due to a power shortage.

In the game machine F1, the timekeeping means is configured to be able to time the date and time, and the operating period is set at a date and time set in a period equal to or less than the predetermined period from the time when the game machine is manufactured. A game machine F2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F1, the following effects are played. That is, the date and time are timed by the timekeeping means. The operating period is set at a date and time set within a predetermined period or less from the time when the game machine is manufactured. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to further suppress the occurrence of a problem after a predetermined period has passed.

<Characteristic G group>
Based on the establishment of the start condition, the hit / fail determination means for executing the hit / fail judgment, the effect execution means for executing the effect indicating the result of the hit / fail judgment by the pass / fail determination means, and the effect content determination for determining the effect content by the effect execution means A state in which power is not supplied to the game machine in the game machine having the means and the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game which is advantageous to the player based on the hit / fail determination result. However, a timekeeping means that has a power supply means that can supply power for a predetermined period and can measure time even when power is not supplied, a timekeeping data acquisition means that acquires timekeeping data from the timekeeping means, and a timekeeping data acquisition means. A timekeeping control means that executes control processing related to a predetermined game based on the timekeeping data acquired by the timekeeping data acquisition means, and a power supply that discriminates information based on a voltage value supplied to the timekeeping means from the power supply means. It has a determination means and a prohibition means for prohibiting control by the timekeeping control means when the voltage value output from the power supply means is determined by the power supply determination means to be equal to or less than a predetermined set value. A game machine G1 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine G1, the hit / fail determination is executed by the hit / miss determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. An effect indicating the result of the hit / miss determination by the hit / miss determination means is executed by the effect execution means. The effect content by the effect execution means is determined by the effect content determining means. Based on the hit / fail determination result, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. It has a power supply means capable of supplying electric power for a predetermined period even when the power is not supplied to the game machine, and the time is measured by the timing means even when the power is not supplied. Timekeeping data is acquired from the timekeeping means by the timekeeping data acquisition means. Based on the timekeeping data acquired by the timekeeping data acquisition means, the control process related to the predetermined game is executed by the timekeeping control means. Information based on the voltage value supplied from the power supply means to the time measuring means is discriminated by the power supply discriminating means. When the voltage value output from the power supply means is determined by the power supply determination means to be equal to or less than a predetermined set value, the control by the timekeeping control means is prohibited by the prohibition means. As a result, when the voltage value supplied to the timekeeping means is equal to or less than the set value, the timekeeping control means sets the control process to prohibit, so that incorrect control is executed based on inaccurate timekeeping information due to power shortage. It has the effect of suppressing defects.

<Characteristic H group>
A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information necessary for executing a game lottery based on an entry port where a game ball can enter and a game ball entering the entry opening, and a lottery information acquisition means thereof. Dynamic display that dynamically displays the winning / failing judgment means that executes the winning / failing judgment when the lottery condition is established based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means, and the identification information indicating the winning / failing judgment result by the winning / losing judgment means A control means, a storage means for storing the lottery information, and a display means for displaying an identification symbol capable of identifying the number of lottery information stored by the storage means, at least until the lottery condition is satisfied. When the variable means that can be changed to the first state in which the game ball easily enters the ball entry port and the second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state and the first condition are satisfied. In addition, when the first opening and the second condition for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state are satisfied, the variable means is more advantageous to the player than the first opening. At least to the second opening that is variable from the second state to the first state, and to the entrance while being changed to the second opening by the variable control means. When a game ball enters and the identification information is dynamically displayed, the display means has a start information display control means for displaying a start display mode indicating the start of the dynamic display. A game machine H1 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine H1, the lottery information necessary for executing the lottery of the game is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball enters the entrance where the game ball can enter. .. Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, the winning / failing determination is executed by the winning / failing determination means when the lottery condition is satisfied. The identification information indicating the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / miss determination means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display control means. The lottery information is stored by the storage means at least until the lottery conditions are satisfied. An identification symbol capable of identifying the number of lottery information stored by the storage means is displayed by the display means. It is variable by the variable means to a first state in which the game ball is easy to enter the ball entry port and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. When the first condition is satisfied, the first opening and the second condition, which are changed from the second state to the first state by the variable means, are satisfied, so that the player is more advantageous than the first opening. It is variable by the variable control means to the second open, which is variable from the second state to the first state by the variable means. If a game ball enters the entrance and the identification information is dynamically displayed while the variable control means is variable to the second opening, a start display indicating the start of the dynamic display is displayed. The mode is displayed on the display means by the start information display control means. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the identification information based on the game ball entering the ball entrance is displayed while the second opening is changed. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the player will enter the ball at the second opening. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the game machine H1, the game ball is configured to be able to enter at all times, and the lottery information is always acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the entry of the game ball. , The lottery information acquired based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball entry port and the lottery information acquired based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball entry port at all times are individually stored. The lottery information stored in the storage means is such that the lottery condition is preferentially satisfied with the lottery information acquired based on the entry into the ball entrance, and the start information display control means While the second opening is set, the game ball enters the ball entry port, and the identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result based on the lottery information that always enters the ball entry port is dynamically displayed. If so, the gaming machine H2 is characterized in that the start display mode is displayed during the dynamic display.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H1, the following effects are played. That is, in the storage means, the lottery information acquired based on the entry of the ball into the entrance and the game ball are configured to be able to enter at all times, and the lottery information is acquired based on the entry of the game ball. The lottery information acquired based on the fact that the ball has entered the constant entry port acquired by the means is individually stored. In the lottery information stored in the storage means, the lottery conditions are satisfied with priority given to the lottery information acquired based on the entry into the ball entrance. When a game ball enters the entrance while the second opening is set, and identification information indicating a winning / failing judgment result based on the lottery information that always enters the entrance is dynamically displayed. The start display mode is displayed by the start information display control means during the dynamic display. Therefore, since the start display mode is displayed before the identification symbol entered in the second opening is dynamically displayed, the identification symbol based on the ball entered in the second opening is dynamically displayed in advance. It has the effect of notifying the player.

<Feature I group>
A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information necessary for executing a game lottery based on an entry port where a game ball can enter and a game ball entering the entry opening, and a lottery information acquisition means thereof. A winning / failing determination means that executes a winning / failing determination when the lottery condition is satisfied based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means, and a storage means that stores the lottery information at least until the lottery condition is satisfied. , A display means for displaying an identification symbol capable of identifying the number of lottery information stored by the storage means, a first state in which a game ball is likely to enter the ball entry port, and a game ball rather than the first state. A variable means that can be changed to a second state that makes it difficult to enter the ball, and a first opening that changes the variable means from the second state to the first state when the first condition is satisfied. When the second condition is satisfied, the variable means is at least variable to the second open, which is variable from the second state to the first state, so as to be more advantageous to the player than the first open. Judgment information that dynamically displays the control means, the determination means for determining the establishment of the first condition and the second condition based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery opportunity, and the determination information indicating the determination result by the determination means. The display means includes a display means and a display time determining means for determining a display time for dynamically displaying the determination information, and the display time determining means displays determination information indicating the second condition on the determination information display means. The gaming machine I1 is characterized in that a display time longer than the normal time is determined until the lottery opportunity is established a predetermined number of times based on the fact that the lottery has been performed.

According to the game machine I1, the lottery information necessary for executing the lottery of the game is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball enters the entrance where the game ball can enter. .. Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, the winning / failing determination is executed by the winning / failing determination means when the lottery condition is satisfied. The lottery information is stored by the storage means at least until the lottery conditions are satisfied. An identification symbol capable of identifying the number of lottery information stored by the storage means is displayed by the display means. It is variable by the variable means to a first state in which the game ball is easy to enter the ball entry port and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. When the first condition is satisfied, the variable means is changed from the second state to the first state. When the first opening and the second condition are satisfied, it is more advantageous to the player than the first opening. The variable means is varied by at least the variable control means to the second open, which is variable from the second state to the first state. Based on the establishment of the predetermined lottery opportunity, the establishment of the first condition and the second condition is determined by the determination means. Judgment information indicating the determination result by the determination means is displayed by the determination information display means. The display time for dynamically displaying the determination information is determined by the display time determining means. Based on the determination information indicating the second condition being displayed on the determination information display means, the display time determination means determines a display time longer than the normal time until the lottery opportunity is established a predetermined number of times. As a result, even if the second condition is continuously satisfied, the display time longer than the normal time is determined after the second opening, so that the identification symbol based on the lottery information stored in the storage means during that time is determined. Is dynamically displayed, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the number of lottery information stored in the storage means becomes too large.

<Characteristic J group>
A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information used for a game lottery based on an entry port where a game ball can enter, and a lottery information acquisition method based on the entry of the game ball into the entry opening. A storage means that stores the lottery information acquired by the means until at least the start condition is satisfied, and a discrimination symbol display means that individually displays a discrimination symbol corresponding to each of the lottery information stored in the storage means. , A hit / fail determination means for executing a hit / fail judgment based on the establishment of the start condition, a symbol display means for displaying an identification symbol indicating a hit / fail judgment result by the hit / miss judgment means, and a dynamic display of the identification symbol. When the lottery information is stored in the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the display mode and the storage means, a winning / failing determination is made based on the stored lottery information before the start condition is satisfied. Based on the advance hit / fail determination means to be executed, the discrimination symbol variable display means for varying the display mode of the discrimination symbol in a display mode capable of identifying the determination result by the prior hit / fail determination means, and the hit / fail determination result. A timekeeping means capable of measuring time in a game machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player, and a timekeeping data determination means for discriminating the timekeeping data by the timekeeping means. When it is determined by the timekeeping data determination that the value is a predetermined set value, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is different from that of other periods. The effect period setting means for setting at least the determined specific period and the preparation period for starting the specific period before the specific period, and the display mode indicating the specific pass / fail determination by the discrimination symbol variable means. It has a prohibition means for prohibiting the setting of the preparation period when the discrimination symbol is displayed and it is determined that the dynamic display of the identification symbol corresponding to the discrimination symbol ends within the preparation period. Characterized game machine J1.

According to the game machine J1, the lottery information used for the lottery of the game is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry port where the game ball can enter. The lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means is stored by the storage means at least until the start condition is satisfied. The discriminant symbol is individually displayed by the discriminant symbol display means corresponding to each lottery information stored in the storage means. Based on the establishment of the start condition, the hit / fail determination is executed by the hit / fail determination means. An identification symbol indicating the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / miss determination means is displayed by the symbol display means. The dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. When the lottery information is stored in the storage means, the winning / failing determination is determined by the advance winning / failing determination means based on the stored lottery information before the start condition is satisfied. The display mode of the discriminant symbol is changed by the discriminant symbol variable display means in a display mode in which the determination result by the prior hit / fail determination means can be identified. Based on the hit / fail determination result, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. The timed data by the timed means capable of measuring is determined by the timed data discriminating means. When it is determined by the timekeeping data discrimination that it is a predetermined set value, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is specified so that the dynamic display mode different from other periods is determined. The period and the preparation period for starting the specific period before the specific period are set at least by the effect period setting means. The setting of the preparation period is prohibited when the discrimination symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating a specific pass / fail judgment by the discrimination symbol variable means and it is determined that the dynamic display of the identification symbol corresponding to the discrimination symbol ends within the preparation period. Prohibited by means. As a result, it is possible to set a period in which the preparation period is not set, and it is possible to make the player predict the hit / fail determination result depending on whether or not the preparation period is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the playability can be further enhanced and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

<Characteristic K group>
A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information used for a game lottery based on an entry port where a game ball can enter, and a lottery information acquisition method based on the entry of the game ball into the entry opening. A storage means that stores the lottery information acquired by the means until at least the start condition is satisfied, and a discrimination symbol display means that individually displays a discrimination symbol corresponding to each of the lottery information stored in the storage means. , A hit / fail determination means for executing a hit / fail judgment based on the establishment of the start condition, a symbol display means for displaying an identification symbol indicating a hit / fail judgment result by the hit / miss judgment means, and a dynamic display of the identification symbol. While the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the display mode and the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means are displayed, the suggestion display mode suggesting the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / miss determination means. Is displayed on the display means, the suggestion display mode determining means for determining the suggestion display mode displayed by the suggestion display control means based on the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / fail determination means, and the storage means. When the lottery information is stored, prior to the start condition being satisfied, the pre-win / fail determination means for executing the win / fail judgment based on the stored lottery information and the determination result by the pre-win / fail determination means are displayed. A discriminant symbol variable display means that changes the display mode of the discriminant symbol in an identifiable display mode, and a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the hit / fail determination result. In the gaming machine having the above, it is determined that the time measuring means capable of measuring the time, the time measuring data discriminating means for discriminating the time measuring data by the time measuring means, and the preset value determined by the timed data discrimination. In this case, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is different from other periods in the specific period in which the dynamic display mode is determined, and the suggestion display mode before the specific period. The effect period setting means for setting at least the preparation period for prohibiting the display of the above and the suggestion display control means display the discrimination symbol in a display mode indicating a specific hit / fail judgment by the discrimination symbol variable means, and the discrimination symbol is displayed. When it is determined that the dynamic display of the identification symbol corresponding to the symbol starts the dynamic display within the preparation period and ends within the specific period, the suggestion display mode is displayed after the transition to the specific period. A game machine K1 characterized in that it is to be displayed.

According to the game machine K1, the lottery information used for the lottery of the game is acquired from the lottery information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry port where the game ball can enter. The lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means is stored by the storage means at least until the start condition is satisfied. The discriminant symbol is individually displayed by the discriminant symbol display means corresponding to each lottery information stored in the storage means. Based on the establishment of the start condition, the hit / fail determination is executed by the hit / fail determination means. An identification symbol indicating the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / miss determination means is displayed by the symbol display means. The dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. While the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is displayed, the suggestion display mode suggesting the result of the hit / fail determination by the pass / fail determination means is displayed on the display means by the suggestion display control means. The suggestion display mode displayed by the suggestion display control means is determined by the suggestion display mode determining means based on the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / miss determination means. When the lottery information is stored in the storage means, the winning / failing determination is executed by the advance winning / failing determination means based on the stored lottery information before the start condition is satisfied. The display mode of the discriminant symbol is changed by the discriminant symbol variable display means in a display mode in which the determination result by the prior hit / fail determination means can be identified. Based on the hit / fail determination result, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. The timed data by the timed means capable of measuring is determined by the timed data discriminating means. When it is determined by the timekeeping data discrimination that the value is a predetermined set value, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is specified so that the dynamic display mode different from other periods is determined. A period and a preparation period for prohibiting the display of the suggestion display mode before the specific period are set at least by the effect period setting means. In the suggestion display control means, the discrimination symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating a specific hit / fail judgment by the discrimination symbol variable means, and the dynamic display of the identification symbol corresponding to the discrimination symbol starts dynamically within the preparation period. When it is determined that the dynamic display ends within the specific period, the suggestion display mode is displayed by the suggestion display control means after the transition to the specific period. As a result, the suggestion display mode is displayed in a specific period, so that the player can expect the player to have a specific period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.
The game machine K2 is characterized in that, in the game machine K1, the suggestion display control means displays the suggestion display mode on the display means when the transition to the specific period is triggered.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine K1, the following effects are played. That is, the suggestion display mode is displayed on the display means by the suggestion display control means when the transition to the specific period is triggered. Therefore, since the suggestion display mode is displayed at the timing of transition to the specific period, there is an effect that the suggestion display mode can be displayed at the timing synchronized with other same gaming machines.

In the game machine K1 or K2, the determination symbol of the display mode indicating the specific hit / fail determination is the display mode indicating that the hit / fail judgment result is a hit.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effect of the game machine K1 or K2, the judgment symbol of the display mode showing the specific pass / fail judgment is a hit / fail judgment result, so that the player can win at a specific period. There is an effect that it is possible to recognize a certain thing and to make it easy to hit in a specific period.

In any of the game machines K1 to K3, the suggestion display mode determining means is used as the suggestion display mode indicating that the hit / fail determination result by the hit / miss determination means is a hit when the specific period is set. The gaming machine K4, which determines a specific suggestion display mode.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines K1 to K3, the following effects are played. That is, in the suggestion display mode determining means, when a specific period is set, the specific suggestion display mode is determined by the suggestion display mode determining means as a suggestion display mode indicating that the hit / fail determination result by the hit / fail determination means is correct. It is determined. Therefore, there is an effect that the value of the specific period can be increased and the player can expect the specific period to be reached.

In any of the game machines K1 to the game machine K4, the voice control means includes a voice output means capable of outputting voice and a voice control means for executing control of the voice output from the voice output means. , When the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, if the period until the specific period is set is less than or equal to the predetermined period, at least the privilege until the specific period is set. The game machine K5 is characterized in that it controls the volume of sound related to the game so as to be output at a volume lower than that at normal times.

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines K1 to K4, the following effect is played. That is, the voice control means executes the control of the voice output from the voice output means capable of outputting the voice. When the award game is executed by the award game execution means, if the period until the specific period is set is less than or equal to the predetermined period, at least the sound related to the award game is heard until the specific period is set. The volume is controlled by the voice control means so that the volume is output at a lower volume than usual. Therefore, even if a big hit is made before the specific period, it is difficult for the surrounding players to notice that it is a big hit, and it is easy to make the player think that it is a big hit when the specific period is reached. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to think that it is easy to be a big hit in a specific period.

<Characteristic L group>
Based on the establishment of the start condition, the hit / fail determination means for executing the hit / fail judgment, the effect execution means for executing the effect indicating the result of the hit / fail judgment by the pass / fail determination means, and the effect content determination for determining the effect content by the effect execution means. A state in which power is not supplied to the game machine in the game machine having the means and the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game which is advantageous to the player based on the hit / fail determination result. However, a timekeeping means that has a power supply means capable of supplying power for a predetermined period and can measure time even when power is not supplied, and a timekeeping data acquisition means that acquires timekeeping data from the timekeeping means. , A timekeeping control means that executes control processing related to a predetermined game based on the timekeeping data acquired by the timekeeping data acquisition means, a first setting that executes control by the timekeeping control means, and control by the timekeeping control means. It has at least a switching means capable of switching to a second setting for prohibiting the above, a switching setting means for switching and setting by operating the switching means, and an operation control means for controlling the operation of the switching operation means. A game machine L1 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine L1, the hit / fail determination is executed by the hit / miss determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. An effect indicating the result of the hit / miss determination by the hit / miss determination means is executed by the effect execution means. The effect content by the effect execution means is determined by the effect content determining means. Based on the hit / fail determination result, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. It has a power supply means capable of supplying electric power for a predetermined period even when the power is not supplied to the game machine, and the time is measured by the timing means even when the power is not supplied. Timekeeping data is acquired from the timekeeping means by the timekeeping data acquisition means. Based on the timekeeping data acquired by the timekeeping data acquisition means, the control process related to the predetermined game is executed by the timekeeping control means. The switching means switches between the first setting for executing the control by the timekeeping control means and the second setting for prohibiting the control by the timekeeping control means. By operating the switching means, switching is set by the switching setting means. The operation of the switching operation means is controlled by the operation control means. As a result, since the switching means is operated by the switching setting means to switch, there is an effect that the setting can be automatically switched without manually setting the setting.

<Characteristic M group>
Based on the establishment of the start condition, the hit / fail determination means for executing the hit / fail judgment, the effect execution means for executing the effect indicating the result of the hit / fail judgment by the pass / fail determination means, and the effect content determination for determining the effect content by the effect execution means. A state in which power is not supplied to the game machine in the game machine having the means and the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game which is advantageous to the player based on the hit / fail determination result. However, a timekeeping means that has a power supply means capable of supplying power for a predetermined period and can operate even when the power is not supplied, a timekeeping data acquisition means that acquires timekeeping data from the timekeeping means, and a timekeeping means thereof. It has a timekeeping control means that executes a control process related to a predetermined game based on the timekeeping data acquired by the data acquisition means, and the timekeeping means is used when power is not supplied to the game machine. It has a switching means for switching between a first state in which power is supplied from the power supply means and a second state in which power is supplied from the game machine based on the power being supplied to the game machine. A game machine M1 characterized by.

According to the game machine M1, the hit / fail determination is executed by the hit / miss determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. An effect indicating the result of the hit / miss determination by the hit / miss determination means is executed by the effect execution means. The effect content by the effect execution means is determined by the effect content determining means. Based on the hit / fail determination result, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. The timekeeping data is obtained by the timekeeping data acquisition means, which has a power supply means capable of supplying power for a predetermined period even when the power is not supplied to the game machine and can operate even when the power is not supplied. To be acquired. Based on the timekeeping data acquired by the timekeeping data acquisition means, the control process related to the predetermined game is executed by the timekeeping control means. In the timekeeping means, when the power is not supplied to the game machine, the power is supplied from the game machine based on the first state in which the power is supplied from the power supply means and the power is supplied to the game machine. It is switched to the second state by the switching means. As a result, it is possible to extend the period during which power can be supplied during the period when the power is not turned on to the game machine. Therefore, there is an effect that the timekeeping means can be used for a longer time.

<Characteristic N group>
It has a main control means for executing game control, a slave control means for executing game control based on a control signal from the main control means, and a display means, and the main control means has predetermined conditions. Based on the establishment, the lottery information acquisition means for acquiring the lottery information, the storage means for storing the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means at least until the start condition is satisfied, and the establishment of the start condition. Based on this, the pass / fail determination means for executing the pass / fail determination and the dynamic display time for determining the dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol indicating the pass / fail determination result by the pass / fail determination means on the display means are determined. The dynamic display time determining means, the dynamic display information generating means for generating the dynamic display information signal for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, and the above-mentioned It has a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the stop display of the identification symbol indicating that the result of the result of the success / failure determination is a hit, and the slave control The means displays the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol based on the dynamic display information signal, and the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. In a gaming machine having a display control means, the slave control means is identified by an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation determination means that determines whether the operation means has been operated, and the operation determination means. It has a switching means for switching the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol to another dynamic display mode based on the determination that the operating means has been operated when the symbol is dynamically displayed. The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means of the slave control means includes a switchable period set to be switchable to another dynamic display mode by the switching means and another dynamic display mode. A switching prohibition period in which switching is prohibited is set, respectively, and the dynamic display information signal is a first time which is a dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means and its dynamic. The dynamic display mode determining means uses the dynamic display mode up to the second time as the storage means, which is composed of a signal indicating a second time, which is the remaining time after the elapse of a predetermined time among the display times. The second time between the first dynamic display mode determined based on the number of stored lottery information and the second time after the first dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed. The second dynamic display mode to be determined based on is determined respectively. A game machine N1 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine N1, the control of the game is executed by the main control means. The control of the game is executed by the subordinate control means based on the control signal from the main control means. In the main control means, lottery information is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. The lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means is stored by the storage means at least until the start condition is satisfied. Based on the establishment of the start condition, the hit / fail determination is executed by the hit / fail determination means. The dynamic display time is determined by the dynamic display time determining means for determining the dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol indicating the result of the hit / fail determination on the display means. The dynamic display information generating means generates a dynamic display information signal for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means. The privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the stop display of the identification symbol indicating that the result of the success / failure determination by the hit / fail determination means is a hit. In the slave control means, the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the dynamic display information signal. The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is displayed and controlled by the display control means. Whether or not the operating means that can be operated by the player has been operated is determined by the operation determining means. When the identification symbol is dynamically displayed by the operation determination means, the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol is switched to another dynamic display mode by the switching means based on the determination that the operation means has been operated. .. In the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means of the slave control means, the switchable period set to be switchable to another dynamic display mode by the switching means and the other dynamic display mode are switched. A switching prohibition period is set for each of the prohibitions. In the dynamic display information signal, the first time, which is the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, and the second time, which is the remaining time of the dynamic display time after the lapse of a predetermined time, It is composed of signals indicating. The dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode up to the second time based on the number of lottery information stored in the storage means. The first dynamic display mode and the first dynamic display mode are dynamic. During the period from the display to the second time, the second dynamic display mode determined based on the second time is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, respectively, so that when the dynamic display is started. It has the effect of reducing the control load.

Each of the gaming machines is a gaming machine Z1 characterized by being a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through a winning opening), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some of them are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

The game machine Z2, wherein each of the game machines is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and when the stop It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that each of the gaming machines is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the above, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "
<Others>
Conventionally, a lottery is performed when a game ball is won at the starting port, and a variable effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal screen. Then, in order to increase the winning of the game ball to the starting port, an ordinary electric accessory is provided at the starting port. When a through gate is provided to trigger a lottery to determine whether or not to operate the ordinary electric accessory, a lottery is performed as the game ball passes through the through gate, and the lottery is successful. A pachinko machine is known that operates an electric accessory for a certain period of time to facilitate the entry of a game ball into a starting port.
In such a pachinko machine, a plurality of opening patterns for ordinary electric accessories are set, and there are two opening patterns, a long opening in which the opening time is longer than the normal time and a normal opening in which the opening time is set shorter than that. Some are set (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-13528).
In this type of pachinko machine, if the long opening is established in a short period of time after the long opening is executed, a large number of reserved balls are generated, and the reserved storage area becomes excessively large.
The present technical idea is to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing an excessively large storage area of a storage means.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the game machine of the technical idea 1 executes a lottery of the game based on the entry port where the game ball can enter and the game ball entering the entry port. A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information necessary for A storage means for storing the lottery information, a display means for displaying an identification symbol capable of identifying the number of lottery information stored by the storage means, and a game ball at the entrance. A variable means that can be changed to a first state in which the ball is easy to enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first state, and when the first condition is satisfied, the variable means is used as the first state. When the first opening and the second condition, which are variable from the second state to the first state, are satisfied, the variable means is changed from the second state to the first state so as to be more advantageous to the player than the first opening. A variable control means that is at least variable to a second opening that is variable to one state, a determination means that determines the establishment of the first condition and the second condition based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery opportunity, and a determination means thereof. The display time determining means includes a determination information display means for dynamically displaying determination information indicating a determination result by the determination means, and a display time determining means for determining a display time for dynamically displaying the determination information. Based on the determination information indicating the second condition being displayed on the determination information display means, the display time longer than the normal time is determined until the lottery opportunity is established a predetermined number of times.
<Effect>
According to the game machine described in Technical Thought 1, the lottery information necessary for executing the lottery of the game is acquired based on the fact that the game ball enters the entrance where the game ball can enter. Obtained by means. Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, the winning / failing determination is executed by the winning / failing determination means when the lottery condition is satisfied. The lottery information is stored by the storage means at least until the lottery conditions are satisfied. An identification symbol capable of identifying the number of lottery information stored by the storage means is displayed by the display means.
It is variable by the variable means to a first state in which the game ball is easy to enter the ball entry port and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. When the first condition is satisfied, the variable means is changed from the second state to the first state. When the first opening and the second condition are satisfied, it is more advantageous to the player than the first opening. The variable means is varied by at least the variable control means to the second open, which is variable from the second state to the first state.
Based on the establishment of the predetermined lottery opportunity, the establishment of the first condition and the second condition is determined by the determination means. Judgment information indicating the determination result by the determination means is displayed by the determination information display means. The display time for dynamically displaying the determination information is determined by the display time determining means. Based on the determination information indicating the second condition being displayed on the determination information display means, the display time determination means determines a display time longer than the normal time until the lottery opportunity is established a predetermined number of times.
As a result, even if the second condition is continuously satisfied, the display time longer than the normal time is determined after the second opening, so that the identification symbol based on the lottery information stored in the storage means during that time is determined. Is dynamically displayed, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the number of lottery information stored in the storage means becomes too large.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
292 RTC (Timekeeping Means)
S218, S219 Part of the privilege type determination means
S305 determination means
S307, S309 Dynamic display mode determining means
S1004 privilege game execution means
S1330 Notifying means

Claims (1)

An entrance where a game ball can enter, and
A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information necessary for executing a lottery for a game based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entrance.
A winning / failing determination means that executes a winning / failing determination when the lottery conditions are established based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means.
A storage means for storing the lottery information and a storage means for storing the lottery information at least until the lottery conditions are satisfied.
A display means for displaying an identification symbol capable of identifying the number of lottery information stored by the storage means, and a display means.
A variable means that can be changed to a first state in which the game ball is easy to enter into the ball entry port and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state.
When the first condition is satisfied, the variable means is changed from the second state to the first state. When the first opening and the second condition are satisfied, it is more advantageous to the player than the first opening. A variable control means that at least variates the variable means to a second opening that is variable from the second state to the first state.
A determination means for determining the establishment of the first condition and the second condition based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery opportunity, and
Judgment information display means that dynamically displays judgment information indicating the judgment result by the judgment means,
It has a display time determining means for determining a display time for dynamically displaying the determination information.
Based on the determination information indicating the second condition being displayed on the determination information display means, the display time determining means sets a display time longer than the normal time until the lottery opportunity is established a predetermined number of times. A game machine characterized by being a decision.

Images